JP2017195932A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of heightening interest when a game medium approaches a general prize-winning area, by heightening concern or interest of a player to the kind of a winning general prize-winning area.SOLUTION: A game machine, which is a game machine having a startup winning hole and general winning holes, is provided with a plurality of adjacent general winning holes having each different specific value to be imparted, and includes distribution means for distributing a game medium into each general winning hole. For example, as the distribution means, a game nail, a distributor 55, and a distribution region nailed with a game nail, and enclosed by guide plates 58a, 58b on right and left sides, are enumerated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 51

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a prize ball is paid out when a gaming ball launched into the gaming area wins a winning opening. It is equipped with a general prize opening (ordinary prize opening), a start prize opening, and a big prize opening, and variable display is executed based on winning at the start prize opening, and when the display result of variable display becomes a specific display result for the player As a gaming machine that is controlled to be in an advantageous advantageous state so that a big winning opening is opened and a jackpot game is possible, a gaming machine in which three general winning openings are arranged adjacent to each other is known (for example, Patent Documents). 1).

JP 2011-235161 A

  In a gaming machine in which the general winning area is generally arranged as in Patent Document 1, the player's interest in winning the general winning area is low because the winning in the general winning area has a low influence on the game. Tend. For this reason, in order to improve the interest of the entire gaming machine, it is required to attract the player's attention to winning in the general winning area.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and in a gaming machine having a general winning area, the player's interest and interest in which general winning area to win is increased, and a game medium is provided in the general winning area. Provide a gaming machine that can enhance interest when entering.

  With each means according to (1) to (20) shown below, in a gaming machine having a general winning area, it is possible to focus on which general winning area to win, and a game medium enters the general winning area. You can enhance your interest when you do.

(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (general winning openings 50E to 50G). ) And
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for executing
Granting means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (award ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A plurality of general winning areas with different specific values to be given are provided adjacent to each other (for example, the number of winning balls 50E, 50G given when winning a prize, a prize given when winning a prize, The number of balls is 15 general winning opening 50F etc.),
It further comprises distribution means for distributing the game media to each general winning area (for example, a distribution area surrounded by the game nail, clune 55, guide plates 58a and 58b, and where the game nail is implanted). A gaming machine.
According to this, in a gaming machine having a general winning area, it is possible to easily understand that the player has won a general prize and to increase the player's interest and interest in which general winning area to win. It is possible to enhance the interest when a game medium enters.

(2) The gaming machine of (1),
A game medium holding device (game ball holding device S) capable of holding a game medium;
A game medium discharge means (solenoid 52) capable of discharging the game medium held by the game medium storage device toward the plurality of general winning areas (general winning ports 50E, 50F, 50G);
A gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1 in FIG. 49) characterized by further comprising:
According to this, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game medium released from the game medium holding device, and it is also possible to have an interest in which general winning area the game medium enters.

(3) A gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
An amusement machine characterized by further comprising effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing effects by the effect devices (image display device 5, second image display device 5S, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp 9). .
According to this, interest can be enhanced by production.

(4) The gaming machine of (3),
Production operation accepting means (operation button 30 and release operation button 30S) for receiving production operations (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation, release operation, etc.) for executing a predetermined production by the production device. ) Is further provided.
According to this, the interest in a predetermined production can be heightened by performing a predetermined production according to production operation.

(5) A gaming machine according to (3) or (4),
The effect execution means can execute a predetermined effect (display of a message such as “release!” On the second image display device 5S) when the game medium is released from the game medium holding device. A gaming machine characterized by
According to this, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game medium is released from the game medium holding device.

(6) Any one of the gaming machines selected from (2) to (5),
A gaming machine further comprising a release operation receiving means (a release operation button 30S) for receiving a release operation for releasing a game medium held by the game medium holding device.
According to this, the game medium is released from the game medium holding device in accordance with the release operation, so that interest relating to the release operation can be generated.

(7) The gaming machine of (6),
The notification that the release operation is effective is performed in at least one aspect among image, sound, light, and accessory action (at least one of the hold number display devices 53A to 53D emits light). A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the release operation is effective.

(8) A gaming machine according to (6) or (7),
Effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing effects by the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp 9);
Production operation accepting means (operation button 30) for accepting production operations (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation, etc.) for executing a predetermined production by the production device,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the release operation receiving means (release operation button 30S) is configured by a device different from the effect operation receiving means.
According to this, the distinction between the production operation and the release operation becomes clear.

(9) Any of the gaming machines selected from (6) to (8),
A gaming machine, further comprising release promotion notification means (holding number display devices 53A to 53D, a most frequently held state notification device 53E, and a second image display device 5S) for performing release promotion notification for prompting the release operation.
According to this, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the player should perform the release operation.

(10) The gaming machine of (9),
Production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of performing production by a production device (cut-in notice production, pseudo-continuous notice production, chance eye notice production);
Production operation receiving means (operation button 30) for receiving a production operation (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation, etc.) for executing a predetermined production by the production device;
Production operation promotion notification for performing the production operation promotion for prompting the production operation (display of continuous hitting suggestion information 4100, display of operation suggestion information 4050, operation suggestion information 4050, and character 4200 of "Stop all symbols!") Means (image display device 5),
The release promotion notification is performed in a manner different from the presentation operation promotion notification (one of the on-hold number display devices 53A to 53D is turned on, the most on-hold state notification device 53E is turned on, and the second image display device 5S has “ "Please do the release operation !!" message is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is easy to grasp that the player should perform the release operation.

(11) Any one of the gaming machines selected from (2) to (6),
The game medium held by the game medium holding device is released regardless of the player's operation (for example, the release operation button 30S is operated when a predetermined period has passed since the maximum number of holds 4). A game machine characterized by being automatically released regardless of whether it is released.
According to this, it is possible to save time and effort for the player to perform an operation to release the game medium from the game medium holding device.

(12) Any one of the gaming machines selected from (2) to (11),
The specific value to be given differs depending on the general winning area where the game medium has entered (for example, the number of prize balls given when a game ball wins the general winning opening 50E, 50G is 10, A gaming machine characterized in that the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball wins in the mouth 50F is 15).
According to this, attention can be paid to which general winning area the game medium enters.

(13) Any one of the gaming machines selected from (2) to (12),
It is further characterized by further comprising game medium number notifying means (holding number display devices 53A to 53D, most frequently held state notifying device 53E, second image display device 5S) for notifying the number of game media held by the game medium holding device. To play.
According to this, the player can easily grasp the number of game media held by the game media holding device.

(14) Any one of the gaming machines selected from (2) to (13),
The apparatus further comprises upper limit notification means (the most frequently held state notification device 53E, the second image display device 5S) for notifying that the number of game media held by the game medium holding device has reached an upper limit value (for example, 4). A gaming machine.
According to this, the player can grasp that the game medium cannot be further held by the game medium holding device, and can take appropriate measures.

(15) Any one of the gaming machines selected from (2) to (14),
The system further comprises winning history notifying means (first area α of the image display device 5, second image display device 5S) for notifying the winning histories (the number of winnings to each general winning opening) regarding the plurality of general winning areas. A gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to grasp the winning history related to the general winning area.

(16) Any one of the gaming machines selected from (2) to (15),
When a power interruption occurs while the game medium is on hold, the game medium that is on hold is released. A gaming machine characterized by being released).
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being put on hold when the power supply is stopped.

(17) Any one of the gaming machines selected from (2) to (16),
Even when the power interruption occurs while the game medium is held, the game medium is kept on hold (the game medium held by the game ball holding device S is not automatically released even when the power supply is detected). A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being released at an unintended timing due to the occurrence of power interruption.

(18) Any one of the gaming machines selected from (2) to (17),
A gaming machine, further comprising a post-entry effect device (roulette 70 in FIG. 54) that operates when a game medium that has entered the general winning area acts.
According to this, it is possible to enhance the interest after the game medium enters the general winning area.

(19) The gaming machine of (3),
The effect device includes an image device (image display device 5) having a screen on which the variable display (variable display of the fourth symbol, variable display of the decorative symbol) is executed,
Notification for prompting the game medium holding device to hold the game medium (display of the message “Please store balls in the hold device” in the second image display device 5S), game medium held by the game medium holding device Number notification (notification by causing any one of the number-of-holding display devices 53A to 53D to emit light, display of the message “the number of holding device holdings is x” in the second image display device 5S), the game medium holding Notification that the number of game media held by the device has reached the upper limit value (notification by causing the most frequently held state notification device 53E to emit light, “the number of reservations of the holding device reaches the upper limit (4) in the second image display device 5S) Message is displayed), and a message for prompting the release operation (message “Do release operation !!” in the second image display device 5S) Display), notification that the game medium held in the game medium holding device has been released (display of the message “release!” In the second image display device 5S), and winnings related to the plurality of general winning areas At least one or more of the history notifications (display of the number of winnings in the general winning openings 50E to 50G in the second image display device 5) is different from the image device (holding number display devices 53A to 53D, most frequently). A game machine, which is performed by the hold state notification device 53E and the second image display device 5).
According to this, it is possible to prevent an effect executed in the image apparatus from being hindered by a predetermined notification.

  The modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions according to means 1 to means 75 shown below. The invention according to (1) to (19) described above may further include the configuration of the invention according to means 1 to means 75 described below.

  The modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions according to means 1 to means 11 described below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIG. 33), a winning rate at a start winning opening in a gaming machine is calculated, and a character wearing clothes of different colors according to the calculated winning rate. A gaming machine that executes an effect display to be displayed has been proposed. However, it is necessary not only to display information on the number of game media that have entered the entry area such as the start winning opening on the information display means, but also to make the information more easily visible. The invention according to means 1 to 11 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to make it easy to visually recognize information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means 1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having an entry area (a first start winning port, a second starting winning port, first to fourth general winning ports 50A to 50D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. And
Information that can display entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Comprising display means (image display device 5);
The information display means displays effect information (for example, a decorative pattern and a fourth pattern) different from the entry information in an area where visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as exemplified in FIG. 42), Is displayed in a second area β) different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means 2
A gaming machine of means 1,
The information display means can display the approach information regardless of the aspect of the effect information (as illustrated in FIG. 42, whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed and the fourth symbol is also displayed. Regardless of whether or not is variably displayed, the number of wins to the general winning opening, the number of winning to the first starting winning opening, the number of winning to the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α. In addition, the number of winnings displayed can be updated according to the winnings at each winning award)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, approach information can be visually recognized irrespective of the aspect of effect information.

The invention according to means 3 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having an entry area (a first start winning port, a second starting winning port, first to fourth general winning ports 50A to 50D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. And
Error detection means (abnormality detection sensor group 26) for detecting errors (for example, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc.);
Information that can display entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Display means (image display device 5),
The information display means sends error information (for example, an error message) for notifying the occurrence of the error to an area where visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as illustrated in FIGS. 42 and 43). Is displayed in a second area β) that is different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means 4 is
A gaming machine of means 3,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the error information is displayed (as illustrated in FIG. 43, regardless of whether an error message is displayed or not) The number of winnings, the number of winnings at the first start winning opening, the number of winnings at the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α, and are displayed according to the winnings at each winning opening. The number of winnings can be updated)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the entry information can be visually recognized even when the error information is displayed.

The invention according to means 5 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having an entry area (a first start winning port, a second starting winning port, first to fourth general winning ports 50A to 50D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. And
Information that can display entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Comprising display means (image display device 5);
The information display means displays a display result of variable display (for example, a display result of a final decoration symbol (final stop symbol) or a fourth symbol) executed based on the fact that the game medium has entered the start area, and the entry information. Is displayed in a region where the visibility of the game is not hindered (as illustrated in FIG. 42, the second area β different from the first area α in which the number of winnings at each winning opening is displayed). It is.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means 6 is
A gaming machine of means 5,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the variable display is being executed (as illustrated in FIG. 42, whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed, Regardless of whether or not the 4th symbol is variably displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α. Displayed and the number of winning prizes displayed can be updated according to the winnings at each winning award)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
This makes it possible to visually recognize the entry information even when variable display is being executed.

The invention according to means 7
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 1 to the means 6,
Operable operation means (operation button 30);
Display setting means for setting whether or not to display the entry information on the information display means in accordance with the operation of the operation means (as shown in FIG. And a presentation control CPU 120 for setting whether or not to display the winning information related to the number of winnings in the first area α.
According to this, it becomes possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to display the entry information.

The invention according to means 8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 1 to the means 7,
Operation means (operation button 30) that can be operated by the player;
A total period setting means for setting the total period of the entry information in accordance with the operation of the operation means (production control CPU 120 for setting the total period based on the setting by the operation button 30 as illustrated in FIG. 46); A gaming machine characterized by further comprising:
According to this, the total period can be set according to the player's judgment.

The invention according to means 9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 1 to the means 8,
It further comprises a game state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a game state (a big hit game state, a probability change state, a short time state, a low base state, a high base state, etc.)
The information display means can display the entry information according to the gaming state (as illustrated in FIG. 45, the number of winnings in the low base state and the number of winnings in the high base state can be displayed separately. Is)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information corresponding to the gaming state.

The invention according to means 10 is
A gaming machine of means 9,
Variable display means for performing variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure) based on the fact that the game medium has entered the start area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B),
The gaming state control means includes a low-frequency state (a low base state in which high opening control for the second starting prize opening is not executed) and a high-frequency state (first 2) A high base state in which high opening control for the start winning a prize is being executed)
The information display means includes the entry information relating to the period controlled to the low frequency state (such as the number of general winnings in the low base state illustrated in FIG. 45) and the entry relating to the period controlled to the high frequency state. It is a gaming machine that can display information (such as the number of general winnings in the high base state illustrated in FIG. 45).
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information according to the low frequency state and the entry information according to the high frequency state.

The invention according to means 11 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 1 to the means 10,
Notification is made when the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition (as exemplified in FIG. 46, when the set number of winnings per total period does not satisfy a predetermined reference value, the fact is notified) A gaming machine further comprising a notification means (image display device 5) for displaying a message.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition.

  The modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include the inventions relating to the means 12 to means 20 and the inventions relating to the means 21 to means 32 described below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-200305 (paragraph 0208, FIG. 59), when a game ball wins a general winning opening during a big hit, one aspect of the start memory display changes, and the start memory There has been proposed a gaming machine that notifies whether the special figure variation display game corresponding to the display is “winning” or “out of game”. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters the normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up on the effect display device, There has been proposed a gaming machine in which, when the counted number reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery, a player is informed that an in-memory ream is generated. In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 2, the number of entered balls is uniformly counted up one by one when the game balls enter the normal winning opening.

  The entry of the game medium into the general winning area has a lower influence on the game as compared to the entry of the game medium into the start winning area where a special symbol variable display is executed when the game medium enters. ing. Further, when the display result of the special symbol variable display becomes the specific display result, it is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. In this advantageous state, the game medium can be entered into the specific winning area where the game medium can enter. Compared with the approach, the player's interest is low and it is difficult to enhance the interest. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game medium enters the general winning area. The invention according to the means 12 to the means 20 and the invention according to the means 21 to the means 32 are made in view of the above situation, and aim to enhance the interest of the game in a gaming machine having a general winning area. .

The gaming machine of means 12 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for executing
Granting means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (award ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Predetermined conditions (effective start winning or first starting winning opening, reaching to the second starting winning opening, reach in a specific period (1 minute, 2 minutes or 5 minutes after the general winning) after the game medium enters the general winning area When the state is established), there is provided an effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect F (prefetching notice effect), specific effect G (variation result notice effect)). This is a characteristic gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in a 47th effect form to a 49th effect form).
According to this, it is possible to be interested in whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period after the game medium enters the general winning area, and the specific effect is obtained after the gaming medium enters the general winning area. It is possible to increase interest until it is executed.

The gaming machine of means 13 is
A gaming machine of means 12,
Execute a notification effect to execute a notification effect that identifiable that the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area (any one of the characters A to C appears immediately after winning the general winning opening) A gaming machine further comprising means.
According to this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.
In addition, as the notification effect for informing that the state after the game medium has entered, it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. Includes an effect that is difficult to grasp and an effect that makes it easy for the player to grasp whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. For example, as the former effect, there is an effect of outputting a sound effect for a relatively short period of time (for example, about 0.5 to 2 seconds) immediately after the game medium enters the general winning area, and as the latter effect, the general winning area There is an effect in which the character is continuously displayed on the image display device until a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) elapses immediately after the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means 14 is
A gaming machine of means 13,
The notification effect is an effect of notifying whether or not it is the specific period (the specific period (character display period) varies depending on which of the characters A to C is displayed).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the interest of the game until the specific effect is executed can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 15 is
A gaming machine of means 13 or means 14,
The specific period varies depending on the form of the notification effect (the display period when the character A appears is 1 minute, the display period when the character B appears is 2 minutes, and the display when the character C appears) (The period will be 5 minutes)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, interest can be improved by paying attention to the aspect of the notification effect.
The configuration of the gaming machine according to the means 15 is preferably as follows, for example.
First, based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) has a predetermined time period (for example, 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes). Any specific period is selected, and an effect mode (for example, the type of character to be displayed on the image display device 5) is determined based on the selected specific period, and a notification effect (character is specified for the specific period) is determined. The effect to be displayed) is executed.
For example, when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected, the first effect mode (for example, display of the character A) is performed more than when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected. It is better to increase the determined ratio. In addition, when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected, the second effect mode (for example, display of the character B) is more effective than when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected. It is better to increase the determined ratio.
In addition, when the specific period and the effect mode of the notification effect correspond to one to one (if character A is fixed for 1 minute, character B is 2 minutes, character C is fixed for 3 minutes) ), Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) determines one of the predetermined effect modes. The notification effect (the effect of displaying the character for a specific period) may be executed according to the determined effect mode.

The gaming machine of means 16 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 12 to the means 15,
The variable display means is based on a start condition based on the entry of a game medium into the start winning area (when the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, a game ball wins the first start winning opening (effective start winning). ), The start condition (controlled by the big hit game state) is established after the game ball wins (effective start win) at the second start winning opening when the second reserved memory number does not reach the upper limit. The variable display is executed based on the fact that the special display game is not executed).
The effect executing means corresponds to a variable display game to be notified in the start winning memory display area 5H for notifying the display result of variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in a 47th effect form and a 49th effect form) characterized in that a hold change effect that changes a display part from a normal mode to a special mode is executed as the specific effect.
According to this, the game medium enters the general winning area by creating an interest of notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied when the gaming medium enters the general winning area. It is possible to further enhance the interest until the specific performance is executed.

The gaming machine of means 17 is
A gaming machine of means 16,
Holding information corresponding to variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (the display color is changed in response to the existence of a variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) Display information) on the display device (image display device 5) is further provided, holding information display control means (production control CPU120),
The notice effect is for notifying the display result of variable display corresponding to the hold information according to the form of the hold information (if the start winning determination result specifying command is a command that specifies “big hit”, The display part corresponding to the command is a pending change effect in which the normal mode (for example, blue or red) is changed to the special mode (for example, gold) at a higher rate than the command for designating “out”. It is a gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 18 is
A gaming machine of means 17,
The effect execution means displays the object (characters A to C) on the display device so as to be able to specify that the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area is specified (to the general winning opening) (Any of the characters A to C appear immediately after winning)
The notice effect is an effect that the player can recognize when the object changes the mode of the hold information (the display portion corresponding to the special game that is held by the displayed character performing some action) The game machine is characterized in that the production is changed from a normal mode to a special mode.
According to this, it is possible to suggest the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and the advance notice of the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied by the common object, and the game to the general winning area It is possible to further enhance the interest from the entry of the medium to the execution of the specific performance.
Specifically, it is possible to recognize that the player can recognize when the object changes the mode of the hold information by creating an effect in which the mode of the hold information also changes with a change in the display mode of the object (for example, a predetermined action). Become.

The gaming machine of means 19 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 12 to the means 18,
In the gaming machine, the specific effect is not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period (the specific effect F and the specific effect G are not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period). is there.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period.

The gaming machine of means 20 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 12 to the means 19,
There are a plurality of the general winning areas (four from the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D),
The specific period varies depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered (if the first general winning port 50A or the second general winning port 50B has been won, one minute, two minutes, or five minutes are specified from the general winning point) It can be a period (characters A to C can appear), but when winning in the third general prize 50C or the fourth general prize opening 50D, only a 5 minute period from the general prize can be a specific period (only character C It is a gaming machine characterized in that it can appear)).
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

  Moreover, the invention concerning the means 21-means 32 shown below is contained in the form for implementing invention mentioned later.

The gaming machine of means 21 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for executing
Granting means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (award ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Motion detection means (operation button 30 and CPU 120 for effect control) capable of detecting the player's motion;
A specific effect (cut-in notice effect, pseudo-continuation effect) is detected when the player's motion (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stopping operation, all symbol stopping operation) is detected by the motion detecting means after the game medium enters the general winning area. A game machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 50th effect form to the 53rd effect form) characterized by comprising effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notice effect and a chance eye notice effect) .
According to this, after the game medium enters the general winning area, the specific effect is executed in response to the player's action, so that it is possible to enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 22 is
A gaming machine of means 21,
It is informed in a identifiable manner that the game medium has entered the general winning area (in the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, the button icon 4000 is increased each time the general winning a prize is won, 52nd In the production form and the 53rd production form, a notice effect (“cut-in”, “pseudo-run”, “chance eye”) that can be executed every time a prize is awarded to the general winning opening is determined, and the character 4000a corresponding to the determination result The game machine is further provided with notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a notification effect (displayed up to 4000c).
According to this, the player can recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 23 is
A gaming machine of means 22,
Depending on the type of action (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) for enabling execution of the specific effect, the notification effect mode ("cut-in" character 4000a, "pseudo ream" The gaming machine is characterized in that the characters 4000b and 4000c) of “chance eyes” are different.
According to this, the player can recognize which type of operation can perform the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means 24 is
A gaming machine of means 22 or means 23,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general winning port 50A of the left game area 10A or (In the case of winning in the second general winning opening 50B, notification is made at a higher rate than in the case of winning in the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D in the right game area 10B). It is a gaming machine.
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means 25 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 22 to the means 24,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the mode of the notification effect is different (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize opening 50A or the second general prize opening 50B is awarded). In this case, it is possible to display either the “cut-in” character 4000a or the “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b, and when winning in the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D, One of the characters “cut-in” 4000a and the “chance” character 4000c can be displayed).
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means 26 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 22 to the means 25,
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the general winning a prize was won in the normal state). In the case (when winning in the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B in the left gaming area 10A), when winning in the general winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-running state (the first game area 10B in the right gaming area 10B) 3) the general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D)) is notified at a higher rate)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

The gaming machine of means 27 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 22 to the means 26,
The form of the notification effect varies depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect form and the 53rd effect form, the characters “cut-in” 4000a and “pseudo” in the normal state. ("Ream" character 4000b can be displayed, and "Cut-in" character 4000a and "Chance eye" character 4000c can be displayed in the probability variation state or the short time state.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

The gaming machine of means 28 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 21 to the means 27,
The effect execution means can execute the specific effect when the predetermined action is performed after the game medium has entered the general winning area a plurality of times (in the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, (Pseudo-announcement effect can be executed when winning more than 2 times in the prize opening, and chance-notice effect can be executed when winning more than 3 times in the general prize opening)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 29 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 21 to the means 28,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The execution ratio of the specific effect varies depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize opening 50A or the second general prize opening 50B). When winning, the notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when winning in the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means 30 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 21 to the means 29,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the types of specific effects that can be executed differ (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize opening 50A or the second general prize opening). When winning 50B, either a cut-in notice effect or a pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed, and when winning in the third general prize opening 50C or the fourth general prize opening 50D, a cut-in notice effect And any chance chance notice effect)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means 31 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 21 to the means 30,
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the execution ratio of the specific effect varies (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, when a general winning opening is won in the normal state) In the case of winning in the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B in the left gaming area 10A), in the case of winning in the general winning opening in the probability changing state or in the short time state (third general winning in the right gaming area 10B) (When winning at the winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D), a notification is made to enable execution of a specific effect at a higher rate)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

The gaming machine of means 32 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 21 to the means 31,
The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect form and the 53rd effect form, in the normal state, the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-continuous effect). Any one of the notice effects can be executed, and in the case of the probability change state or the short time state, either the cut-in notice effect or the chance eye notice effect can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means 33-means 39 shown below.

The gaming machine of means 33 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for executing
Granting means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (award ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point giving effect, specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
The general winning area when the variable display is being executed (within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed or has been decided to be executed) When the game medium enters and when the variable display is not executed (the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is determined to be executed during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) The gaming machine (27th effect form to 30th effect form pachinko) characterized in that the ratio of the specific effect to be executed differs depending on when the game medium enters the general winning area during the period when the game is not performed. A gaming machine 1).
According to this, when the variable display is executed and when the variable display is not executed, the execution ratio of the specific effect is different, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can do.

The gaming machine of means 34 is
A gaming machine of means 33,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
In the gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 27th effect form and the 29th effect form), the specific effect is an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point giving effect). is there.
According to this, even when variable display is not executed, it is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 35 is
A gaming machine of means 33,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-read notice effect), and the general winning area when the variable display is not executed This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 28th effect form and the 30th effect form), which is not executed when a game medium enters.
According to this, when variable display is executed, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 36 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for executing
Granting means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (award ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point giving effect, specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
The general winning area when the variable display is being executed (within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed or has been decided to be executed) When the game medium enters and when the variable display is not executed (the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is determined to be executed during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) A different specific effect is executed when a game medium enters the general winning area during a period when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a 31st effect form and a 32nd effect form. ).
According to this, when the variable display is being executed and the case where the variable display is not being executed are different different specific effects, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. .

The gaming machine of means 37 is
A gaming machine of means 36,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
When the game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is executed, effects related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-read notice effect) Is executed as the specific production,
When a game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is not executed, an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point giving effect) is executed as the specific effect. This is a characteristic gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form).
According to this, when the variable display is executed, the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area can be further enhanced, and also when the variable display is not executed, the general winning area It is possible to appropriately enhance interest when a game medium enters the game.

The gaming machine of means 38 is
Any one of the gaming machines (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form) selected from the means 33 to the means 37,
Depending on the state when the game medium has entered the general winning area when the variable display is executed, the ratio of the specific effect to be executed is different (for example, a special game at the time of winning a general winning opening) Whether or not the game is executed, the number of reserved memory at the time of winning the general prize opening, and the gaming state at the time of winning the general prize opening is the normal state, or the probability change state or the short time state Depending on the classification of whether or not, etc.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to give interest to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 39 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from means 33 to means 38 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form),
When the variable display is executed, different specific effects are executed according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (for example, a special game is executed when winning the general winning opening) Whether the game is in the normal state, the probability change state, or the short-time state. Depending on the category, etc., different types of specific effects are executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to give interest to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means 40-means 49 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up on the effect display device. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when the counted number reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery, the player is informed that a memory in the memory is generated. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187, the number of entered balls is uniformly counted up by one by entering the game balls into the normal winning opening. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game medium enters the general winning area. The invention according to the means 40 to the means 49 is made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to enhance the interest of games in gaming machines having a general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 40 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for executing
Granting means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (award ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect (specific effect D for gradually increasing the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 from the lowest 0 level to the maximum 10 levels) that changes the performance mode in stages according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. Specific execution execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can be executed,
According to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (a distinction between a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed and a period during which the special symbol variable display is not being executed, etc.) The rate at which the effect mode changes in the effect is different (the rate at which the effect of increasing the filling region 2100a in the gauge image 2100 by one step is different).
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form).
According to this, the interest rate when the game medium enters the general winning area is increased by changing the ratio of the change in the production mode in the specific effect according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can do.

The gaming machine of means 41 is
A gaming machine of means 40,
The variable display means (image display device 5) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 120). Is what
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) The gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 34th effect form) characterized in that the ratio of the effect mode changing in the specific effect is different.
According to this, according to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, the ratio of the effect mode changing in the specific effect is different, so that the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means 41,
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) ) And the display result of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (a jackpot symbol, an off symbol), the rate of change of the production mode in the specific effect is made different. May be. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Accordingly, the rate of change of the production mode in the specific production may be different (for example, it changes at a high rate when it becomes a big hit symbol, and changes at a lower rate when it becomes a loss symbol). .

The gaming machine of means 42 is
A gaming machine of means 40 or means 41,
The variable display means (image display device 5) ends the variable display based on the start condition (previous start winning) after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). And the variable display (the variable display of the first special figure, the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative design) is executed based on the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit gaming state) ,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player;
A notice effect (prefetching notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display as a target of the prefetching notice effect). Further comprising a notice effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) executed before)
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect) The ratio of the change in the effect mode in the specific effect varies according to the variable display count until the variable display is executed), and the pachinko gaming machine of the 35th effect form 1).
According to this, depending on the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed, the ratio of the change in the effect mode in the specific effect varies. The entertainment of the production can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means 42,
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect) Effect in the specific effect depending on the variable display count until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (big hit symbol, off symbol) You may make it the ratio in which an aspect changes differ. Specifically, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) is executed within a predetermined range when the game medium enters the general winning area is executed. In the case of being within (for example, 2 times or less), the rate of change in the effect mode in the specific effect differs depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (high in the case of a big hit symbol) It may be changed at a rate, and when it becomes an outlier design, it may be changed at a lower rate).

The gaming machine of means 43 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 40 to the means 42,
Reach effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a reach effect in association with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern),
When a game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state in the reach change), and after the execution of the reach effect When the game medium enters the general winning area (when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is after reaching the reach state in the reach variation), the rate of change of the production mode in the specific effect is different. A pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 36th effect form.
According to this, when the game medium enters the general winning area before execution of the reach effect, and when the game medium enters the general winning area after execution of the reach effect, the effect mode changes in the specific effect. Different ratios can further enhance the interest of specific effects.

The gaming machine of means 44 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 40 to the means 43,
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D);
Depending on the general winning area where the game medium has entered (when the game ball has won one of the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C, and the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D). The gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 37th effect form) is characterized in that the ratio of the effect mode changing in the specific effect is different.
According to this, the interest rate of the specific effect can be further enhanced by changing the ratio of the change of the effect mode in the specific effect according to the general winning area where the game medium has entered.

The gaming machine of means 45 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for executing
Granting means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (award ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect (specific effect D for gradually increasing the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 from the lowest 0 level to the maximum 10 levels) that changes the performance mode in stages according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. Specific execution execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can be executed,
According to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (a distinction between a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed and a period during which the special symbol variable display is not being executed, etc.) The stage in which the production mode changes in production is different (the number of stages (+1 to +3) for increasing the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 is different).
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 38th effect form to the 42nd effect form).
According to this, depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific effect is different, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can do.

The gaming machine of means 46 is
A gaming machine of means 45,
The variable display means (image display device 5) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 120). Is what
According to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) , A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 39th effect form) characterized in that the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different.
According to this, depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different, and thus the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means 46,
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) ) And the display result of the variable display (a jackpot symbol, a loss symbol) executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage of changing the presentation mode in the specific effect is different. May be. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Accordingly, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production may be different (for example, the number of stages changes when the jackpot symbol is changed, and the number of stages changes when it becomes a loss symbol). good.

The gaming machine of means 47 is
A gaming machine of means 45 or means 46,
The variable display means (image display device 5) ends the variable display based on the start condition (previous start winning) after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). And the variable display (the variable display of the first special figure, the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative design) is executed based on the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit gaming state) ,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player;
A notice effect (prefetching notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display as a target of the prefetching notice effect). Further comprising a notice effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) executed before)
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect) The stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production differs according to the variable display frequency until the variable display is executed), and the pachinko gaming machine of the 40th production form 1).
According to this, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production varies depending on the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice production is executed. The entertainment of the production can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means 47,
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect) Effect in the specific effect depending on the variable display count until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (big hit symbol, off symbol) You may make it the stage in which an aspect changes differ. Specifically, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) is executed within a predetermined range when the game medium enters the general winning area is executed. In the case of within (for example, 2 times or less), the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production varies depending on the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the announcement production (for example, when it becomes a big hit symbol) It is also possible to change the number of stages, and change the number of stages to a smaller number if the pattern is out of place.

The gaming machine of means 48 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 45 to the means 47,
Reach effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a reach effect in association with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern),
When a game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state in the reach change), and after the execution of the reach effect The stage in which the production mode changes in the specific effect is different when the game medium enters the general prize area (when the timing when the game ball wins the general prize opening is after reaching the reach state in the reach variation). Is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in a 41st effect form).
According to this, when the game medium enters the general winning area before execution of the reach effect, and when the game medium enters the general winning area after execution of the reach effect, the effect mode changes in the specific effect. Different stages can further enhance the interest of specific effects.

The gaming machine of means 49 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 45 to the means 48,
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D);
Depending on the general winning area where the game medium has entered (when the game ball has won one of the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C, and the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D). The game machine (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 42nd effect form) is characterized in that the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on whether the game ball is won in any of the above.
According to this, the stage in which a production | presentation aspect changes in a specific production differs according to the general winning area | region where the game medium approached, and can further enhance the interest of a specific production.

  Moreover, the invention concerning the means 50-means 54 shown below is contained in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up on the effect display device. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when the counted number reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery, the player is informed that a memory in the memory is generated. In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, an effect (a count-up display) is executed every time a game ball enters the normal winning opening. In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, when a game medium does not enter the general winning area, it is necessary to grasp this, but this is not considered in the prior art. The invention according to the means 50 to means 54 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and is capable of grasping that a game medium does not enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 50 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) for executing
Granting means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (award ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When the number of game media entering the general winning area in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in 10 minutes in which a game is detected is 0, A special effect (when there are less than 3 winning prizes in the general winning opening in 30 minutes, which is detected as being in the middle) and an image imitating the form of the general winning opening and "There is no general winning prize." A game machine comprising: a specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect E) for displaying a notification image 2200 including characters on the image display device 5.
According to this, it is possible for the player and the game hall to grasp that the number of game media entering the general winning area is less than the predetermined number.

The gaming machine of means 51 is
A gaming machine of means 50,
Setting means for setting whether or not execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means is permitted (an effect of determining whether or not to execute the specific effect E based on the game field setting and the player setting in the display setting table) Control CPU 120),
Clerk operation accepting means (display changeover switch 32) for accepting a setting operation by the clerk,
When the setting operation is accepted by the store clerk operation accepting unit, the setting unit performs setting to permit execution of the specific effect (the specific effect E (notifying that there is no general prize) based on the setting of the display changeover switch 32). , Notification that the number of general prizes is small)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the intention of a game hall can be reflected regarding whether or not to execute a specific effect.

The gaming machine of means 52 is
A gaming machine of means 50 or means 51,
Storage means (a winning number counter area formed in the RAM 122) for storing the number of game media entering into the general winning area (winning number for 30 minutes);
The number of entries stored in the storage means is not held at the time of power interruption (the value of the winning number counter area is erased by power interruption).
According to this, it is possible to reduce the control burden for maintaining the memory of the number of entries at the time of power interruption.

The gaming machine of means 53 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 50 to the means 52,
Depending on the state of the gaming machine, the rate at which the specific effect is executed is different (for example, the specific effect E is executed at a different rate between the normal state and the probability change state or the time-short state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the interest of specific production can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 54 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 50 to the means 53,
Different specific effects are executed according to the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific effect E is executed in a different manner depending on whether it is in the normal state or in the probability variation state or the time-short state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the interest of specific production can be further enhanced.

  Moreover, the invention concerning the means 55-means 62 shown below is contained in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-80531 (FIG. 83), during the execution of a big hit game, the number of prize balls (given value) obtained by entering the game medium into the big prize opening, There has been proposed a gaming machine that executes an effect of displaying a numerical image that distinguishes the number of prize balls (given value) obtained when a game medium enters a normal winning opening (general winning area). In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, the intention of the game hall or the player is not reflected as to whether or not an effect is executed when a game medium enters the general winning area. The invention according to the means 55 to the means 62 is made in view of the above circumstances, and reflects the intention of the game hall and the player as to whether or not the presentation is executed when the game medium enters the general winning area. The purpose is to make it possible.

The gaming machine of means 55 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5);
Granting means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (award ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When a game medium enters the general winning area, a specific effect (displays information in the winning number management table in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31 and the setting of the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30. Based on the setting, the object is increased every time the game ball enters the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed, the specific effect A: the change result notice effect, the specific effect B: the look-ahead Notification means (image display device 5) capable of executing a notice effect);
A gaming machine comprising: setting means (mode change switch 31, display change switch 32, and operation button 30) for setting whether or not execution of the specific effect is permitted by the specific effect executing means. .
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall or the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means 56 is
A gaming machine of means 55,
It further comprises clerk operation accepting means (mode changeover switch 31 and display changeover switch 32) for accepting a setting operation by the clerk,
The setting means performs a setting for permitting execution of the specific effect when a setting operation is received by the store clerk operation receiving means (a winning number management table in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode switch 31). Based on the setting of the display changeover switch 32, the object is increased for each entry of the game ball into the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed, the specific effect A : Enables execution of fluctuation result notice effect, Specific effect B: Enables prefetch notice effect)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the intention of a game hall can be reflected regarding whether or not to execute a specific effect.

The gaming machine of means 57 is
A gaming machine of means 55 or means 56,
A player operation receiving means for receiving a setting operation by the player;
When the setting operation is accepted by the player operation accepting means, the setting means performs a setting for permitting the execution of the specific effect (based on the setting by the operation button 30 during the demonstration screen display, Based on the setting by the operation button 30 in the demonstration screen display, which increases the object every time the game ball enters the game, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed. Can be executed, specific effect B: pre-reading notice effect can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the player's intention regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means 58 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 55 to the means 57,
The specific effect informs the number of game media entering the general winning area in a predetermined period (a period controlled to the big hit gaming state) so as to be able to be specified (the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls to the big winning opening) The game machine is characterized in that the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls are displayed separately.
According to this, the playability in a predetermined period can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 59 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 55 to the means 58,
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect (executes the effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form) when the number of game media entering the general winning area reaches a predetermined number. It is a featured gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 60 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 55 to the means 59,
The specific effect executing means executes different specific effects according to the number of game media entering the general winning area (executes effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form). It is.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 61 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 55 to the means 60,
The specific effect is an effect of notifying the number of game media entering the general winning area in an identifiable manner (increasing the object each time a game ball enters the general winning port)
When a game is not being performed on the gaming machine (the decorative symbol variable display is not executed, and the start winning port specifying command, the general winning port specifying command, and the big winning port winning command are received for a predetermined period of time. An effect control CPU 120 that makes a game end determination based on the absence of the game medium, and in a specific effect, informs that it is possible to specify that the number of game media entering the general winning area is 0 (game end determination is performed). In the event that the object corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning award displayed on the image display device 5 is deleted)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to prevent other players from grasping the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 62 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 55 to the means 61,
The specific effect is a gaming machine characterized in that display information (an object corresponding to the number of winnings in a general winning opening) corresponding to the number of game media entering the general winning area is displayed.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp the number of game media entering the general winning area.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later contains the invention which concerns on the means 63-means 75 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-200305 (paragraph 0208, FIG. 59), when a game ball wins a general winning opening during a big hit, one aspect of the start memory display changes, and the start memory There has been proposed a gaming machine that notifies whether the special figure variation display game corresponding to the display is “winning” or “out of game”. In a gaming machine having such a general winning opening, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening. The invention according to the means 63 to the means 75 is made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to enhance the interest of the game in a gaming machine having a general winning opening.

The gaming machine of means 63 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5);
Granting means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (award ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or short-time state) , The ratio of executing the specific effect is different (in the normal state, the specific effect is executed at a higher rate than the probability change or the short-time state)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a first effect form to a fourth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 64 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5);
Granting means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (award ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or short-time state) , Execute different specific effects (specify the specific effect A in the normal state, and execute the specific effect B in the probability change or short-time state)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in the fifth effect form to the twelfth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 65 is
A gaming machine of means 63 or 64 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second effect form to the fourth effect form, the tenth effect form to the twelfth effect form),
In the first game state (normal state), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes the first entry number,
In the second game state (probability change or short-time state), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes a second entry number different from the first entry number. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 66 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5);
Granting means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (award ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after reaching reach state of reach change) and when during the second period (before reach reach state of reach change or reach change) The rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the game medium entering the general winning area (after the reach fluctuation state is established, it is specified at a higher period than the reach fluctuation period or before the reach fluctuation state is established. Production is performed)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in a thirteenth effect form to a sixteenth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 67 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D) Machine 1),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5);
Granting means (game control microcomputer 100) for giving a specific value (award ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after reaching reach state of reach change) and when during the second period (before reach reach state of reach change or reach change) Different specific effects are executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the specific effect A is executed after the reach state is established, and the specific effect B is executed before the reach state is established. The specific effect A is executed, and the specific effect B is executed during a period other than the reach change or before the reach state of reach change is established)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a 17th effect form to a 24th effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 68 is
A gaming machine of means 66 or 67 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in 14th effect form to 16th effect form, 22nd effect form to 24th effect form),
During the first period (after the reach state of reach variation is established), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes the first entry number,
During the second period (a period other than reach fluctuation or before reach reach is reached), the number of game media entering the general winning area is a second entry number different from the first entry number. In some cases, the specific effect is executed.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 69 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 63 to the means 68 (second effect form, sixth effect form, tenth effect form to twelfth effect form, fourteenth effect form, eighteenth effect form, and twenty-second effect form). Pachinko machine 1)
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D);
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a game medium enters each of the plurality of general winning areas.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to which of the plurality of general winning areas the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means 70 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 63 to the means 69 (a pachinko gaming machine 1 in a fifth effect form to a twelfth effect form, a seventeenth effect form to a twenty-fourth effect form),
The variable display means includes a start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed and the big hit gaming state after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) is variably displayed based on the fact that
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100 for controlling to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player) )When,
Pre-start determination means for performing a pre-start determination to determine whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before the start condition is satisfied (control to a big hit gaming state based on a big hit determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning) And a game control microcomputer 100) for determining whether or not to perform,
The specific effect executing means is
Based on the pre-start determination, an effect (pre-reading notice effect) for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state is applied to the specific effect (specific effect B) before the start condition for the variable display to be targeted is satisfied. It is a gaming machine characterized by being executed as
According to this, it is possible to give more interest to the specific effect by notifying that the advantageous state is controlled before the variable display start condition is established.

The gaming machine of means 71 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 63 to the means 70 (the first pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first effect form to the 24th effect form),
The variable display means includes a start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed and the big hit gaming state after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) is variably displayed based on the fact that
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100 for controlling to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player) )When,
Start time determination means for performing start time determination to determine whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the start condition is satisfied (for the big hit determination stored when starting variable symbol variable display) A game control microcomputer 100) for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state based on a random number,
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that, based on the determination at the start time, an effect of notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state (a change result notice effect) is executed as the specific effect.
According to this, it is possible to give more interest to the specific effect by notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 72 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 63 to the means 71 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the third effect form and the fifteenth effect form),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution ratio of the specific effect varies depending on the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the frequency of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 73 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 63 to the means 72 (the 11th effect form, the 23rd effect form pachinko gaming machine 1),
The game machine is characterized in that a specific effect is executed in accordance with the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the frequency of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 74 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means 63 to the means 73 (4th effect form, 8th effect form, 12th effect form, 16th effect form, 20th effect form, 24th effect form pachinko machine 1) Because
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D);
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the order of entry of game media into the plurality of general winning areas is a predetermined order.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the order in which the game media enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means 75 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 63 to the means 74 (4th effect form, 8th effect form, 12th effect form, 16th effect form, 20th effect form, 24th effect form pachinko machine 1) Because
There are other winning areas different from the general winning area (first starting prize opening, second starting prize opening),
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the order of entry of game media into the general prize area and the order of entry of game media into the other prize areas is a specific order. .
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the order of entry of the game media into the general winning area and other winning areas.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. (A) The figure which shows the winning number information managed by the winning number management table, (b) The figure which shows the winning number information managed by the display control table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between game hall setting and player setting. It is explanatory drawing in the case of performing a display setting with the operation button which a player can operate. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the object corresponding to the winning to a general winning opening. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the number of wins to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state. It is explanatory drawing which shows each production performed according to a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a fluctuation result notice effect and a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 1st effect aspect-a 4th effect aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 5th effect aspect-an 8th effect aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 9th effect aspect-a 12th effect aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 13th effect aspect-the 16th effect aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 17th effect aspect-a 20th effect aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 21st effect aspect-the 24th effect aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 25th effect aspect and a 26th effect aspect. It is a figure which shows the number-of-wins information managed by the number-of-wins management table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a point provision effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 27th effect form-the 30th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a gauge update effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 33rd effect form-the 36th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 37th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 38th effect form-the 41st effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 42nd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a non-winning alert | report effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 43rd effect form-the 46th effect form. It is a figure which shows the appearance ratio of character AC in the 47th production form-the 49th production form. It is a figure which shows the display period of character AC in the 47th effect form-the 49th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 47th production form-the 49th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending | holding change effect in the 47th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change result notice effect in the 48th effect form. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing and execution period of each production in the 47th production form and the 48th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 50th production form and the 51st production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a continuous hit operation alert | report and cut-in notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation alert | report and pseudo | simulation continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation alert | report and pseudo | simulation continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of all the symbol stop operation alerting | reporting, and a chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of all the symbol stop operation alerting | reporting, and a chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of each announcement effect for every general winning opening in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which displays winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode of an error message. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which does not display winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the item example of the number-of-wins information which can be displayed on a 1st area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting method of a total period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which displays winning number information, and the setting which does not display winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which displays winning number information, and the setting which does not display winning number information. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine provided with a game ball holding device and a second image display device. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine provided with a game ball holding | maintenance apparatus and a 2nd image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example by which a game ball is discharge | released from a game ball holding | maintenance apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which a game ball is discharge | released from a game ball | bowl holding | maintenance apparatus, and wins a general winning opening provided in the croon. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which the game ball which passed the gate wins in the general winning opening provided in the croon. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the accessory which operate | moves by the effect | action of the game ball which won the general winning opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of the general winning opening in a game board surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which the game ball which passed between the position induction members provided above the image display apparatus wins each winning opening provided in the stage below the image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example by which the effect ball stored in the effect ball storage apparatus is discharge | released according to the winning of the game ball to a general winning opening.

  As described above, the entry of the game medium into the general prize area has an effect on the game as compared to the entry of the game medium into the start prize area where a special symbol is variably displayed when the game medium enters. Is low. Further, when the display result of the special symbol variable display becomes the specific display result, it is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. In this advantageous state, the game medium can be entered into the specific winning area where the game medium can enter. Compared with the approach, the player's interest is low and it is difficult to enhance the interest. Under such circumstances, game nails may be maintained on the game hall side so that entry of the game media into the general winning area is substantially difficult.

  However, on the gaming machine manufacturer side, it is usual to design the game board surface so that the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Therefore, originally, it is desirable that the game nail is in a maintenance state of the game nail so that the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). In this case, it is necessary to raise the player's interest in the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and to make the player aware of the frequency of the game medium entering the general winning area.

  Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game medium enters the general winning area. In a gaming machine according to an embodiment to be described later, it is possible to enhance the interest of gaming in a gaming machine having a general winning area.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 3a formed in a frame shape that is provided on the gaming machine frame 3 so as to be opened and closed.

  The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area 10 surrounded by guide rails. In this game area 10, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven. The game area 10 includes a left game area 10A and a right game area 10B. The game area 10 is an area through which a game ball can pass on the game board 2. The left game area 10 </ b> A on the left side and the right game area 10 </ b> B on the right side with respect to the center of the game area 10.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area 10). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed is variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. It is not limited. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". . There may be one special symbol display device.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) each identifiable are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be identified is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. Deriving and displaying the display result means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended.

  In the image display device 5, as the display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three areas may be provided so that they can be bonded or separated, or can be bonded and separated. . The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. When the first special symbol display device 4A is executing variable display of the first special diagram, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to perform effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 4B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). There are numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. Can be, for example, a decoration image showing a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, decorative symbols (designs that consist of the characters “Accuracy”) and blank symbols (which are also known as “2R probable big hits”) and blank symbols ( A symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the lower right part of the display screen of the image display device 5, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 5A and 5B for displaying a fourth symbol after a decorative symbol, a special symbol and a normal symbol which will be described later. In this embodiment, the 4th symbol variable display for the first special figure is displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special figure, and the display result of the variable display is derived. The 4th symbol display area 5A and the 4th symbol variable display for the 2nd special symbol are displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the 2nd special symbol, and the display result of the variable display is derived. A fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special figure is provided.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the decorative design is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special design. (However, to be precise, the variable display of the decorative design is specified by the CPU 120 for effect control. This is performed by measuring the variation time recognized based on the command.) When performing an effect using the image display device 5, for example, an effect in which the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects, for example, and effects such that the moving object shields all or part of the screen are performed. For this reason, even when looking at the display screen on the image display device 5, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not it is currently in a variable display state. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether the current state of variable display is being performed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special figure and the 4th symbol for the second special figure are sometimes collectively referred to as the 4th symbol. The 4th symbol display area 5A for the first special figure and the second special figure The 4th symbol display area 5B for illustration may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  In the variable display (variable display) of the 4th symbol, the 4th symbol display areas 5A and 5B are displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, the 4th symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is white, This is realized by continuing the blinking state in which the four symbol display area 5B is black) and is repeatedly turned on (displayed) and turned off (not displayed) at predetermined time intervals. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same.

  Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. Will remain. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. In addition, when the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of off. Will remain. As described above, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 5A.

  Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. Will remain. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. Further, when the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of off. Will remain. As described above, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 5B.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the holding of the variable display occurs when a game ball enters (starts winning) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. To do. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  As an example, the start winning storage display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. Then, when the start condition (the first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, it is not displayed. One of the display parts in the mode (transmission color) (for example, the leftmost display part in the display part in the non-display mode) is changed to blue display. In addition, when the game condition of the special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied (second start condition) based on the game ball having entered the second start winning opening, it is not displayed. One of the display parts which are the modes is changed to red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to the non-display mode.

  In other words, when a start winning is generated, in the start winning memory display area 5H, holding information (an object indicated by a round shape in FIGS. 1 and 31, etc.) corresponding to a special game executed based on the start winning is obtained. Display control to be newly displayed is performed. For example, the hold information is displayed in order from the left according to the order in which the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the hold information is satisfied (in the above example, it is also the order in which the start condition is satisfied). When a new start prize is generated when n pieces of hold information are displayed (when n special figure games are put on hold), the (n + 1) th hold information from the left corresponding to the new start prize Will be newly displayed. When the start condition for the special figure game being held is satisfied, the leftmost holding information corresponding to the special figure game is deleted, and the nth (n ≧ 2) holding information from the left is left one by one. Shifted to the (n-1) th display.

  The order in which the start conditions for the special figure game are satisfied is not limited to the order in which the start conditions are generated, but the start condition for the special figure game for the second special figure is greater than the start condition for the special figure game for the first special figure. It may be established with priority (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation). On the other hand, the start condition of the special figure game relating to the first special figure is established in preference to the start condition of the special figure game relating to the second special figure (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation). Anyway.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including. A movable accessory 1000 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

  The movable accessory 1000 has a built-in motor and lamp for operating a star-shaped member. The movable accessory 1000 operates (rotates and lights) when an effect for notifying a big hit, for example, a later-described change result notification effect or a prefetch notification effect is executed.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 27 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 27 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not enter or enters the second start winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball enters the second start winning opening by tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 27 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state. Easy to open and open.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If so, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 28 for the large winning opening shown in FIG. 2, and changes into an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Forming a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 28 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the special prize winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 28 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the special prize opening. A game ball that has entered a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure game started earlier is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. When the start condition for starting the figure game is not satisfied, variable display is suspended. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold memory The number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied when the second start condition is satisfied, the second holding memory is stored. The number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). The added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may be the total reserved memory number or the special figure reserved memory number.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gates 41A and 41B.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening, for example, four general winning openings 50A to 50D which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. A winning area is provided.

  The general winning ports 50A to 50D are constituted by ball receiving members that project forward (player side) from the game board surface. The ball receiving member receives the game ball flowing down from above from the opening, and the horizontal length (horizontal width) of the opening of the ball receiving member is larger than the diameter of one game ball, but the game ball 2 It is smaller than the diameter of the piece. Therefore, two or more game balls are arranged in the horizontal direction so as not to pass through the opening of the ball receiving member. Further, the interval between the ball receiving members provided with the respective general winning ports 50A to 50D is an interval through which at least one game ball can pass. Also, a winning ball device for switching the opening / closing of the openings of the general winning ports 50A to 50D (for example, an accessory corresponding to the normally variable winning ball device 6B for switching the opening / closing of the second start winning port) is not provided. It is always open. Further, even if a game ball wins the general winning openings 50A to 50D, neither the special-game variable display start condition nor the normal-game variable display start condition is established based on the win.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined number of prize balls are given to the player as a specific value based on the fact that the game balls have won the general prize opening. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Along with the winning of a game ball in the winning opening, a variable winning ball apparatus, for example, a normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B for performing opening / closing control of the second start winning opening, or a special variable for performing opening / closing control of the large winning opening. It is good also as the specific value provided when a game ball wins a general winning opening to make the winning ball apparatus 7 actuate and to make a game ball easy to win a 2nd start winning opening or a big winning opening.

  Further, the specific value given to the player may be made different depending on the general winning opening, for example, 5 when the game ball wins the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C. 10 prize balls are awarded when a game ball is awarded to the first general prize opening 50A or the fourth general prize opening 50D (that is, a specific value having a different size is given). May be given). The specific value given when a game ball wins the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is a predetermined number of winning balls, but the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening. When a game ball is won in 50D, the normal variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 7 may be operated (that is, a different type of specific value is given).

  In addition, different effects may be executed according to the specific value given in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, for example, according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening And a case where the variable winning ball apparatus operates according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening (that is, when the specific value type is different), so that different effects are executed. Also good. In addition, when 10 prize balls are awarded according to the winning of game balls to the general prize opening, and when 5 prize balls are awarded according to the winning of game balls to the general prize opening. Different effects may be executed (that is, when specific values have different magnitudes).

  As shown in FIG. 2, the first general prize corresponding to each of the first general prize opening 50A, the second general prize opening 50B, the third general prize opening 50C, and the fourth general prize opening 50D is shown in FIG. It is detected by the mouth switch 24A, the second general winning port switch 24B, the third general winning port switch 24C, and the fourth general winning port switch 24D. When a game ball is detected by the first general prize port switch 24A, the second general prize port switch 24B, the third general prize port switch 24C, and the fourth general prize port switch 24D, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected. Will be paid out as a prize ball.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by providing a winning opening switch corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 50A to 50D, in the gaming control microcomputer 100, a game ball is won at the general winning opening. In addition to the above, it is also possible to detect which general winning award the game ball has won.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the structure in which a different general winning opening switch is provided for every general winning opening, and a common general winning opening switch may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. For example, a common prize port switch (a switch for detecting that a prize has been won in a general prize opening provided in the left game area 10A) is provided for the first general prize opening 50A and the second general prize opening 50B. A common winning award switch (a switch for detecting that a winning has been made in a general winning opening provided in the right game area 10B) is provided for the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. Anyway. In addition, a common winning port switch (a switch for detecting that a winning has been made to any of the general winning ports) is provided for all of the first winning ports 50A to 50D. You may be allowed to.

  In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. The game balls taken into the out mouth are collected on the game island via a ball collection passage (not shown) communicating with the out mouth. The game balls won in each winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, the first to fourth general winning openings) are collected through a winning ball collecting box (not shown) It is to be collected on the amusement island via the collection passage. An out ball detector (not shown) is provided in the ball collection passage. As a result, in the out ball detector, a game ball that has been driven into the game area 10 (a game ball guided to the out port without winning any of the winning ports, and a winning ball set by winning in any of the winning ports) Game balls collected in a cage) All game balls are detected. Each time a game ball is detected by the out-ball detector, a detection signal is input to the effect control board 12, so that the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of game balls that have been shot into the game area 10, that is, the number of outs. It is possible. When the out-ball detector is configured to include a counter whose value increases by 1 each time a game ball is detected, the effect control is performed every time the counter value increases by a certain number (for example, 10). The out number increase signal may be output to the substrate 12 so that the number of outs can be tabulated in a certain number unit (for example, 10 units) on the effect control CPU 120 side.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 3a, there is an upper plate 60 that holds (stores) a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. Is provided. For example, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate 60.

  A keyhole 61 is provided on the right side of the upper plate 60. The store clerk in the amusement hall inserts the key into the key hole 61 to open the locking device (not shown), thereby using the hinge mechanism to attach the glass door frame 3a to the gaming machine frame 3. It can be opened and closed. By maintaining the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, maintenance of the gaming board (gauge board including gaming nails and winning holes) 2 (for example, measures to eliminate clogging), A mode changeover switch 31 and a display changeover switch 32 described later can be operated.

  A lower plate 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper plate 60 is provided directly below the upper plate 60, and a game ball as a game medium is directed to the game area on the lower right side of the upper plate 60. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) 63 is provided which is operated by a player or the like for firing. For example, the hitting operation handle 63 adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  The operation button 30 is a jog dial that can be pressed and rotated. The operation button 30 is not limited to a button that can be pressed or rotated, and may be a button that can be touched or pressed, such as a touch panel, or tilted like a lever-type switch. It may be operable, or may be capable of being pressed and tilted like a joystick. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. In other words, the operation button 30 only needs to be configured so that a predetermined operation action by the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's operation performed on the operation button 30 includes a press detection switch (not shown) that detects pressing of the operation button 30 and a rotary encoder that detects the rotation direction and amount of the operation button (jog dial) 30. (Not shown).

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game balls that have passed through the first passing gate 41A provided in the left gaming area 10A and the second passing gate 41B provided in the right gaming area 10B are transferred to the first passing gate 41A shown in FIG. The normal symbol start condition for executing the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 20, such as detection by the corresponding first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B corresponding to the second passing gate 41B, is as follows. After being established, the normal symbol game 20 is started by the normal symbol display device 20 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable symbol normal display is satisfied, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. The

  In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (symbol per symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed normal symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is caused by the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the process is started on the basis that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit game state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied by the above, it is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the last special figure game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol variable display result is obtained when a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time elapses. A definite special symbol (a special graph display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes “big hit” as a specific display result. " The specific special symbol (big jackpot symbol) as the confirmed special symbol is different depending on the type of jackpot, for example, the confirmed special symbol is different between the probability variation big hit and the non-probable variation big hit. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit game state as a specific state in which a round game advantageous to the player (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed a predetermined number of times.

  In the big hit gaming state controlled after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 has a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number. A round game in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is executed by opening the large winning opening in a period until (for example, nine) winning balls are generated. The In this way, the opening and closing plate that opened the grand prize opening during the execution of the round game receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closed the grand prize opening, thereby providing a special variable prize ball device. 7 is changed to the second state which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is completed. In the big hit state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, is, for example, 15 times. Note that a plurality of types of jackpot types with different numbers of round games may be provided.

  After the big hit state is over, as one of the advantageous states advantageous to the player, time shortening control is executed in which the variable symbol variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state The time-short state is controlled, and the probability variation state in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with the time reduction control is controlled.

  Here, the normal state is a normal state as a gaming state different from a specific state such as a big hit gaming state, a short time state, or a probability variation state, and the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) Thus, the same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on is performed. On the other hand, the time-saving state is when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) a special-figure game is executed and the variable display result is “big hit” is met first. You just have to finish. Also, in the probability variation state, the variable display result in each special figure game and decorative symbol variable display will be “big hit”, and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. improves. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, or until a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) a special game is executed.

  The jackpot (type) that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is ended is also referred to as “probability variation jackpot”. The big hit (type) that is controlled to the short-time state without being controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit gaming state is ended is also referred to as “non-probability variation big hit”.

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The second start condition is such that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of establishment. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the certain change state or the short time state. A state in which the high opening control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the high opening control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the decorative pattern fluctuation speed is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are set in advance. When the super reach reach mode appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (big hit reliability) is higher than when the normal reach reach mode appears.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach production, the decorative display variable display state may become the reach state and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is given by a variable display mode of the symbol or the like. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. Or not is determined.

  Unlike variable reach effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-ream” or “slip” during decorative display of decorative symbols, for example, displaying effect images such as predetermined character images and message images. Notifying the player that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit” due to a presentation operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol. A notice effect may be executed.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as a reach-losing combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”. It should be noted that the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination are collectively referred to as a fixed decorative symbol of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  When a special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol becoming the reach state. At a later time, for example, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is the determined decorative symbol that becomes the big hit combination. ”To“ 8 ”, any one of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the“ left ”,“ middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Anything is acceptable.

  In addition, after a decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed, a pre-read that notifies and notifies that pending data with a special figure display result of “hit” is stored during the round in the jackpot game state. A notice effect may be executed.

  As described above, the game area 10 includes the left game area 10A and the right game area 10B, and the player adjusts the operation amount (rotation amount) of the hitting operation handle (operation knob) to thereby adjust the left game area 10A. It is possible to switch between left-handed shots that launch game balls toward the right and right-handed shots that fire game balls toward the right game area 10B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball is launched into the left game area 10A (when a game ball enters the left game area 10A), the right game area is arranged by arranging a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). The game balls are awarded at the first start winning opening at a higher rate than when the game balls are fired at 10B. Also, when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal symbol has a longer variation time (ordinary diagram variation time) than when the gaming state is the probability variation state and the short-time state, and the normal symbol variable display result is “per regular diagram”. Therefore, the rate at which the game balls launched into the left game area 10A in the normal state win the second start winning opening is extremely low as compared to the rate at which the first starting winning opening wins. Yes.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball is launched into the right game area 10B (when a game ball enters the right game area 10B), the left side of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged by placing a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). Compared to the case where a game ball is launched into the game area 10A, the percentage of game balls winning at the first start winning opening is extremely low, or the game ball does not win at the first starting winning opening. Yes. Therefore, even if the player hits the right hand in the normal state, the percentage of the game ball winning in the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port) left-handed in the normal state. It is extremely low compared to the rate at which game balls sometimes win the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, the player will make a left strike in the normal state.

  In addition, the proportion of the game balls launched into the right game area 10B passing through the second passage gate 41B is the same as that of the game balls launched into the left game area 10A due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of passing through the 1-pass gate 41A. The percentage of the game balls launched into the right game area 10B in the opened second start winning opening is determined by the arrangement of game nails or game ball guiding members (not shown) and the like. It is higher than the rate at which the ball wins the second start winning opening in the open state.

  In the probability variation state and the short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per regular diagram” is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, the rate at which the game ball wins the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when the player makes a right turn in the probability changing state and the short time state is left in the probability changing state and the short time state. It is higher than the rate at which the game ball wins at the start winning opening (either the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) when hitting. Therefore, the player makes a right turn in the probability variation state and the short time state.

  In addition, the ratio of the game balls launched into the right game area 10B to the open big prize opening is that the game balls launched into the left game area 10A due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the percentage of winning in the open big opening. Therefore, the player makes a right strike in the big hit gaming state. In this way, the player makes a left strike in the normal state, switches to the right strike with the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, continues the right turn in the probability change state or the short time state after the big hit gaming state ends, and enters the normal state. With the transition (for example, the probability change state without the big hit gaming state or the end of the short-time state), it will return to the left-handed.

  In addition, the ratio of the game balls launched in the left game area 10A to the first general prize opening 50A or the second general prize opening 50B provided in the left game area 10A is the first general prize opening 50A and the second Depending on the position where the general winning opening 50B is provided and the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball launched into the right game area 10B is the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening. It is higher than the rate of winning 50B. On the other hand, the ratio of the game balls launched in the right game area 10B to the third general prize opening 50C or the fourth general prize opening 50D provided in the right game area 10B is the third general prize opening 50C and the fourth Depending on the position where the general winning opening 50D is provided and the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball launched into the left game area 10A is the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening. It is higher than the rate of winning 50D.

  It should be noted that only a plurality of game balls launched into the left game area 10A for a part or all of the plurality of general game openings (first general prize opening 50A and second general prize opening 50B) provided in the left game area 10A. The game balls that can be won and are launched into the right game area 10B may be configured not to win, and a plurality of general prize holes provided in the right game area 10B (the third general prize opening 50C and the fourth general prize opening). 50D), a part or all of the game balls launched into the right game area 10B can be won, and the game balls launched into the left game area 10C may not be won.

  Thus, since the left hand is made in the normal state, the probability that a game ball will win the first general winning port 50A and the second general winning port 50B out of the four general winning ports is high, and the jackpot gaming state, In the probability variation state and the short-time state, right-handed is performed, and therefore, there is a high probability that the game ball will win the third general winning port 50C and the fourth general winning port 50D among the four general winning ports. In accordance with the game state and the like, as the game area where the game ball is launched changes, the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win also changes. In the left game area 10A in which the game ball enters in the normal state, a general winning opening is provided at a position where the game ball is easy to win, and the right game in which the game ball enters in the big hit game state, the probability variation state and the short time state. In the area 10B, a general winning opening may be provided at a position where it is difficult for a game ball to win (or vice versa), and the winning frequency for the general winning opening may be changed according to the gaming state.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The payout control board is a board that controls the payout of prize balls, and is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control board includes a ball payout device (not shown) in response to receiving a prize ball number command in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set (transmitted as a control signal from the main board 11). The payout mechanism (mechanism for paying out prize balls) is driven to pay out the prize balls.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 27 and 28 is mounted.

  The switch circuit 110 takes in a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 26 (details will be described later) and transmits the signal to the game control microcomputer 100. As will be described in detail later, the abnormality detection sensor group 26 is for detecting an abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the electrical parts for production such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 includes a first gate switch 21A, a second gate switch 21B, a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a first general prize port switch 24A. Wiring for transmitting detection signals from the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D is connected.

  The first gate switch 21A, the second gate switch 21B, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first to fourth general winning port switches 24A to 24D are referred to as sensors, for example. As long as it has an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected. The main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting signals from the abnormality detection sensor group 26.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  Such effect control commands include, for example, a gaming state designation command for designating a gaming state (normal state, probability variation state, or short-time state), a variation start command for designating a variation start in a special game, and a special game in a special game. A variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a design variation time or a design pattern on the image display device 5, a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a design design, and a design design for the image display device 5. A decorative ball stop command for specifying variable display stop, a jackpot start specifying command for specifying the start or end of a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot end specifying command, or a game ball has won a first start winning port or a second starting winning port Start winning command that is sometimes output, general winning opening that is output when a game ball wins a general winning opening Constant command, gaming ball into the special winning opening includes special winning opening winning command or the like which is output when the prize.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 101 to perform the game control. In other words, the processing means that the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another board different from the main board 11.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 14, wiring for transmitting a control signal to the movable accessory 1000, and the like are connected. In addition, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation button 30 has been detected is sent to the effect control board 12 from a press detection switch (not shown) and a rotary encoder (not shown). Wiring for transmission is also connected. Further, the effect control board 12 has a wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position) of the operation unit in the mode changeover switch 31 described later, and an operation in the display changeover switch 32 described later. Wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position of the part (first position or second position) is also connected.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes a light emitter such as the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, operation buttons 30, a movable accessory 1000, and an effect accessory. A plurality of types of pattern data constituting the effect control pattern are stored in advance in order to control the effect operation using the effect device (effect electric component) including the movable member included in the.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various types of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 confirms, for example, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, the operation detection signal transmitted from the press detection switch and the rotary encoder, and the state of the mode switch 31. Including an input port for capturing various signals such as a signal to be enabled and a signal for enabling confirmation of the state of the display changeover switch 32, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. Composed. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 A command (driving signal) or the like transmitted to the movable accessory 1000 is output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the abnormality that has occurred is notified by voice by controlling the speakers 8L and 8R via the voice control board 13, or the lamp control board 14 is displayed. Via the light by controlling the lighting / extinguishing drive of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED through the display, and an abnormal notification image (error message) in the display area of the image display device 5 through the display control unit 123. It is displayed and notified. The abnormality includes a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, and the like, and is detected using the abnormality detection sensor group 26 and the like.

  The abnormality detection sensor group 26 includes one or more sensors for detecting an abnormality that occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The abnormality detection sensor group 26 is not limited to a sensor, and may include a circuit for detecting an abnormality, various detection switches that do not correspond to the sensor, and the like. The abnormality detection sensor group 26 only needs to be configured to detect abnormality. One or more sensors or the like included in each of the abnormality detection sensor groups 26 are prepared according to the type of abnormality. What the abnormality detection sensor group 26 specifically includes may be determined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. An abnormality that occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a phenomenon that does not occur or is extremely unlikely to occur in a normal game performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, And a phenomenon that may hinder the progress of the game, and particularly a phenomenon that requires notification to the player or the employee of the game hall (pachinko store, etc.).

  Examples of the abnormality detection sensor group 26 include a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration sensor that detects vibration, and a radio wave detection sensor that detects a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band). For example, these sensors may be included in the abnormality detection sensor group 26. In addition, the detection of abnormality can utilize a well-known method suitably. When the game control microcomputer 100 detects a magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality or the like based on an output signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 26, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that an abnormality has occurred is the main board. 11 is transmitted to the production control board 12 and an error has occurred due to the display of an error message on the image display device 5, the output of a warning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode at the time of occurrence of an abnormality in the game effect lamp 9, etc. Notification is performed. For example, when an abnormality has occurred, an image of the characters “An error has occurred” is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Here, not only an abnormality has occurred but also any type of abnormality such as magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, and radio wave abnormality is detected by the notification means such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. You may make it alert | report so that it was identifiable.

  The magnetic abnormality notification is an abnormality notification that is performed when a magnetic abnormality (abnormality that the magnet is in the vicinity of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in this case, there is a possibility of fraud) is detected. There are fraudulent acts in which a game medium is moved by a magnet to win a prize opening, or a predetermined area is clogged with a game medium to guide the game medium to the prize opening. By notifying the magnetic abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26. The CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a magnetic abnormality by determining whether or not the signal from the magnetic sensor indicates a magnetic force equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (indicating magnetic force → there is a magnetic abnormality). When a magnetic abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 and the magnetic abnormality is notified in the image display device 5 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 5, an image of characters “Magnetic error has occurred” is displayed.

  The vibration abnormality notification is, for example, an abnormality notification that can be executed in a pachinko gaming machine or the like provided with the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. There is a fraudulent act that intentionally shakes the pachinko machine to change the flow direction of the game medium closer to a winning opening such as a big winning opening. By notifying the vibration abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26. The CPU 103 determines whether or not there is an abnormality due to vibration (vibration abnormality) by determining whether the signal from the vibration sensor indicates vibration having a strength greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold (stronger than a predetermined threshold). Shows vibration of vibration → vibration is abnormal). When a vibration abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating the occurrence of the vibration abnormality is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the vibration abnormality is notified in the image display device 5 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 5, an image of characters “Vibration error has occurred” is displayed.

  The radio wave abnormality notification is an abnormality notification performed when a radio wave abnormality (abnormality in which a predetermined radio wave reaches the pachinko gaming machine 1, in this case, there is a possibility of fraud) is detected. By applying radio waves to the start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23, etc., these switches are switched on / off, etc. There is a cheating to get. By notifying the radio wave abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band) is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26. The CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a radio wave abnormality by determining whether a signal from the radio wave detection sensor indicates reception of the predetermined radio wave (indicating reception of a predetermined radio wave → presence of radio wave abnormality). When a radio wave abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the radio wave abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and a radio wave abnormality is notified in the image display device 5 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 5, an image of the characters “A radio wave error has occurred” is displayed.

  Each of the mode change switch 31 and the display change switch 32 is configured by a DIP switch (Dual In-line Package switch), and is provided outside the game area of the game board 2. The mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 configured by DIP switches are configured by switching the operation unit between the first position and the second position (for example, in the case of a slide type, the position of the knob is changed to one end side and the other end). By switching to the side), the process (control program) executed by the effect control CPU 120 can be switched. In a state where the glass door frame 3a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, the glass door frame 3a covers the front surface of the game board 2, so that the player cannot operate the mode switch 31 and the display switch 32. It has become. It should be noted that the mode change switch 31 and the display change switch 32 are provided by the player via the glass door frame 3a when the glass door frame 3a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 3 (the state shown in FIG. 1). Since it is installed at a position where it cannot be visually recognized, it is not shown in FIG.

  As described above, the store clerk of the game hall inserts the key into the key hole 61 to open the locking device (not shown) and opens the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, Operation of the mode switch 31 and the display switch 32 provided on the game board 2 (switching of the DIP switch) becomes possible. When the operation of the mode switch 31 and the display switch 32 is completed, the glass door frame 3a is returned to the closed state with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, and a key is inserted into the key hole 61 to lock the device (not shown). )) Is closed.

  When the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the first position, the voltage at the mode changeover terminal of the CPU 120 for effect control is in the low state, and when the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position, the effect control. The voltage of the mode switching terminal of the CPU 120 is in a high state. When the voltage of the mode switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation unit of the mode switching switch 31 is in the first position, that is, information for the player (for example, a demonstration) The game mode for displaying a screen or the like is specified, and information of a winning number management table described later is not displayed on the display device 5. On the other hand, when the voltage of the mode switch terminal is High, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation unit of the mode switch 31 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 5 has information for the store clerk (for example, It is specified that the maintenance mode is for displaying the number of winning prizes to each winning mouth and the like, and information on the winning number management table described later is displayed on the display device 5.

  When the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position, the voltage of the display changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 120 is in the low state, and when the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position, the effect control. The voltage of the display switching terminal of the CPU 120 becomes High. When the voltage at the display switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position, that is, the image display device 5 indicates the number of winnings to the general winning opening. By specifying that display is not permitted, it is prohibited to display on the display device 5 information based on a display control table described later (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winning opening). On the other hand, when the voltage of the display switching terminal is High, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation unit of the display switching switch 32 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 5 receives a prize for the general winning opening. By specifying that permission to display the number is performed, it is permitted to display on the display device 5 information based on a display control table described later (information that can specify the number of winnings to the general winning award). .

  In this embodiment, the mode selector switch 31 and the display selector switch 32 are provided on the front side of the game board 2 (the surface facing the player), but the mode selector switch 31 and / or the display selector switch 32 are provided. The game board 2 may be provided on the back side (game island side). In the case of such a configuration, by using the hinge mechanism of the gaming machine frame 3, the gaming board 2 is rotated forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, so that The provided mode changeover switch 31 and / or display changeover switch 32 can be operated.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 includes the start winning command as described above. The start prize command includes a start prize designation command indicating whether a start prize has occurred with respect to either the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening, or a first start prize opening or a second start prize opening. There are a start winning determination result designation command and the like indicating a jackpot determination result and a jackpot type determination result at the time of winning a game ball.

  The CPU 103 makes an effective start winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first start winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When winning is detected, the big hit determining random number and the big hit type determining random number are extracted from the random number circuit 104, and the extracted big hit determining random number and the big hit type determining random number are stored in the first special figure random number storage area. A command for designating the “first start prize opening” is set as a start prize opening designation command while being stored in a storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number after addition including the valid start prize). In addition, the CPU 103 determines that the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Whether or not the start winning prize is determined is determined.

  In this starting prize determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table, a start winning determination result designation command for designating “out” is set. When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number is further stored in the jackpot type determination table for the first special figure for each jackpot type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in the table matches. Then, a start winning determination result specifying command for specifying the jackpot type “big hit” corresponding to the matched determination value is set. For example, a command for designating “non-probable variation big hit” or a command for designating “probability big hit” is set as the determination result designation command at the time of starting winning. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“first start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 12.

  Note that the CPU 103 starts a game ball for a first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening reaches an upper limit (that is, according to the first start winning opening). When an invalid start prize that is not eligible for the special game is detected, the command specifying the “first start prize opening” is set as the start prize designation command, and the determination result at the start prize is designated As a command, blank data is set to specify that it is not a valid starting prize. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“first start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 12.

  The CPU 103 makes an effective start winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the second start winning opening when the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second start winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When the winning is detected, the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number are extracted from the random number circuit 104, and the extracted big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number are stored in the second random number storage area for the second special figure. A command for designating “second start prize opening” is set as a start prize opening designation command while being stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories (the second reserved memory number after addition including the valid start prize). In addition, the CPU 103 determines that the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Whether or not the start winning prize is determined is determined.

  In this starting prize determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table, a start winning determination result designation command for designating “out” is set. When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number is further stored in the jackpot type determination table for the second special figure for each jackpot type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in the table matches. Then, a start winning determination result specifying command for specifying the jackpot type “big hit” corresponding to the matched determination value is set. For example, a command for designating “non-probable variation big hit” or a command for designating “probability big hit” is set as the determination result designation command at the time of starting winning. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“second start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 12.

  Note that the CPU 103 starts a game ball for the second start winning port in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second start winning port reaches the upper limit (that is, according to the second start winning port). When an invalid start prize that is paid out, but is not subject to a special game, is detected, a command for designating a “second start prize opening” is set as a start prize designation command, and a determination result at start prize is designated As a command, blank data is set to specify that it is not a valid starting prize. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“second start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 12.

  In this embodiment, based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, the variable display result of the special figure corresponding to the starting winning is determined, and based on the determination result Although the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and based on the variation pattern determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, the variable pattern changing pattern corresponding to the starting winning is determined, A pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the determination result. For example, when the determination result at the start winning is a super reach variation pattern, the pre-reading notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the determination result at the start winning is a non-reach variation pattern. Good.

  Specifically, when the CPU 103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts a random number for determining the variation pattern from the random number circuit 104, and uses the extracted random number for determining the variation pattern for the jackpot determination. Along with the random number and the jackpot type determination random number, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number after addition including the valid start winning) in the random number storage area for the first special figure. In addition, when the CPU 103 detects the effective start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts the random number for determining the variation pattern from the random number circuit 104, and uses the extracted random number for determining the variation pattern as the jackpot determining random number and the jackpot. Along with the type determination random number, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number (the second reserved memory number after addition including the valid start winning) in the second special figure random number storage area.

  Here, the ROM 101 corresponds to the deviation variation pattern determination table in which a random number range corresponding to each of the deviation variation patterns shown in FIG. 8A is set, and to each of the big hit variation patterns shown in FIG. 8B. And a big hit variation pattern determination table in which the random number range is set.

  When the determination result of the start winning determination (the display result specified by the start winning determination result specifying command) is “out of”, the CPU 103 refers to the shift variation pattern determination table for extraction (storage). The variation pattern determination random number is included in the random number range of the variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number is identified, and the identified variation pattern is “non-reach” , A start winning variation pattern determination result designation command for designating which variation pattern is “normal reach deviation” or “super reach deviation” is set.

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the determination at the start winning prize (the display result specified by the determination result specifying command at the start winning prize) is one of “non-probable big hit” and “probable big hit”, the fluctuation for big hit Refer to the pattern determination table to determine which variation pattern random number for the extracted (stored) variation pattern determination is included in the random number range, and identify the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number Then, a start winning variation pattern determination result designation command for designating whether the identified variation pattern is a variation pattern of “normal reach big hit” or “super reach big hit” is set.

  When the CPU 103 detects an invalid start winning, the CPU 103 sets blank data that specifies that the start winning change pattern determination result designation command is not a valid start winning.

  Then, the CPU 103 outputs the set start prize variation pattern determination result designation command to the effect control board 12 as a start prize command together with the above-described start prize opening designation command and start prize determination result designation command.

  The CPU 120 for effect control is a start winning opening designation command designated as “first start winning opening” and a start winning determination result designation command including valid data which is not blank data (and a start including valid data which is not blank data). When receiving the winning variation pattern determination result designation command), the start winning determination result designation command (and the starting winning variation pattern determination result designation command) is held in the first winning command storage area for the first special figure. Stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of memories (the first reserved storage number after addition including the valid start prize), the start prize opening designation command designated as “second start prize opening” and valid data that is not blank data Start winning judgment result specifying command including (and starting winning variation pattern including valid data that is not blank data) When the start winning prize determination result specifying command (and the start winning fluctuation pattern determination result specifying command) is received, the second pending storage number (in the relevant prize winning command storage area for the second special figure) Stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number after addition including the effective start winning). The effect control CPU 120 confirms the start prize determination result designation command (and the start prize variation pattern judgment result designation command) stored in the start prize command storage area, so that the first special characteristic is established before the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to estimate the display result (and fluctuation pattern) of the figure or the second special figure and execute the prefetch notice effect.

  On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 has a start winning opening specifying command designated as “first starting winning opening” and a starting winning determination result specifying command including blank data (and a starting winning variation pattern determining result specifying command including blank data). Is received, the start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) is specified for the first special figure. It is not stored in the start winning command storage area (excluded from the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect), and the winning history storage area to be described later can store the winning history for the first start winning opening. Start winning port designation command designated as “start prize opening” and start prize determination result designation command including blank data (and start prize including blank data) Dynamic pattern determination result designation command) is received, it is determined that an invalid start prize for the second start prize opening has occurred, and the start prize determination result designation command (and start prize variation pattern judgment result designation command) Is not stored in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure (excluded from the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect), and the winning history storage area described later may store the winning history for the second starting winning opening. Is possible.

  As described above, the control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 includes a variation pattern designation command. As shown below, when the main board 11 starts variable display of the special symbol, the main board 11 determines a fluctuation pattern according to the special figure display result that is derived and displayed, and notifies the effect control board 12 of the fluctuation pattern. Output a change pattern specification command for The ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores effect control data corresponding to each variation pattern in advance, and the effect control CPU 120 is for effect control corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the received variation pattern designation command. Data is selected and effect control is executed according to the selected effect control data.

  When the first start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the first special figure is executed, the CPU 103 determines the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the first special figure, In addition, among the random numbers for variation pattern determination, the big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the first storage area (storage area corresponding to the number of stored storages = 1) and the variation pattern determination random number are read out and thereafter The big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, short-time state, or probability variation state). Perform time determination.

  If the jackpot determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table at the start determination, the CPU 103 sets a variable display result notification command for designating “displacement” and the jackpot determination random number. The variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area is determined to be included in the random number range of the variation pattern set in the deviation variation pattern determination table, and corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the “outlier fluctuation pattern” is determined.

  If the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the read jackpot type determination random number is stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the first special figure. It is determined which of the existing determination values matches. Then, a variable display result notification command for designating the “big hit” of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for variation pattern judgment read from the top storage area together with the big hit judgment random number is changed for the big hit By determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and identifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number, the “big hit variation pattern” is determined.

  Then, the CPU 103 outputs the set variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command for designating the determined variation pattern together with the variation start command for designating the variation start of the first special figure.

  When the second start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the second special figure is executed, the CPU 103 determines the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the second special figure, In addition, among the random numbers for variation pattern determination, the big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the first storage area (storage area corresponding to the number of stored storages = 1) and the variation pattern determination random number are read out and thereafter The big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, short-time state, or probability variation state). Perform time determination.

  If the jackpot determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table at the start determination, the CPU 103 sets a variable display result notification command for designating “displacement” and the jackpot determination random number. The variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area is determined to be included in the random number range of the variation pattern set in the deviation variation pattern determination table, and corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the “outlier fluctuation pattern” is determined.

  When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the read jackpot type determination random number is stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the second special figure. It is determined which of the existing determination values matches. Then, a variable display result notification command for designating the “big hit” of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for variation pattern judgment read from the top storage area together with the big hit judgment random number is changed for the big hit By determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and identifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number, the “big hit variation pattern” is determined.

  Then, the CPU 103 outputs the set variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command for designating the determined variation pattern together with the variation start command for designating the variation start of the second special figure.

  When receiving the variation start command for designating the variation start of the first special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern designation command, the production control CPU 120 selects the production control data corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. At the same time, a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the variable display result notification command is determined. Then, the variable display of the decorative design is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Accordingly, of the start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning variation pattern determining result specifying command) stored in the first special drawing start winning command storage area, the leading storage area (the number of stored memories) = 1 in the storage area corresponding to = 1) (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) and the subsequent storage area start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning prize) The time variation pattern determination result designation command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

  In addition, the production control CPU 120 stores the reach state establishment timing corresponding to the variation pattern in the ROM 121, so that the reach state is established at the reach state establishment timing corresponding to the received variation pattern designation command. Controls variable display of symbols. That is, the production control CPU 120 can grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the variation pattern.

  When receiving the variation start command for designating the variation start of the second special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern designation command, the production control CPU 120 selects the production control data corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. At the same time, a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the variable display result notification command is determined. Then, the variable display of the decorative design is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Accordingly, of the start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) stored in the start winning command storing area for the second special figure, the leading storage area (the number of stored memories) = 1 in the storage area corresponding to = 1) (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) and the subsequent storage area start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning prize) The time variation pattern determination result designation command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

  Further, when the first general prize opening switch 24A to the fourth general prize opening switch 24D detect that a game ball has won the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize opening 50D, the game ball is placed in any general prize opening. A general winning opening designation command for designating whether or not has been won is output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12. That is, when a game ball is detected by the first general prize opening switch 24A, a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the first general prize opening 50A is output, and a game ball is outputted by the second general prize opening switch 24B. When it is detected, a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize at the second general prize opening 50B is output. When a game ball is detected by the third general prize opening switch 24C, a command to the third general prize opening 50C is output. A general prize opening designation command for designating a prize is output, and when a game ball is detected by the fourth general prize opening switch 24D, a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize for the fourth general prize opening 50D is output. .

  Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can identify the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and which general winning opening the gaming ball has won based on the received general winning opening designation command. . Further, as described above, when the game ball has won the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 designates which start winning opening the game ball has won. A mouth designation command is received. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control stores the information that can identify the general winning port where the winning has occurred and the information that can identify the starting winning port where the winning has occurred in the winning history storage area of the RAM 122 according to the order of winning. It is possible.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines which of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the general winning opening designated by the received general winning opening specifying command (the general winning opening where the game ball has won). Confirming whether the start winning port designated by the received start winning port designation command (the starting winning port where the game ball has won) is the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port. The RAM 122 stores the winning history of each general winning opening and each starting winning opening. For example, when a game ball wins in the order of the second general winning port 50B, the first starting winning port, the first general winning port 50A, the second starting winning port, and the third general winning port 50C, The history of “winning mouth, first start winning mouth, first general winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, third general winning mouth”] is stored in the winning history storage area of the RAM 122.

  In addition, when the winning at the start winning opening and the winning at the general winning opening occur within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 100 issues a start winning opening specifying command and a start winning determination result specifying command. , It may be transmitted prior to the general prize opening designation command. For example, detection by any one of the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B and detection by any one of the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D. When the detection is confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, in the same interrupt process), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the start winning opening designation command and the starting winning determination result designation command as the general winning opening designation command. It is better to send it ahead of the other. By using such a transmission order, the production control CPU 120 knows that it has already received the start prize opening designation command and the start prize determination result designation command when the general prize opening designation command is received. It is possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect based on the start winning time determination result designation command received in advance as the specific effect executed based on the winning in the general winning opening.

  Note that, when winning in the general winning award occurs a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a plurality of general winning award specifying commands in accordance with a predetermined priority order. To do. For example, if the detection by the first general prize port switch 24A and the detection by the second general prize port switch 24B are confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, in the same interrupt processing), the game control microcomputer 100 The general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to a general prize opening that is more difficult to win may be transmitted first with priority. In addition, when the number of prize balls given according to the general prize opening is different, a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to a general prize opening with a larger number of prize balls may be preferentially transmitted first. good.

  When the count switch 23 detects that a game ball has been won at the big prize opening, a big prize opening command for designating that the game ball has won at the big prize opening is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12. Is output. Therefore, the production control CPU 120 can specify the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening based on the received big winning opening winning command, and the winning history to the starting winning opening and the winning to the general winning opening described above. Similarly to the history, it is possible to store the winning history for the big winning opening in the winning history storage area.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start command in a period from receiving the jackpot start specifying command for specifying the start of the jackpot gaming state to receiving the jackpot end specifying command for specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to separately count the number of times received and the number of times received for the general winning opening designation command. Thereby, it is possible to distinguish and count the number of times of winning a prize money and the number of times of winning a general prize mouth during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state, and the result of the counting is shown in FIG. 5 can be displayed.

  In addition, when a game ball is being fired in the game area 10, the game ball usually wins at any of the start winning port, the general winning port, and the big winning port at a certain frequency. If the decorative symbols are not variably displayed and a game ball has not been won in any of the predetermined winning period (for example, 1 minute), the start winning opening, the general winning opening, and the big winning opening, There is a high possibility that the player is in a non-game state in which no game is played. For this reason, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbols, and receives the start prize opening designation command, the general prize opening designation command, and the big prize opening prize command for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If not, it is possible to make a game end determination that determines that the game has ended.

  FIG. 3A is a diagram illustrating an example of winning number information managed by the winning number management table stored in the RAM 122. In this winning number management table, the number of winnings to each of the first general winning ports 50A to 50D is stored. The effect control CPU 120 can total the number of wins for each general winning slot for each gaming state based on the jackpot start designation command, jackpot end designation command, gaming state designation command, and general winning slot designation command. . The gaming state designation command is a timing at which the gaming state changes (in this case, the gaming state designation command designates the gaming state to be controlled, and is transmitted, for example, at the end of the big hit gaming state or at the end of the short time state. Or a timing at which the special symbol variable display is started (the game state designation command in this case designates the game state when the special figure game is executed).

  In this example, the number of winnings in the second general winning opening 50B is 50 (total for all periods), of which 46 are in the normal state, 2 are in the big hit gaming state, and the number in the probable state. Is 1, and the number of winnings in the short-time state is 1. That is, the number of winnings in the left-handed period is 46, and the number of winnings in the right-handed period is 4. Further, the total number of winnings in the general winning opening is 108, of which 81 are winning in the left-handed period and 27 are winning in the right-handed period.

  As described above, the number of winnings in the left-handed period and the number of winnings in the right-handed period are individually stored together with the number of winnings in each general winning opening and displayed on the image display device 5 (or corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1). Sent to a gaming device such as a card unit or a call lamp device provided and displayed on a display device included in the gaming device, or transmitted to an information management device and displayed on a display device included in the information management device. Thus, at the game hall, it is possible to grasp the ease of winning a game ball at each general winning opening and to use it for maintenance of game nails. For example, if the number of game balls received in a general prize opening is excessively large or small, it is estimated that the game nail near the general prize opening is bent or damaged, and maintenance of the game nail is performed. It can be performed.

  Information on the number of winnings in the winning number management table (the number of winnings in each general winning opening, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in each gaming state, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the left-handed period and the right-handed period, and the general winning opening) Is displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position (in the maintenance mode), and in the case of the first position (in the game mode). Do not show. The game shop clerk switches the mode changeover switch 31 from the first position to the second position, displays the winning number information in the winning number management table, performs game nail maintenance with reference to this, and enters the general winning opening. Appropriate frequency of winning game balls. Then, after the maintenance is completed, the mode switch 31 is returned from the second position to the first position.

  In this embodiment, the number-of-wins information in the number-of-wins management table does not depend on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, short-time state, jackpot game state), Whether or not variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memory for special-purpose games), and the execution status of ordinary games (whether or not variable display of normal symbols is being executed, and the number of reserved memories for ordinary game) Regardless, the period during which the operating portion of the mode switch 31 is in the second position is continuously displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the gaming state. The operation unit is in the second position and can be displayed only in the normal state, and even if the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position, it is not displayed in the probability change state, the short time state, or the big hit gaming state. Anyway.

  The winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the execution state of the special figure game. For example, the operation unit of the mode switch 31 is set to the second position. Even when the special symbol variable display is not executed and the number of reserved memory of the special figure game is 0, the display can be performed only, and the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position. The period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, or the period during which the number of special figure games held is not 0 may not be displayed. The winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the execution state of the usual game. For example, the operation unit of the mode switch 31 is set to the second position. Even if the variable display of the normal symbol is not executed, the display can be performed only during the period in which the number of the reserved games stored in the normal game is 0, and the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position. The period during which the normal symbol variable display is being executed or the period during which the number of reserved games stored in the normal game is not 0 may not be displayed.

  The number-of-wins information stored in the number-of-wins management table includes the setting state of the mode switch 31, the setting state of the display switch 32, and the display settings by the operation buttons 30 (settings (1) to (3) in FIG. 5). Regardless of the setting on the screen, it is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command. Also, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted from the information output terminal of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a game information management device (for example, a hall computer (not shown) provided in the game hall) after the game hall is closed. The winning information for each gaming machine is stored every business day in the gaming information management device. The winning number information stored in the winning number management table is obtained when the winning history in the winning history storage area described above is deleted (reset) based on execution of a specific effect corresponding to the winning history storage area. Even after the transmission to the game information management device is completed, the operation button in the state in which the store clerk reset operation (for example, the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5) 30).

  For example, the store clerk of the game hall presses the operation button 30 in a state where the winning number information in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5 (the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position (display setting)). By pressing the time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of winnings of all items (the number of winnings of each general winning mouth and the total number of winnings of general winning mouths) stored in the winning number management table may be reset to zero. Is possible.

  FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an example of winning number information managed by the display control table stored in the RAM 122. In this display control table, the number of wins to each of the general winning awards of the first general winning award 50A to the fourth general winning award 50D is stored. The effect control CPU 120 can add up the number of winnings to each general winning opening based on the general winning opening specifying command. In this example, the total number of winnings in the general winning award is 11, of which the number of winnings in the first general winning opening 50A is 3, the number of winnings in the second general winning opening 50B is 5, and the third general winning opening. The number of winnings in 50C is 2, and the number of winnings in the fourth general winning opening 50D is 1.

  As shown in FIG. 4, winning information (specifically, the number of objects displayed according to the total number of winnings) in the display control table is displayed when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (display setting). And the display of the general winning number is set by the operation button 30, it is displayed on the image display device 5. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position (when the display is not set), regardless of whether or not the display setting of the general winning number is set by the operation button 30, the winning of the display control table is won. Number information is not displayed (display is prohibited). Even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of display setting), when the display setting of the general winning number is not performed by the operation button 30 (in the case of non-display setting). Does not display the winning information in the display control table.

  That is, when the store clerk of the game hall performs the display prohibition setting of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 32, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed regardless of the display setting operation of the player. Yes. Only when the store clerk of the game hall performs the display permission setting of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 32, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed according to the display setting operation of the player.

  In this embodiment, a specific effect (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-read notice effect) based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening is executed. As for the production, as shown in FIG. 4, when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting) and the operation button 30 is used, the general winning display display setting (execution of specific production) is performed. It can be executed when (setting) is performed. When the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position (in the case of execution non-permission setting), depending on whether or not the display setting of the general winning number (execution setting of specific effect) is performed by the operation button 30. The specific effect is not executed (execution is prohibited) Further, even when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting), the display setting of the general winning number is not performed by the operation button 30 (in the case of non-execution setting). In this case, the specific performance is not executed.

  In other words, when the store clerk of the game hall performs the setting prohibition of execution of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 32, execution of the specific effect is prohibited regardless of the player's execution setting operation. Only when the store clerk of the game hall performs execution permission setting of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 32, the specific effect can be executed according to the player's execution setting operation.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the setting as to whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting as to whether or not to execute the specific effect, and the operation means for setting is also common. (Amusement hall side: display changeover switch 32, player side: operation button 30). Not only in such a form, it may be possible to individually set whether or not to notify the number of winnings in the general winning opening and whether or not to enable the specific effect, and may be set by different operating means. May be.

  The number-of-wins information stored in the display control table includes the setting state of the mode switch 31, the setting state of the display switch 32, and the display setting by the operation buttons 30 (settings in FIGS. 5 (1) to (3)). Regardless of the setting on the screen, it is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command. In addition, the number-of-wins information stored in the display control table (the number of winnings and the total number of winnings for each general winning slot) is the identification of the winning history in the winning history storage area described above corresponding to the winning history storage area. Even if it is erased (reset) based on the execution of the performance (A or B), it is not erased, and when the game end determination is made by the performance control CPU 120, for example, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. If the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the big prize opening designation command have not been received for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), they are erased (reset to 0).

  When the number of winnings and the total number of winnings in each general winning opening stored in the display control table are reset to 0 based on the game end determination, the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed. The number of winnings is also reset to zero. For example, the coin-type object (winning display) displayed on the right side of the character “general winning” on the screen of FIG. 6 to be described later is not displayed, and the number of display objects becomes zero. It should be noted that when the number of winnings in the general winning award is not displayed on the image display device 5, the number of winnings and the total number of winnings in each of the general winning awards stored in the display control table are determined as the game end. Next, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 5, the total number of winnings stored in the display control table at that time ( For example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings) is displayed.

  In addition, the store clerk or the player of the game hall presses the operation button 30 in a state where the winning number information of the display control table is displayed on the image display device 5 (an object corresponding to the total winning number is displayed). By pressing for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds or more), regardless of the above game end determination, the number of winnings of all items stored in the display control table (the number of winnings of each general winning mouth and the total winnings of general winning mouths) (Number) can be reset to 0, and accordingly, the winning number information displayed on the image display device 5 is also reset to 0 (all displayed objects are erased).

  As shown in FIG. 5, the player's display setting operation is accepted by operating the operation button 30 during the display of the demonstration screen not related to the progress of the special game and the progress of the normal game. A state in which the player is not playing a game (for example, the decorative symbol variable display is not executed, and the start prize opening designation command, the general prize opening designation command, and the big prize opening prize command are set for a predetermined period (for example, 1 5 minutes), the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 5, and the screen shown in FIG. 5 (1) is displayed at predetermined intervals while the demo screen is displayed.

  On the screen of FIG. 5 (1), a message “Please press the enter button for display setting of the number of general winnings” is displayed, and an image simulating the operation button 30 is displayed below the operation button 30. An arrow prompting you to press is displayed. When the player presses the operation button 30 in accordance with the instruction, the selection screen shown in FIG. 5 (2) is displayed. On the selection screen, an icon including the characters “display” and an icon including the characters “do not display” are displayed, and a message “decision button after selecting with jog dial” is displayed. An arrow that prompts the user to press the jog dial after being rotated is displayed.

  In order to display the number of winnings in the general winning a prize, the operation button 30 (jog dial) is turned to the left to select an icon including the characters “display”, and to enter the general winning award. In order not to display the number of wins, the operation button 30 (jog dial) is rotated to the right to select an icon including the characters “not displayed”. In this example, an icon including the characters “display” is selected.

  Then, when the operation button 30 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “display” is selected in FIG. 5 (2), as shown in FIG. 5 (3), “the number of general winnings is displayed”. A message is displayed, and the display returns to the normal demo screen shown in FIG. By this setting operation, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the player can grasp this. Here, it is assumed that the total number of winnings stored in the display control table at the time when the setting operation is completed (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings in FIG. 6) is displayed immediately. The total number of winnings is not displayed immediately after the setting operation is completed, but is displayed on the image display device 5 when the variable display of the special symbol is executed after the setting operation is completed (when the game end determination is no longer performed). You may make it.

  On the other hand, when the operation button 30 is pressed in the state where the icon including the characters “do not display” is selected in FIG. 5 (2), a message “The number of general winnings is not displayed” is displayed, and FIG. 5 (4). Return to the normal demo screen. As a result of this setting operation, the number of prizes received in the general prize opening is not displayed on the image display device 5.

  Here, in this embodiment, only when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position, that is, on the game hall side, the winning information stored in the display control table is stored in the image display device 5. Only when the display is permitted, a screen for setting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning a prize is displayed on the image display apparatus 5 as shown in FIGS. It shall be displayed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is at the first position, that is, when the game hall side does not permit the image display device 5 to display the winning information stored in the display control table, As shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to (3), the screen for selecting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 4 described above, it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed only by the non-display setting of the display changeover switch 32 regardless of the display setting / non-display setting of the player. Is done.

  In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to display the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening. In this embodiment, the player sets whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening only when the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position) on the game hall side. It is possible. That is, in this embodiment, the intention of the game hall is prioritized over the intention of the player. Therefore, on the game hall side, when the player does not want the player to know the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 may be set to the first position (non-display position).

  In addition, in the case where the intention of the game hall has priority over the intention of the player, even though the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side ( (Although it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening regardless of the player's setting), the player's side as shown in FIGS. When the setting screen is displayed, it is misunderstood that the player can display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by his / her setting operation.

  In order to prevent such misidentification, in this embodiment, when the operating portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side (regardless of the setting on the player side) When it is already determined not to display the number of winnings in the winning opening), the setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to (3) is not displayed. That is, the notification itself that “the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed according to the setting operation on the player side” is not performed.

  Display setting on the game hall side (the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position) and display setting on the player side (the icon including the characters “display” on the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2)) When it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by pressing the operation button 30 in the selected state), as shown in FIG. “General winning” is displayed. When a game ball wins a general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A to fourth general winning opening 50D), as shown in FIG. (Winning display) is displayed.

  The number of coin-type objects displayed on the image display device 5 corresponds to the total number of winnings in the display control table described above. As shown in FIG. 6 (3), each time a game ball wins a general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A to fourth general winning opening 50D), the total number of winnings in the display control table is incremented by one. As a result, the number of coin-type objects also increases. In addition, the coin-type object includes a number “10”, which indicates the number of prize balls given when a game ball wins a general prize opening. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of prize balls given in accordance with winning in the general winning opening. Note that the number of winning balls that are awarded when a game ball is won in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening, large winning opening) is stored in the ROM 121 in advance. And

  In this way, by displaying the object corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and increasing the number of objects to be displayed in accordance with the increase in the winning number, the player can It is possible to easily grasp that the game ball has won and the number of game balls won to the general winning opening.

  When the game end determination is made by the effect control CPU 120, as described above, the number of game balls won and the total number of wins in each general winning opening stored in the display control table are reset to zero. As a result, as shown in FIG. 6 (4), all coin-type objects displayed on the right side of the characters “general winning” are erased. That is, it is notified that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is zero.

  As described above, when the game end determination is made, that is, when it is specified that the gaming machine is in a non-game state, the number of winnings to the general winning opening that has been notified is reset to 0 (general It is possible to prevent a player who plays a game on the gaming machine from grasping the number of winnings in the general winning opening after that. .

  In this embodiment, by setting the game end determination condition and the above-described condition for shifting to the demo screen as a common condition, the number of winnings to the general winning opening that has been informed at the time of shifting to the demo screen is 0. Will be reset. In this way, when displaying the demo screen, the number of winning prizes received in the general winning award may be reset to zero.

  As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position). Is set not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (FIG. 5), the display control for increasing the number of objects to be displayed for each winning in the general winning opening shown in FIG. 6 is not executed. . In these cases, the “general winnings” character itself shown in FIG. 6 is not displayed, and the coin-type object itself is also displayed regardless of the number of winnings in the general winning opening (total winnings in the display control table). Do not show.

  If the number of objects (normal objects) to be displayed for each winning prize in the general winning opening is increased, the screen becomes difficult to see as the number of winnings increases, so the number of normal objects reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). In this case, it is preferable to display one special object (for example, an object having a different aspect from the normal object including the number “100”) instead of the predetermined number of normal objects. Accordingly, a predetermined number of winning times and the number of winning balls corresponding thereto can be notified in one special object display area without requiring a predetermined number of normal object display areas.

  Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of displayed objects increases by one for each winning of a general winning opening. Objects may be displayed according to the number of winnings. For example, the number of displayed objects may be increased by one for every five winnings in the general winning opening.

  Also, the display setting on the game hall side (the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position) and the display setting on the player side (including the characters “display” on the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2)). When the operation button 30 is pressed with the icon selected), when it is determined to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, as shown in FIG. , The number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed together with the number of winnings in the large winning opening.

  FIG. 7 (1) is a screen displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled to the big hit gaming state. When the first round game is started, the characters “general winnings” are displayed, and the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed on the right side thereof, and “large winnings” Is displayed, and on the right side, the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed. In this example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the jackpot gaming state is still 0, and the number of winning balls awarded when a game ball is won in the general winning opening is 10 [0 × 10]. Is displayed. In addition, [0 × 15] is displayed because the number of winning balls in the big winning game state is still 0, and the number of winning balls awarded when a game ball is won in the big winning gate is 15. Has been. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of winning balls [0 × 10] awarded in response to winning in the general winning opening and the number of winning balls [0 × 15] awarded in response to winning in the big winning mouth Since the total number of and is 0, [0 balls in total] is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (2), as a result of performing the first round game, the game ball has won seven times in the big winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 7), and the general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A). Since the game ball has won once in the fourth general winning opening 50D), the general winning number is 1, and the large winning number is updated to 7. In addition, the total number of prize balls [1 × 10] awarded according to the prize winning to the general prize opening and the number of prize balls [7 × 15] awarded according to the prize winning to the big prize mouth is 115. Therefore, [total 115 balls] is displayed. It should be noted that the number of winning balls awarded in response to winning the general winning opening [1 × 10 = 10 balls] and the number of winning balls awarded in accordance with winning in the big winning opening [7 × 15 = 105] May be displayed individually.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7 (3), as a result of the second to fifteenth (final) round games, the game balls are counted in the big winning mouth (special variable winning ball device 7) in the big hit gaming state. The game is won three times, and the game balls are won three times in the general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A to fourth general winning opening 50D), so that the general winning number is 3, and the large winning number is updated to 105. ing. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of winning balls awarded in response to winning a general winning opening [3 × 10] and the number of winning balls awarded in response to winning a winning prize [105 × 15] Since the total number of and 1605 is 1605, a total of 1605 balls is displayed.

  In this way, by displaying the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the period controlled to the big winning gaming state separately from the number of winning in the large winning opening, the player can only receive the number of winning in the big winning opening. In addition, we will be interested in the number of prizes received in the general prize opening. In addition, by distinguishing and displaying the number of winning balls according to the number of winning prizes and the number of winning balls according to the number of winning winnings in the general winning slot, the player can win the winning prize. In addition to the number of prize balls given in response to this, there is an interest in the number of prize balls given in accordance with winning in the general prize opening.

  It should be noted that the number of winnings in the general winning award in the probability variation state or the short time state may be displayed on the image display device 5 without being limited to the number of winning in the general winning opening in the period controlled to the big hit gaming state. You may make it display on the image display apparatus 5 the number of winning in a general winning opening in a normal state. In addition, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the right-handed period (big hit gaming state, probability change state or short-time state) may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the general winning in the left-handed period (normal state) may be displayed. The number of winning prizes for the mouth may be displayed on the image display device 5. Further, the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening during a period in which the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number corresponding to the number of stored special figure games) may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position). Is set not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (FIG. 5), the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state shown in FIG. 7 is displayed. Display control to be performed is not executed. In these cases, the number of “general winnings” shown in FIG. 7 itself is not displayed, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the winnings during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state. In addition, the total number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening are not displayed. Only the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes are displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 6, the example in which the number of winning balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening is displayed on the object has been described. However, the image display device 5 has the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening. It may not be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 7, the example in which the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to the general prize opening and the number of prize balls given in accordance with the prize winning to the general prize opening is described. These may not be displayed on the device 5.

  In this way, only the number of winning prizes to the general winning opening may be displayed, and the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening or the number of winning balls given in accordance with the winning to the general winning opening may not be displayed. . With such a configuration, when the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening is changed in the design process of the gaming machine, the display information of the image display device 5 must be changed in accordance with the change. The situation of disappearing can be prevented. In contrast to this, only the number of prize balls awarded in accordance with winning in the general winning opening may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side, the player setting shown in FIGS. The example in which the screen itself is not displayed (the player is not informed that the winning number display / non-display switching is possible) has been described. Even when the operation unit is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to (3) is displayed (the number of winnings can be displayed / hidden switched). May be notified to the player).

  In the case of such a configuration, even if the player has set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the player setting screen of FIGS. 5 (1) to (3), The effect control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 5 based on the fact that the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side. (Do not give priority to the game hall setting). At this time, it may be displayed on the image display device 5 that the number of winnings cannot be displayed due to the priority of the game hall setting.

  When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen shown in FIG. 5A is displayed (the number of winnings can be displayed / hidden switched). That the player is informed), but the player's setting operation may be invalidated. For example, even when the operation button 30 is pressed on the player setting screen of FIG. 5 (1), the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2) is not displayed, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed. It may be impossible to select whether or not.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the game hall setting has priority over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may have priority over the game hall setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. When the operation button 30 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “display” is selected on the selection screen in FIG. 5 (the display control of FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed), and when the operation button 30 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “do not display” is selected on the selection screen of FIG. The number of winning prizes in the mouth may not be displayed on the image display device 5 (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed).

  Further, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening in accordance with the order of the accepted setting operation, with the game hall setting and the player setting having the same priority. That is, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning a prize with priority given to the setting operation (latest setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player can enter the general winning opening on the player setting screens shown in FIGS. When the number is set to be displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed). Moreover, even if it is set not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to (3), after that, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is moved to the second position. In the case of (display position), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is subsequently displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to (3). Is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed). Further, even when the player setting screens of FIGS. 5 (1) to (3) are set to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is thereafter moved to the first position. In the case of (non-display position), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed).

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning a prize on the image display device 5 by operating the display changeover switch 32 by the store clerk of the game hall, and the player By operating the operation button 30, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5. By operating the switch 32, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5. On the player side, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 5. Whether or not to display may not be set (for example, a setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to (3) is not provided). In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 5 only on the game hall side.

  On the contrary, it is possible to set whether or not the image display device 5 displays the number of winnings in the general winning a prize by the player (and the store clerk of the game hall) operating the operation button 30. On the other hand, there may be no means (for example, the display changeover switch 32 is not provided) that allows only the game hall side to set whether or not the image display device 5 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening. In the case of such a configuration, whether or not the player and the store clerk at the game hall display the number of winnings to the general winning a prize on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 30). It can be set. In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation for the player and the game hall.

  In this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5, but the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed in the pachinko. An information display device provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1, for example, a card unit display device provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a call lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 1 to display information It may be displayed on the device. Also, the winning information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted to an information management device (for example, a hall computer) that manages the gaming information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the information management device receives a general winning opening for each gaming machine. The number of winnings may be stored and displayed on the display device. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the mode changeover switch 31 so that the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is not displayed on the gaming machine (image display device 5). It may be displayed only on the information management apparatus.

  In this embodiment, the number-of-wins information stored in the number-of-wins management table is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, and is stored in the display control table according to the setting of the display changeover switch 32. The example in which the winning number information can be displayed on the image display device 5 has been described. Thus, the winning number management table and the display control table are not provided with individual switches for controlling the display of the winning number management table and the display control table. A common switch for performing display control of both the number management table and the display control table may be provided. For example, by setting the common switch as a display setting, both the winning number information stored in the winning number management table and the winning number information stored in the display control table are displayed on the image display device 5, and the common switch The non-display setting may be configured so that neither the winning number information stored in the winning number management table nor the winning number information stored in the display control table is displayed on the image display device 5.

  In FIG. 8A, when a special symbol other than a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped as a confirmed special symbol, it is determined by the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100). An outlier variation pattern is illustrated. FIG. 8B illustrates a big hit variation pattern determined by the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) when a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol. Has been. Since the special figure fluctuation time is determined for each fluctuation pattern, the presentation control CPU 120 that has received the fluctuation pattern designation command can perform the presentation according to the special figure fluctuation time.

  Among the deviation variation patterns, PX001 and PX002 are variation patterns that are non-reach out of effect, PX003 is a variation pattern that is out of normal reach and PX004 is a non-reach effect. It is a fluctuation pattern. Among the big hit fluctuation patterns, PY003 is a fluctuation pattern that is an effect mode of normal reach big hit, and PY004 is a fluctuation pattern that is an effect mode of super reach big hit. Here, the super reach variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a battle effect is executed after the reach state is established. The normal reach variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a battle effect is not executed after the reach state is established.

  The battle effect is an effect that suggests whether or not a teammate character and an enemy character battle each other and win or lose. In PX004, which is a variation pattern of superreach, a defeat effect is performed in which a teammate character loses to an enemy character, while in PY004, which is a variation pattern of a super reach jackpot, the teammate character wins against the enemy character. Production is performed.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 receives the variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command when the start condition is established and the variable display of the special figure is executed in the game control microcomputer 100. As a result, when the special symbol variable display is being executed (before the fixed special symbol is stopped), the specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol of the variable display (that is, the big bonus symbol) It is possible to execute a fluctuating result notice effect for notifying that the game state is controlled).

  In the change result notice effect shown in FIG. 9A, together with the change notice effect of the first mode in which only the sound effect in which the sound “Now is a chance!” Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the sound effect, It is possible to execute the change notice effect of the second mode in which the accessory effect in which the movable accessory 1000 operates (rotating operation and lighting) is executed. Due to the difference in the production mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display currently being executed (the start condition is established).

  The effect control CPU 120, based on the notice effect determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 124, when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect) based on the winning to the general winning opening is established, The mode of the change result notice effect is determined. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning at the general winning opening is established), the mode of the change result notice effect is determined, and the determined mode The change result notice effect is executed. As will be described later, if the special symbol variable display (the decorative symbol variable display associated therewith) is not executed, the execution of the fluctuation result notice effect is suspended or the change result notice effect is displayed. Do not execute.

  For example, if the variable display result (variable display result of the currently executed variable display) specified by the last received variable display result notification command specifies “out of”, the audio effect is 80%. The change notice effect of the 1st mode with only is performed, and the change notice effect of the 2nd mode with a sound effect and an accessory effect is performed in the ratio of 20%. On the other hand, if the variable display result specified by the last received variable display result notification command (the variable display result of the currently executed variable display) specifies “big hit”, the sound effect is 25%. The change notice effect of the 1st mode with only is performed, and the change notice effect of the 2nd mode with a voice effect and an accessory effect is performed in the ratio of 75%.

  Further, as described above, when the effective start winning to the first start winning port or the second starting winning port occurs in the game control microcomputer 100, the production control CPU 120 starts the start winning port designation command and the start winning award. Receives the hour determination result specification command. As a result, before the special chart start condition is established, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol for variable display that has not yet been executed (that is, controlled to the big hit gaming state) ) Can be executed in advance.

  In the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. 9 (b), the first aspect of the pre-reading notice effect and the sound effect in which only the sound effect in which the voice of “coming soon!” Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R is executed together with the sound effect. It is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect of the second mode in which the accessory effect in which the object 1000 operates (rotation operation and lighting) is executed. Due to the difference in the production mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied. Yes.

  The effect control CPU 120 pre-reads based on the notice effect determining random number extracted from the random number circuit 124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect B: pre-read notice effect) based on the winning in the general prize opening is satisfied. The mode of the notice effect is determined. Specifically, the aspect of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning at the general winning opening is established), and the determined aspect is A pre-reading notice effect is executed. Note that, as will be described later, if the number of reserved memories is zero, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is suspended or the prefetching notice effect is not executed.

  For example, if the start prize determination result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area does not include the start prize judgment result designation command for designating “big hit” (all start prizes for designating “out”) In the case of the time determination result designation command), the prefetching notice effect in the first mode with only the audio effect is executed at a rate of 85%, and the second mode with the sound effect and the effect effect at a rate of 15% is executed. A pre-reading notice effect is executed. On the other hand, if the start prize determination result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area includes a start prize determination result designation command for designating “big hit”, the voice effect is 10%. The prefetching notice effect of the 1st mode accompanied only by is performed, and the prefetching notice effect of the 2nd mode accompanied by an audio effect and an effect effect is performed in the ratio of 90%.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a specific effect that is executed based on the winning of a game ball in a general winning opening. The variation result notice effect for notifying whether the display result of the variable display being executed becomes a big hit symbol is executed as the specific effect A in the present embodiment. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied becomes a jackpot symbol, that is, whether or not the reserved memory includes the one determined to be a jackpot, It is executed as a specific effect B in the form.

  In this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting of whether or not the specific effect can be executed, and notifies the number of winnings to the general winning opening. When the setting has been made (when the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting) and the operation button 30 is used, the display setting of the general winning number (execution setting of specific effect) is performed. Only when it is performed) the effect control CPU 120 can execute the specific effect.

  As described above, each time the effect control CPU 120 receives the general winning opening designation command and the start winning opening designation command, the winning history storage area of the RAM 122 stores the winning history of the winning opening designated by the received command. However, this winning history storage area is provided for each specific effect. That is, in this embodiment, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are provided separately. For example, the first general winning opening 50A, the second When winning occurs in the order of the general winning opening 50B, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 50C, and the fourth general winning opening 50D, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and Each of the winning history storage areas corresponding to the specific effect B has a winning history of [first general winning opening, second general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, third general winning opening, fourth]. Will be memorized.

  In the effect form in which only the specific effect A can be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (the timing at which a winning at any one of the winning openings occurs). ), Whether or not the winning condition is satisfied is determined, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined based on the winning condition being satisfied. Further, in an effect form in which only the specific effect B can be executed, every time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at the timing when a winning in any winning opening occurs) It is confirmed whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied. Further, in an effect form in which the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed, every time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (any one) At the timing of winning a prize at the winning opening), it is confirmed whether or not a winning condition corresponding to the specific effect A is established in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and corresponding to the specific effect A. The execution of the specific effect A is determined based on the established winning condition, and it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is satisfied in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B. The execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is established.

  Further, when the execution of the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the specific effect A execution flag. When the special symbol variable display (the variable decorative symbol display) is executed at the timing when the winning condition is established, as described above, the specific effect A corresponding to the variable display result is displayed. The mode (only the audio effect or both the audio effect and the effect effect) is determined, the change result notice effect of the determined mode is executed, and the specific effect A execution flag is deleted. That is, the specific effect A is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without holding the fluctuation result notice effect.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol variable display (variable display of the decorative symbol associated therewith) is not executed at the timing when the winning conditions are satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is executed because there is no target for the change result notice effect. Is put on hold and the specific effect A execution flag remains set. The effect control CPU 120 can grasp that the execution of the specific effect A is determined by setting the specific effect A execution flag, but the specific effect A is not executed and is in a suspended state. It has become. And when the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol (the variable display of the decorative symbol associated therewith) is established, the aspect of the specific effect A is determined based on the variable display result of the variable display to be executed, The specific effect A that has been executed is executed, and the set specific effect A execution flag is deleted.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this form, and if the special symbol variable display (the decorative symbol variable display associated therewith) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is suspended. Without executing the specific effect A, the specific effect A may not be executed even when the variable display start condition is satisfied.

  Further, when the execution of the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the specific effect B execution flag. When the winning condition is satisfied, when the number of reserved memories (hereinafter referred to as the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1 or more, as described above, 1 The aspect of the specific effect B (only the sound effect or both the sound effect and the effect effect) according to the determination result at the time of starting winning is determined, the pre-reading notice effect of the determined aspect is executed, and the specific effect Clear the B execution flag. That is, the specific effect B is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without holding the pre-reading notice effect.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, there is no target of the pre-reading notice effect, so the execution of the specific effect B is suspended and the specific effect B execution flag is set. State. The effect control CPU 120 can grasp that the execution of the specific effect B is determined by the specific effect B execution flag being set, but the specific effect B is not executed and is in a suspended state. It has become. Then, when the start condition is satisfied by the occurrence of a winning at the start winning opening (when the number of stored memories becomes 1 or more), the mode of the specific effect B is determined based on the start winning determination result, The specific effect B that has been put on hold is executed, and the set specific effect B execution flag is deleted.

  In addition, it is not restricted to such a form, and when the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is stopped without deferring the execution of the specific effect B, and thereafter Even if the start condition is satisfied and the number of stored memories becomes 1 or more, the specific effect B may not be executed.

  In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (for example, when a power interruption is detected), the effect control CPU 120 receives the winning history storage area (the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area). All winning histories stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B and the specific effect execution flags (specific effect A execution flag and specific effect B execution flag) are deleted. As a result, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 while the specific effect (variation result notice effect, pre-read notice effect) is being executed, or after the execution of the specific effect has not been executed yet. However, even if the power supply is restarted after that, the specific effect that was being executed or the specific effect that was decided to be executed is not executed again. That is, for a predetermined period after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the specific effect is not executed because the winning history and the specific effect execution flag are erased. When it is confirmed that the winning conditions are satisfied based on the winning history since the power supply is started, the specific effect is newly executed.

[First production form]
In the first effect form shown in FIG. 10, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has a game ball in one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. The winning condition (the first winning condition) is satisfied every time the player wins. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is determined based on the specific effect execution determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D that is the first winning condition). (Including winning history for any of them) is deleted.

  On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability variation state or the short time state, the effect control CPU 120 each time the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. A winning condition (second winning condition) is established. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the presence / absence of the specific effect is determined based on the specific effect execution determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 20%. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning histories in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, which is the second winning condition). (Including winning history for any of them) is deleted.

  In the first effect form, and in the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, (1) the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the normal state is (2 ) It is higher than the rate at which the specific performance is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the probability changing state or the short time state. In the promiscuous state and the short-time state, the player is usually more interested in the winning situation of the game ball in the second starting prize opening and the variable display of the decorative pattern than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Even if the specific performance is executed, it is difficult to produce the same interest as in the normal state. For this reason, in the probability variation state or the short time state, the execution rate of the specific effect is reduced compared with the normal state, and the interest reduction of the specific effect is suppressed.

  In the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, unlike the first effect form, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution. In any of the second to fourth effect forms described later, the specific effect can be executed when the winning condition is satisfied. However, the winning condition in the (2) probability change state or the short-time state is (1) normal. More winnings are required than the winning conditions in the state. Therefore, (1) the execution rate of the specific effect in the normal state is higher than (2) the execution rate of the specific effect in the probability variation state or the short-time state.

  Thus, by making the execution ratio of the specific effects different according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening. Contrary to the examples of the first effect form to the fourth effect form, (2) the ratio of the specific effect being executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the probability variation state or the short time state, ( 1) You may make it become higher than the ratio in which a specific production | presentation is performed based on a game ball having won a general winning opening in the normal state.

  In the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, as in the first effect form, whether or not the specific effect is executed is determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect when the winning condition is satisfied. You may do it. For example, in the second effect form to the fourth effect form, the first winning condition required in the normal state and the second winning condition required in the probability changing state or the short time state are the same winning condition. As in the production mode, by making the lottery probability when the winning condition is established in the normal state different from the lottery probability when the winning condition is established in the probability variation state or the short-time state, the ratio that the specific effect is normally executed and the probability variation You may make it differ from the ratio in which a specific effect is performed in a state or a time-short state.

  Further, the specific effects may be executed at different ratios depending on not only the gaming state but also the display result of variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display is a jackpot symbol, the specific effect may be executed at a higher rate compared to the case where the display result of the variable display is a loss symbol. When there is a hold memory determined to be a big win, compared to a case where there is no hold memory determined to be a big win at the time of starting winning (when there is only a holding memory determined to be a deviation at the time of starting winning), The specific effect may be executed at a high rate. In addition, the number of times that the specific effect is executed in one variable display period is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, the specific effect can be executed only once regardless of the type, or for different types of specific effects It may be possible to execute only once every time).

[Second production form]
In the second effect form shown in FIG. 10, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has two or more general ones out of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. A winning condition (the first winning condition) is established when a game ball wins at least once each at the winning opening. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability variation state or the short-time state, the production control CPU 120 has two or more general winning ports out of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, respectively. A winning condition (second winning condition) is established by winning the game ball two or more times. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  As described above, in the second effect form, and in the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the number of winnings to the general winning opening necessary for executing the specific effect in the normal state, Because the number of winnings in the general winning opening required to execute the specific performance in the short-time state is different, it is possible to make interest in the number of winning game balls in the general winning opening depending on the gaming state. .

  Further, in the second effect form, in order to execute the specific effect, the game is performed at least once for each of two or more general winning ports of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D. Ball winning is a condition. In this way, by setting the winning for each of the plurality of general winning awards as the execution condition of the specific effect, not only the presence or absence of the winning in the general winning award, but the game ball wins in any general award You can be interested in what you did.

  In the second effect form and the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the start of the big hit game state is designated based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 controls the big hit game state. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the jackpot start designation command, both the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. It is supposed to be.

  Also, in the second effect form, and in the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased based on the change in the gaming state. . Therefore, the fact that the first winning condition is satisfied means that the first winning condition is satisfied as a result of confirming the winning history in the winning history storage area in the normal state. Based on this, the first winning condition is not necessarily established. Similarly, the fact that the second winning condition is satisfied means that the second winning condition is satisfied as a result of confirming the winning history in the winning history storage area in the probability changing state or the short time state. The second winning condition is not always established based on the winning history only in the short-time state. Note that the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the probability changing state or the time-saving state, and the transition from the probability changing state or the time-shortening state to the normal state. Also good. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the first winning condition is established based on the winning history only in the normal state, and whether or not the second winning condition is established based on the winning history only in the probability variation state or the short-time state. You may make it confirm.

[Third production form]
In the third effect form shown in FIG. 10, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has the general prize opening (the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize within 120 seconds). The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established when the game ball has won a total of three or more times at the winning opening 50D). When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability variation state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 120 can enter the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) within 120 seconds. A winning condition (second winning condition) is established when the game ball has won five or more times in total. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  Here, the period of 120 seconds is started based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A (for example, the timer for the specific effect A is set to 120 seconds). Set). If the winning condition is not satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (when the specific effect A timer times out), the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is erased without executing the specific effect A. . On the other hand, when the winning condition is satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (when the winning condition is satisfied before the time-out of the timer for the specific effect A), the specific effect A is executed and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A Is erased.

  As described above, the winning frequency (the number of winnings within a predetermined period) required for executing the specific effect in the normal state and the winning frequency (predetermined period) required for executing the specific effect in the probability variation state or the short time state. (The number of winning prizes) can be made interested in the winning frequency of the general winning opening according to the gaming state.

  Further, in the third effect form, when the specific effect A targeted for the variable display that was executed at the time of winning the first general winning award in a predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed (only for one variable display period) If there is a winning condition according to the winning history), a specific effect A is executed for a variable display different from the variable display that was executed at the time of winning the first general winning opening in a predetermined period (120 seconds). In some cases, the winning conditions may be satisfied by winning histories in a plurality of variable display periods.

  It should be noted that, as in the third production mode, a special design is variably displayed a predetermined number of times as a mode in which the specific production is executed when the number of prizes received in the general prize opening in a predetermined period reaches a predetermined number. The specific effect may be executed when the number of prizes received in the general prize opening during the period reaches a predetermined number. For example, it is specified when the number of winnings in the general winning award reaches a predetermined number until all the reserved memory of the special figure game is exhausted, that is, within the period when the variable display of special symbols corresponding to the number of reserved memories is executed. An effect may be executed.

[Fourth production form]
In the fourth effect form shown in FIG. 10, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 starts the winning prize opening (either the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening). , The winning winning opening (one of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening), the general winning opening (any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) in order of the game balls The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established by winning the mouth. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a certain change state or a short-time state, the effect control CPU 120 has a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a starting winning opening (first start). Any one of the winning a prize opening and the second start winning a prize opening), the general winning a prize opening (any one of the first general award winning opening 50A to the fourth general award opening 50D), and the general winning a prize opening (the first general winning a prize opening 50A to the fourth award). The winning condition (the second winning condition) is established when the game balls win the winning opening in the order of the general winning opening 50D). When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  In this way, the specific effect is executed on condition that the winning order to the other winning ports (the first starting winning port, the second starting winning port) different from the general winning port and the general winning port is a specific order. This makes it possible to give interest not only to the status of winning the general winning award but also to the winning order for the general winning award and other winning awards.

  It should be noted that a range may be provided for the number of times that a game ball wins continuously to the general winning opening and the number of times that a game ball wins continuously to another winning port. For example, the winning condition may be satisfied by winning the general winning opening twice or more after winning the starting winning opening three or more times continuously. In addition, the winning condition may be determined regarding which of the plurality of general winning awards or which of the plurality of other winning awards has been won. For example, a winning condition is established when a game ball wins a winning opening in the order of a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first general winning opening 50A, and a second general winning opening 50B. Also good. The winning conditions are not limited to the order in which the winning in the general winning opening occurs after the winning in the starting winning opening occurs, but the winning condition is determined by the winning in the starting winning opening after the winning in the general winning opening occurs. May hold.

  Further, the winning conditions may be established based on the fact that the order of winning the game balls to the plurality of general winning holes becomes a specific order. For example, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition (( When the first winning condition is established) and the gaming state is (2) a probability change state or a short-time state, the first general winning opening 50A, the second general winning opening 50B, and the third general winning The winning conditions (referred to as the second winning condition) may be satisfied when the game balls have won a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the mouth 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D.

Further, the winning conditions may be established based on the winning order of the game balls in the plurality of general winning holes and the winning order of the game balls in the one or more starting winning holes being in a specific order. . For example, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition ((1) the game ball is won in the order of the first general winning opening 50A, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 50B) When the first winning condition is established) and the gaming state is (2) a probability change state or a short-time state, the first general winning opening 50A, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 50B, Furthermore, the winning condition (the second winning condition) may be satisfied when the game balls have won in the order of the third general winning opening 50C, the second starting winning opening, and the fourth general winning opening 50D. good.

  In addition, the order of entry to the general prize opening and entry to the start prize opening is not limited to the order of entry to the general prize opening and entry to the grand prize opening. The condition may be satisfied, and the winning condition is satisfied based on the fact that the order of entering the general winning opening and entering the first passing gate 41A or the second passing gate 41B becomes a specific order. You may do it. In addition, when there is a specific area in which a big hit type (for example, a probable big hit) is determined based on the entry of a game ball, the order of entry into the general winning opening and the entry into the specific area is specific. The winning conditions may be satisfied based on the order.

  In the first effect form to the fourth effect form, the example in which the variation result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect has been described. However, the prefetch notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. May be.

[Fifth effect form to eighth effect form]
In the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 11, unlike the first effect form to the fourth effect form, (1) in the normal state and (2) in the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state. The winning conditions are not different and are common winning conditions. In the examples of the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form, the first winning conditions in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, that is, the winning conditions employed in the normal state are provided as common winning conditions, respectively. ing. Then, (1) if the game state when the winning condition is satisfied is the normal state, the change result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the game when the winning condition is satisfied. When the state is a certain change state or a short time state, a pre-reading notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. Thereby, according to the gaming state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, the type of the specific effect can be made different, and the specific effect executed based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening. Interest can be improved.

  In the fifth effect form shown in FIG. 11, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the specific effect at a rate of 50% when the winning condition is satisfied. When the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and All winning histories in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a certain change state or a short-time state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A , And the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the sixth effect form to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 11, the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific effect A when the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the normal state, Each time the specific effect A is executed, both the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. On the other hand, if the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (2) a certain change state or a short time state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, it corresponds to the specific effect A. Both the winning history in the winning history storage area and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased.

  In the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect mode, a big hit start specifying command for specifying the start of the big hit game state is sent based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 controls the big hit game state. Is received, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both erased. Further, in the sixth effect form to the eighth effect form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased when the gaming state is changed. Note that the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the probability changing state or the time-saving state, and the transition from the probability changing state or the time-shortening state to the normal state. Also good.

  In the seventh effect form, the specific effect timer is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general prize opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the specific effect B. . Then, when the specific effect timer times out, the specific effect A and the specific effect B are not executed, and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B are displayed. Both are erased. On the other hand, if the winning conditions are satisfied before the time-out of the specific effect timer, (1) in the normal state, the specific effect A is executed and the winning history and the specific effect B in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. All the winning histories in the winning history storage area are deleted. (2) In the case of the probability change state or the short time state, the specific effect B is executed and the winning history and the specific effect in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. All winning histories in the B winning history storage area are erased.

[9th effect form-12th effect form]
In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form shown in FIG. 12, unlike the first effect form to the eighth effect form, (1) in the normal state and (2) in the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state. The winning conditions are different, and the types of specific effects executed based on the establishment of the winning conditions are also different. That is, (1) when the first winning condition is established in the normal state, the variation result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the second winning condition in the probability variation state or the short time state. When is established, a prefetch notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. Thereby, according to the gaming state when the game ball has won the general winning opening, the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect can be made different, and the game ball has won the general winning opening. It is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance executed based on the above.

  In the ninth effect form shown in FIG. 12, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has a game ball in either the first general winning port 50A or the second general winning port 50B. The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established each time the player wins, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the short time state, the effect control CPU 120 each time the game ball wins one of the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. The winning condition (second winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect B is determined at a rate of 20%. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the tenth effect form shown in FIG. 12, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has 1 for each of the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B. When the game ball wins at least once, a winning condition (first winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability variation state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 120 has two or more game balls at both the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. Wins the winning condition (the second winning condition), and the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 controls the big hit game state, a big hit start specifying command for specifying the start of the big hit game state is sent to the effect control CPU 120. Is received, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both erased. Also, in the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased when the gaming state is changed. Note that the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the probability changing state or the time-saving state, and the transition from the probability changing state or the time-shortening state to the normal state. Also good.

  In the eleventh effect form shown in FIG. 12, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B within 120 seconds. When a game ball wins a total of three or more times, a winning condition (first winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 120 wins the game ball a total of five times or more in the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. As a result, a winning condition (second winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the eleventh effect form, the timer for specific effect A is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general prize opening is stored in the prize history storage area of specific effect A. When the timer for the specific effect A times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is erased without executing the specific effect A. On the other hand, if the first winning condition is satisfied in the normal state before the time-out of the timer for the specific effect A, the specific effect A is executed and only the winning history in the prize history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted. Further, based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B, the timer for the specific effect B is set to 120 seconds. When the timer for the specific effect B times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is erased without executing the specific effect B. On the other hand, if the second winning condition is established in the probability variation state or the short-time state before the timeout of the timer for the specific effect B, the specific effect B is executed and only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is deleted. Is done.

  In the twelfth effect form shown in FIG. 12, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 has a first start winning port, a first starting winning port, a second general winning port 50B, The winning conditions (the first winning condition) are established when the game balls win the winning opening in this order. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the production control CPU 120 has the second start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 50C, and the fourth general winning opening. The winning condition (second winning condition) is established when the game balls win the winning opening in the order of 50D. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  As in the 9th effect form to the 12th effect form, the general winning opening (the general winning opening and the start winning opening in the twelfth effect form) that is a target for winning the game ball for executing the specific effect is determined according to the gaming state. Thus, the specific effect is appropriately executed according to the gaming state. In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, in order to establish the second winning condition in the probability variation state or the short time state, the target winning opening to be awarded in order to establish the first winning condition in the normal state Although the example where all the target winning mouths to be awarded are different is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the target winning mouth in the normal state and the target winning mouth in the certain change state or the short time state are partially It may be common. For example, the first prize condition and the second prize condition may include a prize for the second general prize opening 50B.

[13th effect form-16th effect form]
In the thirteenth effect mode to the sixteenth effect mode shown in FIG. 13, the ratio of executing the specific effect A when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is a period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation. However, the timing at which the second winning condition is satisfied is higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A when (2) the reach variation is outside the reach variation period or before the reach state is established in the reach variation.

  Here, (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, specifically, the confirmed decorative pattern (final stop) after the reach state is established in the variable display of the variation pattern with the reach effect (normal reach, super reach) This is the period until the symbol is stopped. In addition, (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is, specifically, a period during which variable display of a fluctuation pattern with reach production (normal reach, super reach) is being executed. It is the period from the start of variable display of the fluctuation pattern with reach production (normal reach, super reach) to before the reach state is established.

  The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the thirteenth effect form to the sixteenth effect form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, respectively. It has become. In any production form, when the timing when the first winning condition is established is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is determined by the second winning condition. When the established timing is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio is higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A. In this way, by changing the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[17th effect form to 20th effect form]
In the seventeenth effect form to the twentieth effect form shown in FIG. 14, when the timing when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, the specific effect A is executed, and the winning condition is determined. When the timing at which is established is (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

  The winning conditions in the seventeenth effect form to the twentieth effect form are the same as the winning conditions (common winning conditions) in the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form, respectively. In any production mode, when the timing when the winning condition (common winning condition) is established is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the winning condition is established. When the performed timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, by executing different types of specific effects according to the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[21st effect form to 24th effect form]
In the 21st effect form to the 24th effect form shown in FIG. 15, the specific effect A is executed when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is the period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation. When the timing at which the second winning condition is established is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

  The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the twenty-first effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, respectively. It has become. In any production mode, when the timing when the first winning condition is established is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the second winning condition is established. When the completed timing is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, depending on the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, the execution ratio of the specific effects is made different, and by executing different types of specific effects according to the gaming periods when the winning conditions are satisfied, It is possible to improve interest when a game ball wins a general winning opening.

[25th effect form and 26th effect form]
In the 25th effect form shown in FIG. 16, unlike the 1st effect form to the 24th effect form, regardless of the gaming state or the game period, the general winning award (first general winning award 50A to fourth general winning award 50D). The first winning condition is satisfied when the game ball has won three or more times in total. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. Further, regardless of the game state and the game period, the second winning condition is satisfied when the game ball has won a total of five or more times in the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D). When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the 26th effect form shown in FIG. 16, unlike the first effect form to the 24th effect form, the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general) is within 120 seconds regardless of the game state and the game period. The first winning condition is established when the game ball has won a total of three or more times at the winning opening 50D). When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. In addition, regardless of the game state and the game period, the second prize is awarded because the game ball has won five or more times in the general prize opening (first general prize opening 50A to fourth general prize opening 50D) within 120 seconds. The condition is met. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In this way, regardless of the game state and the game period, the number of winnings to the general winning a prize mouth is executed by performing different effects according to the number of winnings to the general winning award and the winning frequency (the number of winnings within a predetermined period). And interest in winning prizes. In this example, the production mode (output audio) differs according to the number of winnings to the general prize opening and the winning frequency, and the variable display to be notified differs (specific production A: variable display being executed, Specific presentation B: variable display that has not been executed), but is not limited to this, depending on the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the winning frequency, whether or not to suggest the display result of the variable display is different ( For example, it may be possible to execute an effect of notifying the display result of the variable display and an effect not related to the display result of the variable display, and an effect (for example, high probability) indicating whether or not the game state is suggested. It is also possible to execute an effect that informs that the state is in effect and an effect that is not related to the gaming state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 receives a general winning opening designation command and receives a general winning opening, and the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. It is possible to specify which of the game balls has been won, and upon receipt of the start winning port designation command, a winning to the starting winning port has occurred, and either the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port has a game It is possible to specify whether or not the ball has won, and it is possible to specify that a winning to the big winning opening has occurred by receiving the winning prize winning command. Therefore, the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 17 can be stored as the winning number management table and can be updated.

  The second start winning opening is formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, and the normally variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be released (the game ball can be won or can be easily won from a closed state where the game ball is not winning or difficult to win). The game ball can be won by switching to the state. Further, the special winning opening is formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be opened (the game ball can be won or won easily from a closed state where the game ball is not won or difficult to win). The game ball can be won by switching to the open state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17, the second start winning opening and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 are classified into a prize winning slot where a game ball can be won by the operation of the winning combination. On the other hand, the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D and the first start winning opening are always open, and a non-commodity winning opening through which a game ball can be won regardless of the operation of the accessory. It is divided into.

  In the winning number management table of FIG. 17, a game ball has won a prize in each of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening. The number of prize balls given at times (the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening, which is 10, 10, 10, 10, 2, 2, 15 in this example) is stored. Then, for each winning opening, the number of winnings (in this example, 11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420), which is the number of times that a game ball has won the winning opening, is multiplied by the number of winning balls. The number of payouts (the total number of balls paid out by winning the game ball in the winning opening, 110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300 in this example) is stored.

  The winning ratios are as follows: (1) The number of winning prizes in each winning mouth (11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420), respectively, with respect to the total number of winning prizes in each winning mouth (1572 in this example). And (2) non-community winning ports (first general winning port 50A to fourth general winning port 50D and first start winning) with respect to the total number (1572 in this example) of each winning port. The number of winning prizes (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754), the percentage of winning numbers (315 + 420) of the winning prize winning opening (the second starting winning prize opening and the big winning prize opening), and (3) the total number of winning prizes for each winning prize ( In this example, the ratio of the number of winnings other than the big winning opening (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754 + 315) and the ratio of the winning number of the big winning opening (420) with respect to 1572) are stored.

  Also, as the payout ratio, (1) the number of payouts for each winning mouth (110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300, respectively) with respect to the total number of payouts for each winning mouth (9268 in this example) And (2) non-commodity prize opening (the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize opening 50D and the first start prize) with respect to the total number of payouts of each prize opening (9268 in this example) The number of payouts (110 + 360 + 220 + 1140 + 1508), the ratio of the number of payouts (630 + 6300) for the prize winning award (630), and (3) the total number of payouts for each winning mouth ( In this example, the ratio of the number of payouts other than the big prize opening (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508 + 630) and the ratio of the number of payouts of the big prize opening (6300) with respect to 9268) are stored.

  Here, as described above, during the period when the operation unit of the mode switch 31 is in the second position (display position), the effect control CPU 120 displays each information stored in the winning number management table as an image. Display on device 5. Accordingly, the store clerk at the game hall is paid out when the game ball is won at the prize winning port with respect to the total number of balls (9268) paid out when the game ball is won at each winning port. The ratio of the number of balls (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508) (hereinafter referred to as “first payout ratio”, which is 74.77% in this example) can be grasped. In addition, the number of balls (6300) paid out by winning the game ball at the big prize opening with respect to the total number of balls (9268) paid out by winning the game ball at each prize opening. The ratio (hereinafter referred to as “second payout ratio”, which is 67.98% in this example) can be grasped.

  Here, when the first payout ratio is higher than a predetermined first reference ratio (for example, 70%), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the fact in an identifiable manner. . In the example of FIG. 17, since the first payout ratio (74.77%) exceeds the first reference ratio (70%), the display area of the first payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame. In addition, when the second payout ratio is higher than a predetermined second reference ratio (for example, 60%), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the fact in an identifiable manner. In the example of FIG. 17, since the second payout ratio (67.98%) exceeds the second reference ratio (60%), the display area of the second payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can display the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio on the image display device 5, and the comparison result between the first reference ratio and the second reference ratio determined in advance. It can be displayed in a graspable manner. For example, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed on the image display device 5 by the setting of the display changeover switch 32 and the setting operation by the operation button 30 regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 31. The first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may also be displayed when the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed regardless of the settings on the game hall side or the player side. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed according to the gaming state, for example, when being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the calculated first payout ratio and the second payout ratio to a gaming device (for example, a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1 for gaming. In the apparatus, the received first payout ratio and second payout ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device. Further, the production control CPU 120 transmits the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to an information management apparatus such as a hall computer, and the information management apparatus uses the first payout ratio and the second payout of each gaming machine. The ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device.

  In addition, when the game control microcomputer 100 outputs a general prize opening designation command, a start prize opening designation command, or a big prize opening prize command to the effect control CPU 120, external output information corresponding to these commands is output. As an information, it is possible to specify that a winning to the general winning opening has occurred and which of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D the game ball has won, and a winning to the start winning opening has occurred. And information that can specify whether the game ball has won in the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening, and information that can specify that the winning to the big winning opening has occurred The data is output to an external device such as a card unit or a call lamp device or an information management device (hall computer).

  This makes it possible to specify information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, information corresponding to the start winning opening designation command, information corresponding to the big winning opening winning command, that is, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio. In the external device that has received this information, it is possible to store the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 17 for each gaming machine and update it. This makes it possible to grasp the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio for each gaming machine. In addition, for each gaming machine, it can be determined whether the first payout ratio exceeds the first reference ratio and whether the second payout ratio exceeds the second reference ratio.

  In addition, regarding the counting period of the winning number information (value of each item in FIG. 3 or FIG. 17) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko machine 1, if no setting is made for the counting period, the pachinko machine It is a period from when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is started until the power supply is stopped. As the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is reset (the number of winnings at each winning opening becomes 0), and the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed. In some cases, the number of winnings for each winning opening stored in the winning number management table is zero. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is erased without being backed up.

  The total period of the number-of-wins information (value of each item in FIG. 3 or FIG. 17) stored in the number-of-wins management table of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set on the game hall side. Using the button 30, it is possible to set a total period (for example, 10 hours or 3 hours) for the gaming machine. In addition, in a gaming device (card unit or calling lamp device), a shop clerk inputs a desired counting period with an input device or the like, and the input counting period is transmitted to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 1, and the counting period May be set (stored in the RAM 122). In addition, in the information management device (hall computer), the manager of the game hall inputs a desired total period with an input device or the like, and the input total period is the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the pachinko machine selected as the setting target). It may be transmitted to the gaming machine 1) and set as a total period (stored in the RAM 122). Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a winning number management table is created for each set counting period (for example, 10 hours), and these are displayed on the image display device 5, or correspondingly provided gaming devices (cards) Unit, call lamp device) and displayed on the display device of the gaming device, or output to the information management device (hall computer) and displayed on the display device of the information management device. .

  Also, the number of winnings in the winning number management table is output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the information corresponding to the general winning mouth designation command, the information corresponding to the start winning mouth designation command, and the information corresponding to the big winning mouth winning command. By storing and updating information (value of each item in FIG. 3 or FIG. 17), by setting an aggregation period using an input device provided in the external apparatus, an external apparatus that updates the information is set for each set aggregation period (for example, 10 hours). A winning number management table can be created and displayed on a display device provided in an external device. For example, when the external device is a gaming device (a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a winning number management table for a predetermined period related to the corresponding gaming machine is displayed on the display device. If the external device is an information management device that manages gaming information for each gaming machine, the winning number management table for each predetermined period can be displayed on the display device for each gaming machine. It becomes.

[27th effect form]
The specific effects A and B described above both give notice of the variable display result in the special game according to the effect mode, and are executed in connection with the winning of the game balls to the general winning openings 50A to 50D. As the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the general game. FIG. 18 illustrates a specific effect C (point giving effect) as an effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game.

  In the 27th effect form shown in FIG. 19 and the 29th effect form to be described later, the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 every time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. The presence / absence of execution of the specific effect C is determined based on the execution determination random number, and the specific effect C is executed if it is determined to be executed. When the specific effect C is executed, 1 is added to the total points in the point storage area formed in the RAM 122, and as shown in FIG. 18, the image presentation device 5 includes an image including the characters “1point”. 2000 is displayed.

  That is, every time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, a lottery for whether or not to give one point is performed, and the lottery is won. In this case, a point form effect in which 1 point is given is performed. A privilege is given to the player according to the total points in the point storage area.

  For example, when the total point reaches 5 (when 5 wins have been won), a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server is displayed on the image display device 5. The player can access the image providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal that he owns, and download the desired standby image or the like to the information terminal. . When the total point reaches 10 (when 10 points are won), a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 5. The player can access the music providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, and download the desired music to the information terminal.

  In the 27th production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which a variable display of a special symbol is executed (within a symbol variation period) ), The specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and (2) when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period), the rate is 80%. The specific effect C is executed. The effect control CPU 120 receives a change start command for specifying start of change in the special figure game, and a change pattern specification command for specifying a change pattern such as a change time of the special symbol in the special figure game and a decorative pattern in the image display device 5. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed.

  As with the specific effects A and B, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effects C is provided. Each time the specific effect C is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, which is the winning condition) History is included).

  Here, the total point of the point storage area formed in the RAM 122 is 10 regardless of the winning history in the winning history storage area (even if the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased). After reaching (in this example, a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed), it is reset to 0, and 1 is added again each time the specific effect C is executed.

  In the 27th effect form and the 29th effect form, which will be described later, (1) the specific effect is based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol change period). The rate of execution is lower than (2) the rate of execution of a specific effect based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening during a period when the special symbol variable display is not being executed (outside the symbol change period). Is set. During the period of (1), the player usually has a general prize because an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 5 or the speakers 8L, 8R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, rather than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed in the period of (1), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, during the period (2), the player can execute the specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special game that is the object of interest is not executed. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the period of (1).

  Further, by executing a specific effect C (point giving effect) that is not related to a variable display result in a special game or a variable display result in a normal game as a specific effect, depending on the execution status of the special game and the number of reserved memories. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when an effect related to a variable display result in a special game such as a specific effect A is adopted as a specific effect, the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is (2) variable symbol variable display is executed When the period is not set (outside the symbol change period), there is no change result notice target at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the winning in the general prize opening is stopped) or the execution is suspended until the start condition of the variable display related to the special game is established (the general prize) The specific effect is not executed at the timing of winning the mouth, and the specific effect is subsequently executed at the timing when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the interest may decrease due to the divergence between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. By adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the general game as the specific effect, such a problem can be avoided.

  In the twenty-seventh effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which variable display of a special symbol is being executed (design variation) If it is within the period), the specific effect C is not executed, and (2) the specific effect C can be executed only when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period). Also good. Also, contrary to the example shown in the 27th effect form, (1) specified based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period) The rate at which the effect is executed is (2) the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during a period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period). May be set to be higher.

[28th effect form]
In the twenty-eighth effect form, unlike the twenty-seventh effect form, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution extracted from the random number circuit 124. In the twenty-eighth effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which a special symbol variable display is executed (within a symbol variation period) ), The specific effect A (change result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) The specific effect A is not executed.

  In addition, as shown to Fig.9 (a), the specific effect A is either the 1st aspect in which only an audio effect is performed, and the 2nd aspect in which an accessory effect is performed with an audio effect. Thus, the variation result notice effect suggests that the possibility that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied is suggested before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9B, the specific effect B is one of the first aspect in which only the sound effect is executed and the second aspect in which the accessory effect is executed together with the sound effect. Thus, the pre-reading notice effect suggests that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as a variable display result of variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the specific effect C is a variable display display result (whether it becomes a big hit symbol) related to the special game, and a variable display display result (whether it becomes a win symbol) related to the normal game. It is an effect not related to any of the above, and points are awarded to the player in accordance with winning in the general winning opening.

  As described above, when the timing at which the game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the specific effect A is not executed (described above “ The execution of the specific effect A is deferred, and the process of “execute when the variable display start condition for the special game is satisfied” is not performed), and is specified only in the period (1). Production A is to be executed. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least one of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, which is the winning condition) History is included).

  In the 28th effect form, by executing the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game executed at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening as the specific effect, I am trying to improve my interest in specific productions. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is a period (2) during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a subject of the change result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the general prize opening), and then specified when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied. When the production A is executed, there is a possibility that the interest will be lowered due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific production. Therefore, in the twenty-eighth effect form, the specific effect A is not executed when the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period).

  In the twenty-eighth effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), The specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 80%, and the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20% in the case of the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period). In the case of such a form, when a winning in a general winning opening occurs during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period), the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (in the general winning opening) The specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning a prize), and then the specific effect A is executed when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied. As described above, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is either the period (1) (within the symbol variation period) or the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period). Alternatively, the specific effect A may be executed, and the specific effect A may be executed at a different rate.

  In addition, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is within the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), a special feature being executed is further displayed. The execution ratio of the specific effect A may be varied depending on the variable display result of the figure game and whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed. For example, if the CPU 120 for effect control determines to use the confirmed decorative symbol as the jackpot symbol, the specific effect A is executed at a rate of 80%, and the confirmed decorative symbol is used as the off symbol. If it is determined, the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[29th effect form]
In the 29th effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). Is within the period of 1 or more, (2) In the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period) In some cases, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is as follows: (3) A period in which the number of reserved memories is 0 and the special symbol variable display is not executed ( If it is outside the symbol variation period), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

  That is, when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, the special symbol variable display is executed or at least the special symbol variable display is determined to be executed ((1) or (2) above) ), The specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and the special symbol variable display is not executed and the special symbol variable display is performed at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. If it is not determined to execute (in the period (3) above), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

  Each time the specific effect C is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, which is the winning condition) History is included).

  In the 29th effect form, when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, the special symbol variable display is executed, or at least the special symbol variable display is determined to be executed ((1) above) (If it is during the period of (2)), the specific effect is executed at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, the special symbol variable display is not executed, and the special symbol variable display is performed. It is set lower than the rate at which the specific effect is executed when the execution is not determined (in the case of the period (3)). In the period of (1) and (2), an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect or a prefetch notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 5 or the speakers 8L and 8R. The player is usually more interested in these effects including variable display of decorative symbols rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. For this reason, even if the specific effect is executed during the periods (1) and (2), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, during the period (3), the player can execute the specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special figure game that is the target of interest is not executed. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the periods (1) and (2).

  Further, by executing a specific effect C (point giving effect) that is not related to a variable display result in a special game or a variable display result in a normal game as a specific effect, depending on the execution status of the special game and the number of reserved memories. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect that can be executed only when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more as in the specific effect B is adopted as the specific effect, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is the number of reserved memories In the period in which is 0, there is no target of prefetching notice at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the prize winning in the general prize opening is stopped), or the execution is suspended until the reserved memory count becomes 1 or more (the general prize winning is won). The specific effect is not executed at the timing, and then the specific effect is executed at the timing when the variable display start condition for the special game is established). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the interest may decrease due to the divergence between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. By adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the general game as the specific effect, such a problem can be avoided.

  In the 29th effect form, variable display of a special symbol is executed or at least variable display of a special symbol is performed at a timing when a game ball wins any of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D. If it is decided to execute (in the period (1) or (2) above), the specific effect C is not executed, the special symbol variable display is not executed, and the special symbol is not executed. The specific effect C may be executable only when it is not determined to execute the variable display (in the case of the period (3)). Contrary to the example shown in the 29th effect form, is the variable symbol display being executed at the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D? Or, when it is decided to execute variable display of special symbols at least (in the case of the period (1) or (2) above), the variable symbol special display is executed at a rate that the specific effect is executed. If it is not determined to execute variable symbol special display (in the period (3) above), it may be set to be higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed.

  In addition, the timing at which variable display related to the special figure game is started (the timing when the start condition is satisfied) and the timing at which the game ball is won at the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds and including the same time). In this case, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the variable display is started, without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special game immediately after the start condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of the specific effect B or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the game is related to the special figure game. In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins the start winning opening (the timing when the start condition is established) and the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds, including the same time). In some cases, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the reserved memory number increases without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special game immediately after the start condition is established (for example, in the case of the specific effect A or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the game is related to the special figure game.

[30th effect form]
In the 30th effect form, unlike the 29th effect form, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution extracted from the random number circuit 124. In the 30th production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). ) Is within a period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the reserved memory number is 0. Is the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period), (3) the period in which the number of reserved memories is 0 and the special symbol variable display is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period) If it is, the specific effect B is not executed.

  As described above, when the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2) or (3), the specific effect B is not executed. (The above-described process of “suspending execution of the specific effect B and executing it when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more” is not performed) and only in the period of (1), The specific effect B is executed. Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at least one of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, which is the winning condition) History is included).

  In the 30th effect form, the specific effect B is specified by executing the specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) related to the variable display result of the special figure game held at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. I try to improve my interest in production. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is the period (2) or (3) in which the number of stored memories is 0, there is no target for the prefetch notice at this timing. In this case, the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing of winning the general prize opening), and then the specific effect B is displayed when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. When it is executed, there is a risk that the interest will be lowered due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific performance. Therefore, in the 30th effect form, the specific effect B is not executed when the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (2) or (3) (the period in which the stored storage number is 0). .

  In the 30th production mode, when the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory). The specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and if it is the period (2) or (3) (within the period without holding storage), the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 20%. You may do it. In the case of such a form, when a winning to the general winning opening occurs during the period (2) or (3) (within the period without holding storage), the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended. Every time (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing of winning the general winning opening), and then the specific effect B is executed when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. As described above, the timing at which the game ball is won at the general winning opening is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory) and the period (2) or (3) (within the period without reserved memory). ), The specific effect B can be executed, and the specific effect B can be executed at a different rate.

  Further, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is within the period (1) (within a period with reserved storage), the holding is further held. The execution ratio of the specific effect B varies depending on the variable display result of the special game related to memory and whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbols accompanying the execution of the special game related to the reserved memory. You may do it. For example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the start winning prize determination result designation command for designating “big hit” in the start winning command storage area (that is, the reserved memory in which the variable display result of the special game is a big hit symbol). In the case where there is a special winning effect B at a rate of 80%, the start winning time determination result designation command for designating “big hit” is not stored in the start winning command storage area (ie, In the case where there is no reserved memory in which the variable display result of the special figure game becomes a big hit symbol), the specific effect B may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[31st effect form]
In the 31st effect form shown in FIG. 20, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is as follows: (1) A period during which the variable symbol variable display is executed ( If it is within the symbol change period), the specific effect A (change result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) In some cases, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1) and the period (2). Different types of specific effects are executed. Thereby, it can be interested in the effect performed when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and it can improve interest. In addition, every time a specific effect (specific effect A or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history (at least the first general winning opening 50A to 4A that are the winning conditions) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect. The winning history for any of the general winning ports 50D is included).

  In the 31st effect form, by executing the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game being executed at the timing when the game ball has won the general winning opening, I am trying to improve my interests. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is a period (2) during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a subject of the change result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, if no specific effects are executed, the execution frequency of the specific effects decreases. On the other hand, in order not to reduce the execution frequency of the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the general winning opening), and then the special game is related. When the specific effect A is executed when the variable display start condition is satisfied, there is a possibility that the interest is lowered due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect.

  In the 31st effect form, when a game ball wins a general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period), instead of the specific effect A, the variable display result in the special game or the variable in the normal game By executing the specific effect C that is not related to the display result, such a problem can be avoided. It should be noted that any type of specific production is always executed (percentage is executed at a rate of 100%) every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening, and any type of specific presentation is given every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening. The specific performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

[32nd form]
In the thirty-second effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). ) Is within a period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the reserved memory number is 0. Is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period), the specific effect A (change result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (3) the number of reserved memories is 0 When the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period), the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (1), the period (2), In the case of the period 3), different types of specific effects are executed. Thereby, it can be interested in the effect performed when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and it can improve interest. Each time a specific effect (specific effect A, specific effect B, or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general winning that is the winning condition) The winning history for any of the mouth 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is included).

  In the thirty-second effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is within the period of (1), that is, when the target of the prefetch notice exists, the specific effect B (prefetch notice) When the period is within the period of (2), that is, when there is no target of the prefetching notice but there is a target of the fluctuation result notice, the specific effect A (fluctuation result notice effect) When the period is (3), that is, when neither the target of the pre-reading notice nor the subject of the change result notice exists, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed.

  In this way, by selecting a specific effect that can be executed immediately at the timing when a game ball is won in the general prize opening, and executing this, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest when the game ball wins the general prize opening. I try to let them. It should be noted that any type of specific production is always executed (percentage is executed at a rate of 100%) every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening, and any type of specific presentation is given every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening. The specific performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

  In the thirty-second effect form, if the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing. Regardless, that is, the pre-reading notice effect is executed regardless of whether or not there is a subject of the change result notice. That is, in the case where “the subject of the change result notice and the object of the prefetch notice exist both”, the prefetch notice effect is preferentially executed. Not only in such a form, but when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when a game ball wins a general winning opening, when variable display of special symbols is executed at that timing, the change result notice When the effect is executed, and the variable symbol special display is not executed at that timing, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed. That is, in the case where “the target of the change result notice and the target of the prefetch notice exist both”, the change result notice effect may be preferentially executed.

[Modified example of the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form]
In the twenty-seventh effect form to the thirty-second effect form, the execution ratio of the specific effect may be varied according to the state when the game ball is won at the general winning opening. The “state” here is a state that is generated as a result of a game in the gaming machine and is based on a game in the gaming machine. The execution ratio of the specific effect is varied according to the state category. For example, in the 27th effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is within (1) the symbol variation period, if the game state at that time is a normal state, the specific effect is 30%. C is executed, and if the gaming state at that time is a certain change state or a short time state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside the symbol variation period (2), if the gaming state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 100%. If the game state at that time is a certain change state or a short time state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 60%. According to this, the interest when a game ball wins a general winning opening can be further enhanced.

  Moreover, in the 27th effect form-the 32nd effect form, you may make it vary the kind of specific effect performed according to the state when a game ball wins a general winning opening. For example, in the 31st effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is within (1) the symbol change period, if the reserved memory number at that time is 0, the specific effect A (change result notice) If the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed. On the other hand, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside (2) the symbol variation period, if the number of reserved memories at that time is 0, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed, If the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed. According to this, the interest when a game ball wins a general winning opening can be further enhanced.

  As described above, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the state classification for changing the type of the specific effect is either (1) the game state is the normal state or (2) the game state is the probability change state or the short-time state. Or (1) whether the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0. For example, it may be classified as (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change or (2) a period before the reach state is established in the reach change. Also, (1) it is a period in which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) it is a period in which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, It may be a category. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, it may be classified as (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. good. Furthermore, both the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect may be different according to the difference between these categories.

  Whether or not the specific effect C (point granting effect) is executed is switched in accordance with the display setting table of FIG. It is like that. Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is set to display setting (second position), and display setting is performed by player operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen of FIG. 5). It is only possible to execute. As described above, whether or not to execute the specific effect C can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

  In addition, the specific effect C (point granting effect) is not limited to one point that is awarded for one prize to the general prize opening, but 2 points or 3 points are given for one prize to the general prize opening. It may be. The number of points awarded may be different depending on, for example, which general winning opening the game ball has won, and the state of the gaming machine when the game ball has won the general winning opening, for example, The game state may be different depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state.

  In addition, in the specific effect C (point giving effect), points may be awarded according to factors other than the prize winning to the general prize opening. For example, points are awarded according to the winning to the starting prize opening. Alternatively, points may be awarded according to the establishment of the reach state.

[33rd effect form]
FIG. 21 illustrates a specific effect D (gauge update effect) as an effect in which the effect mode changes step by step in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. As shown in FIG. 21, the specific effect D (gauge update effect) is a filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. This effect can be changed step by step from a minimum of 0 to a maximum of 10.

  In the example of FIG. 21A, the filling area 2100a (the black portion in the gauge image) in the gauge image 2100 is in the 0 stage in response to the game ball winning in any of the first general winning openings 50A to 50D. It increases from 1 (the state where the white part occupies 10/10) to 1 level (the state where the black part occupies 1/10 and the white part occupies 9/10) (gauge + 1). In the example of FIG. 21B, the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 is changed from the 0th stage to the 3rd stage (black part) in response to the game ball winning in any of the first general winning ports 50A to 50D. Occupies 3/10 and the white part occupies 7/10) (gauge +3).

  In this way, the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 increases in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and reaches 10 levels (the black part in the gauge image occupies 10/10). In the case where the player is in a state of being), a privilege is given to the player. For example, similarly to the specific effect C described above, a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server or the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 5, and the player can select a desired image or music as the image providing server or the music. It can be downloaded from the providing server to the information terminal.

  Not limited to this, when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 levels, a special character may be displayed on the image display device 5, and a special song is output as the BGM during the game. It may be made possible. Alternatively, a variable result notice effect may be executed in which the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game being executed at the timing when the priority area 2100a reaches 10 stages may be a big hit symbol. A pre-reading notice effect may be executed in which the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game held at the timing when the area 2100a reaches 10 stages may be a big hit symbol.

  That is, the privilege provided when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 levels may be an effect not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game. It may be an effect related to a variable display result in a game or a variable display result in a usual game. In addition, it may be an effect related to the gaming state or an effect not related to the gaming state. Further, a different effect may be executed every time the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 levels. Further, different effects may be executed according to the gaming state when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches 10 levels.

  When the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 has reached 10 levels, a notification to that effect is given by displaying a message on the image display device 5, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like. The filling area 2100a at is reset to the zero level. After the reset, the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 increases again in accordance with the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.

  In the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form shown in FIG. 22 to FIG. 23, each time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, the identification extracted from the random number circuit 124 It is determined whether or not the stage of the filling region 2100a in the gauge image 2100 (hereinafter referred to as a gauge level) is increased by one stage based on the effect execution determination random number. Is increased by one step. That is, every time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to increase the gauge level by one step. If you win, your gauge level will increase by one level.

  In the 33rd effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 20%, and (2) when it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), a rate of 80%. Increases the gauge level by one step. The effect control CPU 120 receives a change start command for specifying start of change in the special figure game, and a change pattern specification command for specifying a change pattern such as a change time of the special symbol in the special figure game and a decorative pattern in the image display device 5. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed.

  As with the specific effects A to C, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effects D is provided. When the gauge level reaches 10 stages, along with a notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

  In the 33rd effect form, and in the 34th effect form, the 36th effect form, and the 37th effect form, which will be described later, (1) a general winning opening during the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period) The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in (2) is that the game ball won in the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) The gauge level is set lower than the rate of increase. During the period of (1), the player usually has a general prize because an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 5 or the speakers 8L, 8R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, rather than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (1), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, during the period of (2), the player can increase the gauge level by not producing an effect corresponding to the special game of interest that would otherwise be preferential. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period of (1), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the 33rd effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which variable display of a special symbol is being executed (design variation) (Within the period), the gauge level is not increased. (2) The gauge level can be increased when the special symbol variable display is not performed (outside the symbol variation period). Also good. Contrary to the example shown in the 33rd effect form, (1) a gauge based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening during a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period). The rate at which the level increases is higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that (2) the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) You may set so that it becomes.

[34th form]
In the 34th production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%. The timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) and is special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%. The timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) and When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10%.

  The effect control CPU 120 receives a change start command for specifying start of change in the special figure game, and a change pattern specification command for specifying a change pattern such as a change time of the special symbol in the special figure game and a decorative pattern in the image display device 5. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, and until the special symbol variable display is completed (the confirmed special symbol is It is possible to specify the remaining time (until the stop is displayed). For example, when the variation start command and the variation pattern designation command are received, the variation time of the special symbol designated by the variation pattern designation command is set as the value of the variation time timer. The remaining time until the timer value times out can be specified as the remaining time until the special symbol variable display ends (until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed). In addition, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The remaining time until the value of the variable time timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the decorative symbol ends (until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, to notify that and give a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

  In the 34th production form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when it is 10 seconds or longer until the symbol stops is (3) when the symbol level is less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops In addition, the gauge level is set to be higher than the rate at which the game level is won based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. During the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative pattern that is displayed in a stopped state will be, rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (3), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), there is a grace period until the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level, the player is easily interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period of (3), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the 34th production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased. In the case of the period (3), the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the 34th effect form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that a game ball is won at the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops is (3 ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when it is less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops.

  Moreover, in the 34th production form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol being executed when the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2). When the display result of variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%. When the display result is out of symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, while the first general prize is awarded. When the timing at which a game ball is won in any of the mouths 50A to 4D general winning opening 50D is the period (3), and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed is a jackpot symbol May increase the gauge level at a rate of 30%, and increase the gauge level at a rate of 10% if the display result is out of pattern.

[35th form]
As described above, the specific effect B is exemplified as the pre-reading notice effect for notifying the variable display result in the reserved special game. In the specific effect B shown in FIG. 9B, does the start prize determination result designation command for designating “big hit” be included in the start prize determination result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area? Based on whether or not, it is determined whether the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect is the first mode (sound effect only) or the second mode (sound effect and accessory effect). That is, in the pre-reading notice effect such as the specific effect B, the variable display (hereinafter referred to as “target fluctuation”) that is the target of the pre-reading notice is not notified to the player, and the player changes the target fluctuation. It has become difficult to grasp.

  As the pre-reading notice effect, it is also possible to adopt an effect that notifies the target fluctuation. For example, as described above, in the start winning storage display area 5H, a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Is provided. When the start control winning determination result designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display portion corresponding to the command if it is a command that designates “big hit”, and the display corresponding to the command that designates “off”. It is possible to execute a hold change effect displayed in a special mode (for example, gold) different from the part. The target variation in this case is a variable display corresponding to the display portion displayed in a special manner, and the player can grasp the remaining variable display count executed until the target variation.

  For example, if a command for designating “big hit” is received when a start winning determination result designation command is received, a display portion corresponding to the command is displayed in a special manner at a rate of 70%, and at a rate of 30%. The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in the normal mode. On the other hand, if a command specifying “out of” is received when the start winning determination result specifying command is received, the display portion corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 95%. The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in the normal mode. As described above, when the display part corresponding to the reserved memory generated by the start winning is displayed in the special mode at the time of the start winning, the display part in the special mode is displayed every time the variable display game is executed (the start condition is satisfied). Each time), and when the start condition of the variable display game (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is satisfied, The display part disappears from the start winning storage display area 5H. In such an aspect, the hold change effect is executed during the period from the start winning to the start of the variable display game corresponding to the start winning.

  That is, when the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied according to the order in which the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied, the hold change effect is executed, so that the display portion (the target of the hold change effect is displayed) in a special mode. Depending on the number of display parts in the normal mode (display information corresponding to variable display hold storage that is not the target of hold change effect) to the left of the display information corresponding to variable display hold storage) It becomes possible to grasp the number of remaining variable display games until the variable display that is the target of the hold change effect is executed.

  In addition, the timing which displays a display site | part in a special aspect is not restricted at the time of a start winning prize. For example, the display part may be displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning prize, and after changing the predetermined effect, the normal mode may be changed to the special mode. The timing at which the start condition is satisfied (display mode of each display part) May be changed from the normal mode to the special mode at the timing of shifting to the left). In these aspects, from the timing at which the display portion corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice changes from the normal state to the special form, the start condition of the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice is satisfied. During the period, the pending change effect is being executed.

  In the thirty-fifth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is as follows: If it is a non-period (when there is no display part of a special mode in the on-hold change effect and it is not an execution period of target variation), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%.

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more. If there is a special game in which the start condition is established before the special game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the ratio is 40%. Increases the gauge level by one step.

  Further, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display count until the target change is 1. If there is one special figure game in which the start condition is established before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the gauge is measured at a rate of 20%. Level increases by one level.

  In addition, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the pre-reading notice effect (in the hold change effect) The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10% when the variable display based on the fact that the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is established.

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, to notify that and give a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

  In the 35th production mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more is (3) until the target change The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball is won at the general winning opening when the remaining variable display count of 1 is 1, (4) When the remaining variable display count until the target change is 0 (execution of target change) During the period), the gauge level is set higher than the rate at which the game ball is won at the general winning opening. In the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the target variation that is currently being executed than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. For this reason, even if the gauge level is increased during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the 35th production mode, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), increasing the gauge level. In the case of (3) and (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the 35th effect form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases when the remaining variable display count until target change is 2 or more is (3) remaining variable until target change. The ratio may be set so that the gauge level increases when the number of display times is 1, and (4) the gauge level increases when the target variation is executed.

  Moreover, in the 35th production form, the timing at which the game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is in any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4) In this case, the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation or not. For example, when the timing at which the game ball is won in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the variable display result in the target variation. In the case of a big win symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%. When the variable display result is out of symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%. When the timing at which the game ball is won in any of the winning openings 50D is the period of (3), when the variable display result in the target variation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 30%, When the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 20%, and one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. When the timing at which the game ball wins is in the period (4), if the variable display result in the target variation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 15%, and the variable display result does not match the symbol. In this case, the gauge level may be increased at a rate of 10%.

[36th effect form]
In the thirty-sixth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%. In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is a period in which (2) variable display (non-reach fluctuation) without a reach effect is being executed. In some cases, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%.

  In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) a period during which variable display (reach fluctuation) with reach effect is executed, and If it is a period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%, and (4) a variable display (reach fluctuation) with a reach effect is being executed and the reach state In the period after establishment, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%.

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, to notify that and give a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

  In the thirty-sixth production mode, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening before the reach state in reach change is established is (4) The gauge level is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the winning opening. During the period of (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that are not stopped after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, since the reach state is not established in the period (3), the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period of (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the thirty-sixth production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (3), increasing the gauge level. In the case of the period (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the thirty-sixth effect form, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the reach fluctuation period and before the reach state is established is (4 ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the reach variation is being executed and after the reach state is established.

[37th effect form]
In the 37th effect form shown in FIG. 23, the ratio of increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings is won. When the timing at which a game ball wins one of the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C is (1) the period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which a special symbol variable display is being executed (within a symbol variation period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 20%.

  In addition, the timing when the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) a period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%.

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, to notify that and give a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

  In the 37th effect form, the rate of increase of the gauge level is different between (1) the symbol variation period and (2) outside the symbol variation period, and further, the second general prize opening 50B or the third general prize opening The rate at which the gauge level increases differs between the case where a game ball is won in 50C and the case where a game ball is won in the first general winning port 50A or the fourth general winning port 50D. The rate at which the gauge level increases depending on the general winning opening where the game ball has won, so that the player will be interested in which general winning opening the game ball has won and improve the interest. be able to.

  For example, the first general prize provided closer to the end of the game area 10 than the winning of the game ball to the second general prize opening 50B and the third general prize opening 50C provided near the center of the game area 10. When it is difficult to win a game ball in the mouth 50A and the fourth general prize opening 50D, the gauge level is set when the game ball wins the first general prize opening 50A and the fourth general prize opening 50D. General winning mouths that are more difficult to win by making the rate of increase higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases when game balls win the second general winning port 50B and the third general winning port 50C. It is better to increase the interest in winning a prize.

  In the 37th production mode, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, it is possible to increase the gauge level, and in the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening. When a game ball wins, the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the 37th performance mode, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is the second general winning opening 50B. Or you may set so that it may become lower than the ratio which a gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the 3rd general winning opening 50C.

[38th production form]
In the thirty-eighth effect form to the forty-second effect form shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution extracted from the random number circuit 124. Moreover, in the 38th production form-the 42nd production form, the gauge level which increases according to one prize-winning to a general winning opening is not restricted to one step. For example, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), the gauge level may be increased by three stages in response to a single winning at the general winning opening.

  In the thirty-eighth production form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is as follows: ), The gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1), and (2) when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period), the gauge level is three steps. Increase (gauge + 3).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least four winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

  In the 38th effect form, and the 39th effect form, the 41st effect form, and the 42nd effect form, which will be described later, (1) a general winning opening during a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol change period) The number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in (2) is that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) Is set to be less than the number of gauge level steps that increase based on During the period of (1), the player usually has a general prize because an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 5 or the speakers 8L, 8R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, rather than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. For this reason, even if the gauge level is increased in the period (1), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player corresponding to the special game that is the subject of interest is not executed in the original period, so that the player is increased by increasing the gauge level. Are in a situation where they are interested in this. For this reason, the interest level of the specific performance is appropriately increased by increasing the gauge level more than the period (1).

  In the thirty-eighth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which variable display of a special symbol is being executed (design variation) (Within a period), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate at which only one step is changed is 80%), and (2) a period during which variable symbol special display is not executed ( If it is outside the symbol variation period), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more steps may be, for example, 80% (the rate at which only one step is changed is 20%). Contrary to the example shown in the 38th effect form, (1) a gauge based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in a general winning opening during a period during which a variable display of a special symbol is executed (within a symbol variation period). The number of stages in which the level increases is (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) May be set to be larger.

  In addition, as a privilege granted when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a privilege with a different value may be given. For example, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a two-dimensional code capable of downloading only an image may be displayed, and a two-dimensional code capable of downloading an image and music may be displayed. At this time, the privilege value given to the latter is greater than the former. Depending on the number of stages at which the gauge level increases, the value of the privilege value given when the gauge level reaches 10 stages may be suggested. For example, when the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which a special symbol variable display is executed (within a symbol variation period). In addition, when the privilege value is small, the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels is set to, for example, 20% (the rate at which only one level is changed is 80%). When the rate of increase is, for example, 40% (the rate of changing only one step is 60%), and (2) when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the privilege value is small For example, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more levels is 50% (the rate of changing only one level is 50%). If the privilege value is large, the gauge level is increased by two or more levels. Ratio, for example 80% to (ratio to one step change of 20%) may be.

[39th form]
In the 39th production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by three levels (gauge + 3). The timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) and is special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by two levels (gauge + 2). The timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) and When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least four winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted.

  In the 39th production mode, (2) the number of stages of gauge level that increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when it is 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops is (3) less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops It is set to be higher than the number of gauge levels that increase based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening. During the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative pattern that is displayed in a stopped state will be, rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (3), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. For this reason, the interest level of the specific performance is appropriately increased by increasing the gauge level more than the period (3).

  In the 39th production mode, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by two or more stages. For example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the period (3), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step) May be 80%). Contrary to the example shown in the 39th production mode, (2) the number of stages at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that a game ball is won at the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops ( 3) It may be set to be less than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when it is less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops.

  Moreover, in the 39th effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at different stages depending on whether the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol being executed when the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2). When the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by three steps, and when the display result is an out-of-order symbol, the gauge level is increased by two steps, while the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general When the timing at which a game ball is won in any of the winning openings 50D is the period (3), if the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is a jackpot symbol, the gauge level is set in two levels. The gauge level may be increased by one step when the display result is a deviated symbol.

[40th effect form]
In the 40th effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is as follows: (1) The pre-reading notice effect is not executed and the target change is also executed. If it is a non-period (when there is no display part of a special mode in the on-hold change effect and it is not an execution period of target variation), the gauge level is increased by four stages (gauge + 4).

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more. If there are two or more special-figure games in which the start condition is established before the special-figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the gauge level is 3 Increase in steps (gauge + 3).

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change becomes 1. If there is one special figure game where the start condition is established before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the gauge level is increased by two stages. (Gauge +2).

  In addition, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the pre-reading notice effect (in the hold change effect) The gauge level is increased by one level (gauge + 1) when the variable display based on the fact that the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is established).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history (including at least three winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is erased.

  In the 40th production mode, (2) the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening when the number of remaining variable display until target change is 2 or more is (3) target change When the remaining variable display count up to 1 is 1, the number of gauge levels increases based on the winning of a game ball in the general prize opening, (4) When the remaining variable display count until target change is 0 (target change The number of gauge levels is set to be increased based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize at a general winning opening during the execution period of (1). In the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the target variation that is currently being executed than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. For this reason, even if the gauge level is increased in the period of (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the 40th production mode, the gauge level is increased by two or more stages when the timing at which the game ball is won in any one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2). For example, the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two or more stages is set to 20% (only one stage) in the period of (3) and (4). The rate of change may be 80%). Contrary to the example shown in the 40th effect form, (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the remaining until the target change. It may be set so that the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the number of times of variable display is 1, and (4) less than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases during the target variation execution period.

  In the 40th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is in any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4)). In this case, the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation or not. For example, when the timing at which the game ball is won in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the variable display result in the target variation. In the case of a big win symbol, the gauge level is increased by 4 steps, and in the case where the variable display result is out of the design, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, and any one of the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D. When the timing when the game ball is won is in the period of (3), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by three stages, and the variable display result becomes a symbol out of place The gauge level is increased by two stages, and the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is In the case of the period of 4), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by two steps, and if the variable display result becomes a disjoint symbol, the gauge level is increased by one step. Anyway.

[41st effect form]
In the 41st effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level is increased by 4 levels (gauge + 4). In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is a period in which (2) variable display (non-reach fluctuation) without a reach effect is being executed. In this case, the gauge level is increased by three levels (gauge + 3).

  In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is (3) a period during which variable display (reach fluctuation) with reach effect is executed, and If it is a period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by two steps (gauge +3), and (4) a variable display (reach fluctuation) with reach effect is being executed and the reach state is established. In the subsequent period, the gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history (including at least three winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is erased.

  In the forty-first production mode, (3) the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening before the reach state is established in reach change is (4) after the reach state is established in reach change. The number is set more than the number of stages of gauge levels that increase based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening. During the period of (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that are not stopped after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is greatly increased during the period (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, since the reach state is not established in the period (3), the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. For this reason, the interest level of the specific performance is appropriately increased by increasing the gauge level more than in the period (4).

  In the 41st production form, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D is the period (3), the gauge level is increased by two or more stages. For example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the period (4), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step) May be 80%). Contrary to the example shown in the 41st effect form, (3) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the reach fluctuation is being executed and before the reach state is established, 4) It may be set to be smaller than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the reach fluctuation is being executed and after the reach state is established.

[42nd effect form]
In the forty-second effect form shown in FIG. 25, the number of stages for increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning awards is won. When the timing at which a game ball wins one of the second general winning opening 50B and the third general winning opening 50C is (1) the period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) The gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1). On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D is (1) a period during which a special symbol variable display is being executed (within a symbol variation period). The gauge level is increased by two levels (gauge +2).

  In addition, the timing when the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). , The gauge level increases by 3 levels (gauge + 3). On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D is (2) a period in which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). The gauge level is increased by 4 levels (gauge + 4).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history (including at least three winning histories to the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is erased.

  In the 42nd production form, the number of steps of increasing gauge level is different between (1) the symbol change period and (2) outside the symbol change period, and further, the second general prize opening 50B or the third general prize is given. The number of steps of increasing gauge level is different between the case where a game ball wins the mouth 50C and the case where a game ball wins the first general winning port 50A or the fourth general winning port 50D. By increasing the number of gauge levels to be increased according to the number of general winning holes that the game balls have won, the player will be interested in which general winning holes the game balls have won, and improve the interest. Can be made.

  For example, the first general prize provided closer to the end of the game area 10 than the winning of the game ball to the second general prize opening 50B and the third general prize opening 50C provided near the center of the game area 10. When it is difficult to win a game ball in the mouth 50A and the fourth general prize opening 50D, the gauge level is set when the game ball wins the first general prize opening 50A and the fourth general prize opening 50D. By increasing the number of stages to be increased more than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when a game ball is won in the second general prize opening 50B and the third general prize opening 50C, It is better to increase the interest in winning a prize.

  In the forty-second production mode, when a game ball is won at the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two or more stages is, for example, 80% (the ratio of changing only one stage is 20). %), And when a game ball wins the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is set to 20% (the rate of changing only one step is 80%), for example. Also good. Contrary to the example shown in the 42nd production mode, the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D is the second general winning opening. You may set so that it may become less than the number of steps which a gauge level increases when a game ball wins 50B or the 3rd general winning opening 50C.

[Modification of the 33rd effect form to the 42nd effect form]
In the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form, the reference division for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level, the number of steps of the gauge level to be increased in the 38th effect form to the 42nd effect form is determined. The classification used as a reference for this is not limited to the above example. For example, the category for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level, and the category for determining the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased include (1) whether the gaming state is a normal state or (2) the gaming state is It may be a category of whether the state is a certain change state or a short time state. Further, it may be classified as (1) the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, even if the classification is (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. good.

  Note that the gauge image 2100 is displayed even when the filling area 2100a is at the minimum 0 stage, but a condition for displaying the gauge image 2100 may be provided. For example, the gauge image 2100 is displayed when the gaming state is the normal state, and an effect of increasing the gauge level can be executed, but the gauge image 2100 is not displayed when the gaming state is the probability change state or the short time state (gauge An effect of increasing the level may not be executed).

  The effect of increasing the display of the gauge image 2100 and the gauge level is executed in a period in which the predetermined effect is being executed, and may not be executed in a period in which the predetermined effect is not being executed. For example, the gauge image 1000 is displayed when a game ball is won in the general winning opening only during a period (a predetermined stage stage period) in which the background image of the decorative design displayed on the image display device 5 is a predetermined background image. Or the gauge level may be increased. In addition, the game ball is won at the general winning opening only during a period in which the display portion in the start winning memory display area 5H is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, white indicating that there is a possibility of changing to a special mode). In such a case, the gauge image 1000 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased.

  Further, the production control CPU 120 performs simultaneous production (simultaneously executed when a predetermined time is reached in a game machine of the same model at a timing when an unillustrated RTC (real time clock) provided on the production control board 12 has reached a predetermined time. In the case of performing (drafting), the gauge image 1000 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased when a game ball wins a general winning opening during the execution period of the simultaneous rendering.

  Further, when the gauge level is increased, a predetermined effect sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, different production sounds may be output depending on the number of steps of the gauge level to be increased. For example, when the gauge level is increased by three steps, the gauge level is increased by one step. The volume of the production sound may be increased.

  In addition, it is preferable to output an effect sound that increases the gauge level at a volume different from the effect sound related to the special game or the effect sound related to the ordinary game. For example, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be larger than the volume of the effect sound related to the usual game, but lower than the volume of the effect sound related to the special game. Further, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level is larger than the volume of the effect sound related to the special game, but may be smaller than the volume of the error sound that notifies the gaming machine error.

  Further, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be different depending on the state. For example, the sound volume in the normal state may be larger than the sound volume in the probability change state or the short time state.

  In addition, the specific effect in which the effect mode changes step by step in accordance with the winning of the general prize opening is not limited to the specific effect D that changes the gauge level, and the displayed character mode is step by step. It may be one that changes (for example, the size of the displayed character increases or the item that the character owns changes), and the number of characters that the player can select increases step by step. Also good. Further, the mode and position of the movable accessory may be changed step by step, and the emission color of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed stepwise. Moreover, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R may change stepwise.

  Whether or not the specific effect D (gauge update effect) is executed is switched according to the display setting table of FIG. 4 in the same manner as the other specific effects A to C executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It is like that. Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is set to display setting (second position), and display setting is performed by player operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen of FIG. 5). It is only possible to execute. As described above, whether or not to execute the specific effect D can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

[43rd effect form]
The specific effects A to D described above are effects that are executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, but the specific effect is executed when the game ball does not win the general winning opening. Anyway. For example, if the game ball is not won in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D in the game period of 10 minutes, as shown in FIG. The specific effect E for displaying on the image display device 5 the image imitating the form of the general winning opening and the notification image 2200 including the characters “There is no general winning” can be executed.

  As described above, the specific effect is not limited to an effect that is executed based on a game ball having won a general winning opening, but an effect that is executed based on a game ball that has not won a general winning opening (general winning game) It may be a presentation that suggests difficulty in winning a prize in the mouth. That is, the specific effect may be an effect related to a game event such as a game ball winning in a general winning opening (an effect executed when a game event occurs or no game event occurs).

  In the 43rd effect form shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 stores a non-winning determination timer for determining a period in which a game ball has not won the general winning opening. When the value of the non-winning determination timer is 0 (assuming that the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning port designation command and a general winning port from the gaming control microcomputer 100. When any of the designated command and the big prize winning command is received, 10 minutes is set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started. If the general prize opening designation command is received before the non-winning determination timer times out (before 10 minutes from the timer set), the non-winning determination timer value is set to 10 minutes again, Start the timer.

  On the other hand, when the non-winning determination timer times out due to not receiving the general winning opening designation command before the non-winning determination timer times out, a notification image 2200 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The specific effect E to be displayed is executed. When the specific effect E is executed, 10 minutes is again set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E (display of the notification image 2200) is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the non-winning determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time from the timing when the game ball has won the general winning opening.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbols, and performs the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening designation command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If it is not received, a game end determination is made to determine that the game has ended, and the update of the non-winning determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped, the process (specifically, the execution of the specific effect E) due to the non-winning determination timer timing out is limited. Thereby, the specific effect E is not executed in a period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 120 performs processing due to the non-winning determination timer timing out (specifically, in response to detection of a time-out when the timer value becomes 0). (Execution of the specific effect E) becomes possible. In the state where the update of the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped, the production control CPU 120 receives any of the start winning port specifying command, the general winning port specifying command, and the big winning port winning command. The renewal of the non-winning determination timer is resumed.

  In other words, the non-winning determination timer is updated during a period in which the player is playing a game (the game is not determined to be finished). A time-out occurs when the number of winnings in the winning opening becomes 0 (the time-out control CPU 120 detects the time-out). As a result, when the player is playing a game, the specific effect E is executed if no winning in the general winning opening occurs for 10 minutes.

  In the above-described production form, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not a game ball is being fired toward the game area 10. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the entrance of the game ball in the game area 10, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects a game ball. Anyway. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game, depending on whether or not the hitting operation handle 63 is operated (whether or not the launching motor provided in the hitting ball launching device is operating). good.

  In this way, when the player is playing a game and no winning in the general winning opening occurs in a predetermined period (10-minute gaming period), the specific effect E is executed, Informs that no winning in the general winning opening has occurred. By this notification, the player can grasp that the winning to the general winning opening has not occurred, and can use it as a reference (for example, judgment material for selecting a base) when playing the game. Further, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 1 on which the specific effect E is executed (or the execution frequency of the specific effect E is high), the game nail is made so that the frequency of winning the general prize opening becomes higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance.

  In addition, when a game is being played by the player but no winning in the general winning opening has occurred, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is not performed because the player has not played the game. When no winning at the winning opening has occurred, the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped (the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the processing based on the timeout of the non-winning determination timer) to specify Execution of production E is restricted.

  It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that no prize has occurred in the general prize opening due to the fact that no game is being played by the player. The specific effect E may be executed at a lower rate than the case where it is determined that no winning in the general winning opening has occurred even though the game is being played by the player.

[44th form]
The specific effect E is not limited to notifying that a general winning opening has not been won within a predetermined period (the number of winnings in the general winning opening is less than 1), You may make it alert | report that it can specify that the number of winnings to a winning opening is less than predetermined number. In the 44th effect form, the effect control CPU 120 stores a winning number determination timer for counting the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening in a predetermined period. When the value of the winning number determination timer is 0 (assuming that the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning port designation command and a general winning port from the gaming control microcomputer 100. When either the designated command or the big prize winning command is received, 30 minutes is set as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started. At this time, the value of the winning number counter area formed in the RAM 122 is set to zero. Then, 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter area every time a general winning opening designation command is received during the period until the winning number determination timer times out (30 minutes from the timer set).

  Then, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is less than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the specified effect E is within a predetermined period. That the number of winnings is less than a predetermined number and / or the number of winnings within a predetermined period is notified. For example, a message “The number of general winnings for 30 minutes is less than 3” and / or a message “There is only one general winning number for 30 minutes” is displayed on the image display device 5.

  When the specific effect E is executed, 30 minutes is again set as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the winning number determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time after the specific effect E is started. On the other hand, if the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the specified number E of the winning number determination timer is not executed without executing the specific effect E. Set the value again to 30 minutes and start the timer again.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbols, and performs the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening designation command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If it is not received, a game end determination is made to determine that the game has ended, and the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped, processing (specifically, execution of the specific effect E) due to timeout of the winning number determination timer is limited. Thereby, the specific effect E is not executed in a period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the update of the winning number determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 120 responds to detection of a time-out when the winning number determination timer times out (specifically, the timer value becomes zero). (Execution of the specific effect E) becomes possible. Then, when the update of the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped, the production control CPU 120 receives any of the start winning mouth designation command, the general winning mouth designation command, and the big winning mouth prize command. Then, the update of the winning number determination timer is restarted.

  In other words, the winning number determination timer is updated during a period in which the player is playing a game (no game end determination is made), and 30 minutes have elapsed within the period in which the player is playing a game. The time-out occurs (the time-out control CPU 120 detects the time-out). At the time of the time-out, the specific effect E is executed only when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the game period of 30 minutes is less than the predetermined number.

  In the above-described production form, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not a game ball is being fired toward the game area 10. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the entrance of the game ball in the game area 10, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects a game ball. Anyway. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game, depending on whether or not the hitting operation handle 63 is operated (whether or not the launching motor provided in the hitting ball launching device is operating). good.

  Thus, even if the player is playing a game, the specific effect E is executed when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period (30 minute game period) is less than the predetermined number. Thus, it is notified that the number of winnings in the general winning opening during the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. By this notification, the player can grasp that the frequency of winning in the general winning opening is low, and can use it as a reference (for example, judgment material for selecting a base) when playing the game. Further, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 1 on which the specific effect E is executed (or the execution frequency of the specific effect E is high), the game nail is made so that the frequency of winning the general prize opening becomes higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance.

  In addition, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is being played by the player, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is performed by the player. If the number of prizes received in the general prize opening during the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped (the effect control CPU 120 executes processing based on the timeout of the winning number determination timer) By doing so, the execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

  It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number because the player is not playing a game. In this case, the specific effect is produced at a lower rate than the case where it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is being performed by the player. E may be executed.

[45th effect form]
In the 43rd effect form and the 44th effect form, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening within a predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time Regardless, the specific effect E is executed. However, the execution ratio of the specific effect E may be varied according to the state when this determination is made. In the forty-fifth production mode, the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) determined that the number of wins to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number However, (1) the specific effect E is executed in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect E is not executed in the probability variation state or the short time state.

  Note that the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer has timed out, the timing when the winning number determination timer has timed out) determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number is (1 ) In the normal state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 80%, and (2) In the case of the probability changing state or the short-time state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 20%. May be. As described above, it is preferable to execute the specific effects E at different ratios according to the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[46th effect form]
In the 43rd effect form and the 44th effect form, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening within a predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time Regardless, the specific effect E is executed in the common mode. However, the specific effect E may be varied depending on the state when this determination is made. In the 46th performance mode, the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer timed out, the timing when the winning number determination timer timed out) determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number However, (1) When it is in the normal state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode (image display + audio output). The program is executed in two modes (image display only).

  Specifically, the first aspect of the specific effect E is informed to the image display device 5 together with the notification by the image display that displays that the number of winning in the general winning award in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. This is a mode in which notification is performed by sound output for outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the second mode of the specific effect E is a mode in which only notification by image display is performed and notification by sound output is not performed.

  Note that the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer has timed out, the timing when the winning number determination timer has timed out) determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number is (1 ) In the normal state, for example, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode at a rate of 80% (executed in the second mode at a rate of 20%). The specific effect E may be executed in the first mode at a rate of 20%, for example (executed in the second mode at a rate of 80%). As described above, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E in a different mode according to the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winning in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[Modification of the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form]
The specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form is the display setting table shown in FIG. The execution can be switched according to the above. Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is set to display setting (second position), and display setting is performed by player operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen of FIG. 5). It is only possible to execute. As described above, whether or not the specific effect E is executed can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

  For example, when it is not desired to execute the specific effect E on the game hall side, the specific effect E is not executed regardless of the player setting by switching the display changeover switch 32 to the non-display setting (first position). . By having such a configuration, whether or not to execute the specific performance E, that is, whether or not to notify the difficulty of winning a prize in the general prize opening is reflected with priority given to the intention of the game hall side. Can be made.

  In addition, the value of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect form, the value of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect form, and the value of the winning number counter area are all stored in the RAM 122. If it is not backed up at the time of disconnection and the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, it is erased accordingly. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed, the initial state of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect form and the initial state of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect form are both invalid. The timer value is not referred to until the predetermined time is set by the effect control CPU 120. Further, the initial value of the winning number counter area in the 44th effect form becomes 0 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed.

  In this way, with the stop of power supply to the game control board 12, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is erased without being backed up, and when power supply is resumed, addition starts from 0 again. become. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a control burden that requires providing backup means at the time of power interruption.

  As in the 45th effect form and the 46th effect form, the execution ratio of the specific effect E or the category for differentiating the effect mode of the specific effect E is either (1) whether the gaming state is a normal state or (2 ) It is not limited to whether the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a short-time state. For example, it may be classified as (1) the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change or (2) a period before the reach state is established in the reach change. Also, (1) it is a period in which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) it is a period in which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, It may be a category. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, it may be classified as (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. good. Furthermore, according to the difference of these divisions, both the execution ratio of the specific effect E and the aspect of the specific effect E may be different.

  It should be noted that the specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form is executed when the number of wins to the general winning opening in the predetermined game period is less than the predetermined number. Not only in such a form, but among the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize opening 50D, only a specific general prize opening is targeted, and the predetermined number of prizes to the specific general prize opening in a predetermined period is a predetermined number. The specific effect E may be executed when the number is smaller. For example, the general prize opening for a predetermined game period is targeted only for the second general prize opening 50B and the third general prize opening 50C, which have higher game ball winning frequencies than the first general prize opening 50A and the fourth general prize opening 50D. The specific effect E may be executed when the number of winnings is counted and the counted number of winnings is smaller than a predetermined number.

  Further, in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form, the specific effect E is executed when the number of wins to the general winning opening within a certain time (10 minutes or 30 minutes) is less than the predetermined number. However, the period for determining the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not limited to this. The period may be defined by the number of executions of the special figure game. For example, the variable display related to the special figure game may be executed 100 times. Further, the period may be a period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the present time, or may be a period defined by a plurality of business days (for example, one week or one month). In addition, the period may be a period controlled to a predetermined gaming state, for example, a period controlled to a normal state (a period in which a game is performed by left-handed), a probability change state or a time reduction It may be a period controlled by the state (a period in which a game is played with a right hand).

  Furthermore, the following method may be used as a method for determining whether or not the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening during a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

(A) You may make it determine whether the number of winning in a general winning opening with respect to the predetermined number of balls thrown into the game area 10 is less than a predetermined number. During driving of the launch motor provided in the hitting ball launching device, approximately 100 game balls are launched into the game area 10 in one minute. Therefore, for example, the specific effect E may be executed when the number of winnings in the general winning opening with respect to 1000 shot balls (corresponding to a game period of 10 minutes) is less than a predetermined number. . Further, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 10 is calculated, and the specific effect E is executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. May be.

  In addition, the ratio of the number of winning prizes to the general winning opening with respect to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 10 is different depending on whether it is lower than a predetermined ratio or not less than a predetermined ratio. A specific effect may be executed. For example, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of balls shot into the game area 10 is low, the character A appears and the winning frequency to the general winning opening is low. When the level is informed and the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of balls shot into the game area 10 is a medium ratio higher than the low ratio, the character B appears. Then, it is notified that the winning frequency at the general winning opening is at a medium level, and the ratio of the winning number at the general winning opening with respect to the number of shots shot into the game area 10 is higher than the medium ratio. In the case of the ratio, it may be notified that the character C appears and the winning frequency to the general winning opening is high.

(B) You may make it determine whether the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to a general winning opening in a predetermined period is smaller than a predetermined number. For example, when 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball is won at the general prize opening, the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning at the general prize opening in the game period of 30 minutes The specific effect E may be executed when the number is less than 30 (3 wins). Also, whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in response to winning in the general winning opening for a predetermined number of balls (for example, 1000 shots) fired in the game area 10 is less than the predetermined number The ratio of the number of prize balls that are paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening with respect to the number of shots shot into the game area 10 is calculated, and the ratio is predetermined. The specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than. In addition, when the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening with respect to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 10 is lower than a predetermined ratio, or more than a predetermined ratio It may be made to perform the specific effect of a different aspect with the case where it is.

  As described above, it may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening is smaller than a predetermined number. It should be noted that such a form can be applied even in a case where a different number of prize balls are paid out depending on a general winning opening where game balls have been won.

(C) It may be determined whether or not the number of winning in the general winning opening is smaller than a predetermined number (for example, 5) with respect to a predetermined number of winning (for example, 100) in the starting winning opening. It is also possible to calculate the ratio of the number of winnings in the general winning opening with respect to the number of winnings in the starting winning opening, and to execute the specific effect E when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general prize opening with respect to a predetermined number of winning balls (eg, 10,000) paid out in accordance with the winning in the start winning opening is more than the predetermined number. It is also possible to determine whether or not the number is less, and the number of prize balls that are paid out in response to the winning prize in the starting prize opening is the prize ball that is paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the general prize opening. The ratio of numbers may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the general prize opening to the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the starting prize slot is lower than a predetermined percentage. And the specific effect of a different aspect may be performed when it is more than a predetermined ratio.

  In addition, for example, the total number of winning balls for a predetermined period when the gaming state is in the normal state (in accordance with the number of winning balls paid out in accordance with the winning at the starting winning opening and the winning at the general winning opening) The total number of award balls paid out) is calculated as a percentage of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the general winning opening, and the percentage is lower than the predetermined percentage. The specific effect E may be executed. Moreover, you may make it perform the specific production of a different aspect according to the ratio.

(D) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings in the general winning opening for a predetermined consumption amount (for example, 1000 yen) in the gaming machine is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2 times). The ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the amount of money consumed in the gaming machine may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In such a form, a different predetermined number (for example, twice for 4 yen, 8 for 1 yen, etc.) depending on the rental unit price (for example, 4 yen, 1 yen, etc.) of the game media used in the gaming machine. Etc.) or different predetermined ratios (for example, 2 times / 1000 yen for 4 yen, 8 times / 1000 yen for 1 yen, etc.) are applied. In addition, specific effects in different modes are executed depending on whether the percentage of the number of winnings in the general prize opening with respect to the amount of money consumed in the gaming machine is lower than a predetermined ratio or more than a predetermined ratio You may make it do.

[47th effect form]
In the 47th effect form shown in FIG. 30, a character is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening, and the first start winning opening is displayed within the period during which the character is displayed. Effective start winning of the game ball (that is, winning of the game ball to the first start winning port when the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first start winning port is less than the upper limit value) and the game to the second start winning port Based on the occurrence of one of the effective start winnings of the ball (that is, winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning port is less than the upper limit value) In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold change effect is executed in which the display portion corresponding to the variable display game held including the variable display game based on the generated effective start win is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. .

  The production control CPU 120 holds the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize based on the occurrence of the effective start prize from the beginning in a special mode without going through the normal mode. You may make it perform change production. For example, when a new effective start winning occurs, the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the new effective start winning in accordance with the action that the displayed character swings up the wand etc. May be displayed not in the normal mode but in a special mode (from the beginning of the display of the hold information, a state in which the hold information in the special mode corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is finally established exists).

  Here, in the 47th effect form, and in the 48th effect form and the 49th effect form, which will be described later, each time the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening, the random number circuit 124 is used. The random number for character determination is extracted from. Then, based on the extracted character determination random number, whether or not to make the character appear and whether to make any of the characters A to C appear in the character determination table of FIG. Determine at the indicated rate.

  Note that the character determination random number may be extracted by the effect control CPU 120 only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, by extracting a random number for character determination on the condition that it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state, it is possible to limit the character from appearing during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state. . In addition, it is possible to prevent characters from appearing after the reach state is established by not extracting the random numbers for character determination after the reach state is established within the period during which the variable display game is being executed.

  In the example of FIG. 28, the production control CPU 120 determines to cause the character A to appear at a rate of 10% when receiving a general winning opening designation command for designating a winning to the first general winning opening 50A. It is determined that the character B appears at a rate of 30%, and the character C is determined to appear at a rate of 60%. Also, when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the second general prize opening 50B, it is determined that no character appears at a rate of 50%, and character A appears at a rate of 35%. It is determined that the character B appears at a rate of 10%, and the character C is determined to appear at a rate of 5%.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines that no character will appear at a rate of 90% when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the third general prize opening 50C. The character C is determined to appear at a ratio. In addition, when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the fourth general prize opening 50D, it is determined that no character appears at a rate of 75%, and a character C appears at a rate of 25%. Decide to let

  In other words, in this example, when a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B provided in the left gaming area 10A, the third gaming area provided in the right gaming area 10B. Characters appear at a higher rate than when the game ball wins at either the general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D. Since the player fires a game ball in the left game area 10A when the game state is in the normal state, and the game ball is fired in the right game area 10B when the game state is in the probabilistic state or in the short time state, the player changes the probability in the normal state. Characters appear at a higher rate than the state or the short time state.

  Then, in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form, the specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect)) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (effective start winning, reach state) during the period in which the character is displayed. , The specific effect G (the change result notice effect by dialogue) is executed, and in these effect forms, when the game state is the normal state, the game state is higher than when the game state is the probability change state or the short time state. Specific effects can be executed at a rate.

  In this way, in the normal state, it is disadvantageous compared to the probability variation state and the short time state, and the player's game, for example, the state of low interest in variable display of the special figure game is low. By making the execution frequency high, the interest is improved. On the other hand, the probability variation state and the short time state are advantageous compared to the normal state, and the player's game, for example, the state of high interest in variable display of special figure games is high. However, if it is still high, it may be detrimental. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect are set low.

  In addition to the example shown in FIG. 28, even when a game ball wins the same general winning opening, the rate of appearance of the characters may differ depending on the game state, for example, the normal state When a game ball is won at the second general winning opening 50B, a character appears at a rate of 50%. However, when a game ball is won at the second general winning opening 50B in the probability variation state and the short time state, 10%. Characters may appear at a rate of.

  Further, the character can appear only in the normal state, and the character may not appear in the probability variation state and the short time state. Thus, in order to “make the execution rate of the effect in one state different from the execution rate of the effect in the other state”, the effect can be executed only in one state and the effect is not executed in the other state. Is included. In contrast to the example shown in FIG. 28, the appearance ratio of characters in the probability variation state and the normal state may be higher than the appearance ratio of characters in the normal state.

  In the example of FIG. 28, when a game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A, characters appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins the second general winning opening 50B. Yes. Further, when a game ball wins in the fourth general winning opening 50D, a character appears at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in the third general winning opening 50C. In this embodiment, when a game ball is launched into the left game area 10A, the frequency of the game ball winning in the second general prize opening 50B is higher than that in the first general prize opening 50A, and the right game area 10B is entered. When a game ball is fired, the frequency at which the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 50C is higher than in the fourth general winning opening 50D. That is, when a game ball wins a general winning opening where it is difficult for a game ball to win, a character appears at a higher rate than when a game ball wins a general winning slot where a game ball easily wins. On the other hand, when a game ball is won in a general winning opening where a game ball is easy to win, a higher percentage of characters are played than when a game ball is won in a general winning port where a game ball is difficult to win. You may make it appear.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 28, characters that may be displayed when a game ball wins in the first general winning port 50A and the second general winning port 50B, where the frequency of winning the game ball in the normal state is high, Although it is the characters A to C, there is a possibility that the game ball is displayed when the game ball wins in the third general winning port 50C and the fourth general winning port 50D, where the frequency of winning the game ball is high in the probability changing state and the short time state. The character with is only the character C. In the probability variation state and the short time state, which are gaming states that have a higher gaming interest compared to the normal state, the occurrence of a situation in which the character display period elapses without the predetermined condition being met, although the character has appeared, Since it is conceivable to cause a decrease, only the character C having the longest display period can be displayed.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 28, and even when a game ball is won in the same general winning opening, characters appearing in accordance with the game state may be different. 2 When the game ball is won at the general winning opening 50B, the characters A to C may be displayed. However, when the game ball is won at the second general winning opening 50B in the probability variation state and the short time state, the character is displayed. Only C may be displayed. Also, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 28, the number of characters that may be displayed in the probability variation state and the normal state is set to be greater than the number of characters that may be displayed in the normal state. May be.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a display period of each character displayed on the image display device 5. It is assumed that the characters A to C are immediately displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing when the character to be displayed is determined based on the winning in the general winning opening. That is, the character is displayed immediately after the winning in the general winning opening, so that the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred.

  When the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) when the predetermined condition is not satisfied within 1 minute from the start of display (effective start winning, reach state is established), from the start of display of the character A Character A is erased from the screen at the timing when one minute has elapsed, and (2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied within one minute from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ), The character A is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is completed.

  The predetermined condition in (1) is a condition related to a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (including a condition related to an effect executed as the game progresses). Even when an effective start prize is generated, if the number of variable display games held including the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize is 1, the start condition for the variable display game is satisfied. Since the start condition is satisfied immediately after the hold (hold information is deleted), it is difficult to secure a period for executing the hold change effect by the displayed character. Therefore, when the number of hold of the variable display game after the effective start winning is equal to or less than the predetermined number (1 in this example), the hold change effect is not executed, and the number of hold of the variable display game after the effective start winning is the predetermined number. If the number is greater than (1 in this example), the hold change effect may be executed.

  Further, the character may be deleted when the game state is shifted to the big hit game state or when the above-described effect control CPU 120 determines the game end. The character displayed on the image display device 5 immediately before the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped is not displayed again after the power supply is resumed. That is, it is assumed that the backup process for displaying the character displayed before the power interruption on the image display device 5 after the power supply is resumed is not performed.

  Note that the execution of the specific effect F (holding change effect) causes the reserved character to be stored in the holding memory as the appearing character performs a predetermined action (that is, according to a change in the mode of the displayed object). Both the case where the aspect of the corresponding display part changes and the case where it does not change shall be included. Further, the timing at which the specific effect F (holding change effect) ends is the timing at which the character completes a predetermined action. Specifically, as shown in FIG. In the example, the character A is used. However, in the specific effect F (holding change effect), the character B may appear or the character C may appear). This is the timing at which the action effect for covering the corresponding display part is performed for a certain period of time (a predetermined action effect period has elapsed).

  In addition, the fact that the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed means that as shown in FIGS. 32 (f) and 32 (g), the appearing character 3100 (in this example, the character B is the specific effect G). In (variation result notice effect), when character A appears or character C may appear), it means that a predetermined dialogue is issued, and the timing at which specific effect G (variation result notice effect) ends is This is the timing when the dialogue of the character is displayed for a certain period of time (a predetermined dialogue display period has elapsed).

  When the character B is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) when the predetermined condition is not satisfied within 2 minutes from the start of display (effective start winning, reach state is established), from the start of the display of the character B Character B is erased from the screen at the timing when two minutes have elapsed, and (2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied within two minutes from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ), The character B is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is completed.

  When the character C is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) when the predetermined condition (effective start winning, establishment of reach state) is not established within 3 minutes from the start of display, the display of the character C is started. Character C is erased from the screen at the timing when 3 minutes have elapsed, and (2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ), The character C is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is completed.

  As described above, the state in which the game ball is won at the general winning opening is shown to the player by immediately displaying the character on the image display device 5 based on the winning of the game ball at the general winning opening. Can be recognized. In addition, the period during which the character is displayed is a specific period in which the specific effect can be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied during the period when the character is not displayed, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the specific effect based on the character is not executed, the player recognizes that the specific effect is executed if the predetermined condition is satisfied while the character is displayed, and plays the game to satisfy the predetermined condition. As a result, the interest of the game is enhanced until a specific performance is executed.

  Further, since the display period differs depending on the character to be displayed, it is possible to make the player interested in which character is being displayed. The player who has confirmed the character type can grasp the display period of the character, that is, the period during which the predetermined condition must be satisfied in order to execute the specific effect. Thereby, the interest until a specific effect is performed can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, the appearance ratio of each character, that is, the set ratio for a specific period in which a predetermined condition must be established differs depending on the general winning opening, so that the player can play a game ball in any general winning opening. You will be interested in winning.

(Specific example of specific effect F (holding change effect))
In the 47th effect form shown in FIG. 30, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5 and an effective start winning is generated, the character displayed as the specific effect F is displayed. The hold change effect with the action is executed. As described above, the occurrence of the effective start winning is the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening when the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit, and the second That is, winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening occurs when the second reserved memory number corresponding to the starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value.

  The production control CPU 120 has received a start winning port designation command specifying “first start winning port” or “second start winning port”, and a start winning determination result specifying command including valid data that is not blank data. Based on this, it is possible to recognize the occurrence of the effective start winning. FIG. 31 shows a specific example of the hold change effect in the 47th effect form.

  In FIG. 31 (a), the decorative symbols change (for example, scrolling in the vertical direction) is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and the reserved memory is stored. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 2. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 5H, among the variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, the display part (left end) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied first. Is displayed in the normal mode, and the display part (second from the left) corresponding to the variable display game that satisfies the start condition second is displayed in the normal mode.

  At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 decides to cause the character A to appear at a rate of 35% based on the winning of the game ball in the second general winning opening 50B (see FIG. 28). In FIG. 31B, based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character 3000 (character A) having the staff 3001 on the image display device 5. It is assumed that the character A appears on the screen immediately after the general winning.

  Then, it is assumed that an effective start winning is made to the first start winning opening within one minute from the appearance of the character A, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, in FIG. 31C, the number of reserved memories is 3, and the display part (third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game that satisfies the start condition third is displayed in the normal mode. The production control CPU 120 that has detected the occurrence of the effective start winning, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, determines whether or not to change the display portion corresponding to each of the three reserved storages from the normal mode to the special mode. Each is determined.

  Here, the production control CPU 120 determines each start prize determination result designation command (not blank data) stored in the start prize command storage area for the first special figure and the start prize command storage area for the second special figure. (Contains valid data). As shown in FIG. 31 (d), regarding the start winning determination result designation command for designating “big hit”, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 80%. It is determined that the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, regarding the start winning determination result designation command for designating “out of”, it is decided to change the mode of the display part corresponding to the command from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 10%, and the rate of 90% Thus, it is determined that the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode.

  In this example, regarding the start winning determination result designation command corresponding to the variable display game in which the first and second start conditions are satisfied, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode. Only with respect to the start prize determination result designation command corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied for the third time, the display part mode corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. Suppose that it is decided to make it happen (with pending change).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the effect control CPU 120 directs the character 3000 (character A) to point the tip of the cane 3001 toward the start-winning memory display area 5H, and the flame 3002 emitted from the tip of the cane 3001. The action effect of the aspect that the display site | part corresponding to each holding | maintenance memory | storage is enclosed by is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (f), the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode to the normal mode based on the above-described determination for the second display part from the left end and the left with the execution of the action effect. For the third display portion from the left without changing, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode based on the determination described above. When the action effect is executed for a predetermined period, the character 3000 (character A) holding the wand 3001 and the flame 3002 emitted from the tip of the wand 3001 are erased from the screen.

  As a result of the change in the display portion mode accompanying the action effect, the player will see the third display portion from the left as a result of the action of the character 3000 (character A) that has appeared based on the winning in the general winning opening. Recognizes that the game has changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and expects a variable display game executed three times after the currently executed variable display game.

  On the other hand, in FIGS. 31 (c) and 31 (d), regarding the start winning determination result designation command corresponding to the three variable display games in which the start condition is not satisfied, all of the display part modes corresponding to the command are normally set. When it is decided not to change the mode (no change in hold), after the action effect shown in FIG. 31 (e) is performed, three hold memories are stored as shown in FIG. 31 (g). None of the three corresponding reserved sites remain in the normal mode.

  Thus, the effective start winning is generated during the character display period by executing the specific effect F (holding change effect) triggered by the fact that “the effective start winning has occurred within the period during which the character is displayed”. Whether or not the game ball is won at the general winning opening until the specific effect is executed can be enhanced. In addition, a game ball is placed at the general prize opening by an effect configuration in which a display result of the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been established is triggered by an event of winning a prize at the general prize opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game. It is possible to further enhance the interest from winning a prize until a specific performance is executed.

  Also, with the action of the character 3000 (character A), of the display parts corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been established, the display form of any display part changes from the normal form to the special form. If not, and if it changes, it can be noted which display mode of the display part changes from the normal mode to the special mode. That is, it is possible to improve interest by suggesting a variable display game that a player can expect.

  In addition, an effect that suggests winning in the general prize opening (appearance of character A) and an effect that suggests a display result of a variable display game in which the start condition is not satisfied (action of character A) are common objects ( By being constituted by the character A), it is possible to further enhance the interest until the specific effect is executed after the game ball is won in the general winning opening. The common object suggests the winning to the general winning opening not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied, thereby relating to the appearance and action of the character. It can increase the player's interest.

  The specific effect F (holding change effect) is a variable display game corresponding to an effective start prize (an effective start prize that has been determined to satisfy a predetermined condition) as an opportunity to execute the hold change effect. Lastly, the display results are announced for each variable display game that is held, including the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the hold change effect is executed. Targeting only the variable display game (variable display game where the start condition was finally satisfied) corresponding to the effective start prize (the effective start prize determined that the predetermined condition was established) The display result may be notified in advance. On the other hand, the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize that triggered the execution of the on-hold change effect (the effective start prize that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was met) (the last start condition) The display result may be notified in advance by targeting a variable display game (except for the variable display game in which is established).

(Character deletion process)
Similarly to the specific effects A to D, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (holding change effect) is provided. When the specific effect F is executed, the effect control CPU 120 erases the displayed character from the screen, and at the same time, wins the winning history (at least the first general prize opening 50A to the first general winning opening 50A to the second) corresponding to the specific effect F. 30. One or more winning histories to the general winning opening 50D and one or more winning histories to any of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are deleted (the winning history of FIG. 30). Reset condition).

  In addition, when the displayed character is erased by elapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect F, the winning history (at least in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F) is associated with this. 30) (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 30) is deleted.

  FIG. 33A is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that a decorative display variable display game is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. When the variable display 1 is being executed, one of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won one of the general winning ports 50A to 50D at the timing of (1). The

  When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is not displayed at the timing of (2) after one minute has passed since the appearance without generating an effective start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 is ended and the variable display 2 is started. However, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not displayed but is continuously displayed. Yes. If an effective start prize is generated within one minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is not displayed after the action effect ends.

  When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is not displayed at the timing of (3) after 2 minutes from the appearance without generating an effective start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 is ended and the variable display 2 is started. Further, the variable display 2 is ended and the variable display 3 is started. However, the variable display 1 is ended, the variable display 2 is started, and the variable display 2 is started. With the end of the display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is not displayed but is continuously displayed. If an effective start winning is generated within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is not displayed after the action effect ends.

  When the displayed character is the character C, the character C is not displayed at the timing when 5 minutes have passed since the appearance without generating an effective start winning. In this example, the action effect is executed without the character being hidden because the effective start winning is generated at the timing of (4) before 5 minutes have passed since the appearance of the character C. At the timing (5) when the production ends, the display portion corresponding to one or more reserved memories changes from the normal mode to the special mode. During this time, the variable display 1 is finished and the variable display 2 is started, the variable display 2 is finished and the variable display 3 is started, and the variable display 3 is finished and the variable display 4 is started. With the end of display 1 and the start of variable display 2, the end of variable display 2 and the start of variable display 3, and the end of variable display 3 and the start of variable display 4, character C is not hidden. It is displayed continuously.

  As described above, once the character is displayed, it is continuously displayed until “a predetermined condition is satisfied” or “a predetermined period of time elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied”. ing. Then, the character is not displayed at the earlier timing of “the predetermined condition is satisfied” and “the predetermined period elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied”.

[48th form]
In the forty-eighth effect form shown in FIG. 30, a character is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening, and the reach state is established within the period during which the character is displayed. Based on the display result of the variable display game being executed (variable display game with a variation pattern with a reach state) is displayed. That is, the display control of the character is the same as in the 47th effect form, but the predetermined condition to be established within the character display period and the type of the specific effect executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied are different.

(Specific example of specific effect G (change result notice effect))
In the forty-eighth effect form shown in FIG. 30, when the reach state is established in a state where any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5, the specific effect G of the character being displayed is displayed. The change result notice effect accompanied by the dialogue display is executed. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the variation pattern. Therefore, when the variable display game with the reach state is being executed, and the remaining time of the variable display game with the reach state has reached a predetermined reach state establishment timing, the fact that the reach state has been established The specific effect G can be executed if the character is displayed at this time. FIG. 32 shows a specific example of the change result notice effect in the 48th effect form.

  In FIG. 32 (a), decoration pattern changes (for example, vertical scroll display) are executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 5H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. .

  At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 determines to cause the character B to appear at a rate of 30% based on the fact that the game ball has won the first general winning opening 50A (see FIG. 28). In FIG. 32B, based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character 3100 (character B) having the staff 3101 on the image display device 5. Character B shall appear on the screen immediately after the general winning.

  In FIG. 32 (c), it is assumed that after the appearance of the character B, the variable display of the decorative symbols that has been executed is finished and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a finalized decorative symbol, a combination of non-reach loses with “2” on the left, “1” on the right, and “3” on the middle is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. No longer exists, and the leftmost display region is not displayed.

  It is assumed that the reach state is established and the predetermined condition is established within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B. In FIG. 32 (e), with the establishment of the reach state, a character 3050 of “reach!” Is displayed at the top of the screen. The production control CPU 120 that detects the establishment of the reach state, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed determines the dialogue of the character B.

  Here, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether the display result of the decorative display variable display game being executed is determined to be the big hit combination or the lost combination. It should be noted that it may be confirmed whether the last variation pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is a big hit variation pattern designation command or a deviation variation pattern designation command. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (f), when it is determined that the display result of the variable display game is a big hit combination, the character of the character displaying the “chance!” Line at a rate of 25%. It is determined to be displayed horizontally, and it is determined to display the line “Intense heat !!” next to the character being displayed at a rate of 75%. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display result of the variable display game is a combination of lost, it is determined to display the line “chance!” Next to the displayed character at a rate of 90%. % Will be displayed next to the character being displayed at the rate of%.

  In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to display the line “Intense heat !!” next to the character being displayed. Based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 32 (g), the character 3100 (character B) swings up the cane 3101 and the effect of emitting the dialogue 3102 of "Burning !!" Is executed. When the dialogue 3102 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the character 3100 (character B) having the wand 3101 and the dialogue 3102 emitted from the character 3100 are erased from the screen.

  As a result, for the player, there is a possibility that the decorative symbol that will be the jackpot combination will be finally stopped and displayed as a result of the reach production due to the dialogue of the character 3100 (character B) that has appeared based on the winning in the general winning opening. It is possible to grasp that it is expensive.

  In this way, whether or not the reach state is established in the character display period by executing the specific effect G (change result notice effect) triggered by “the reach state is established within the period during which the character is displayed”. It is possible to make it interested in whether or not, and it is possible to enhance the interest until a specific effect is executed after a game ball is won in the general winning opening. In addition, in the event of a prize-winning event at a general prize opening not related to the progress of the variable display game, a play structure for notifying the display result of a variable display game for which a display result has not been derived and displayed has been announced. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the winning of the ball until the specific performance is executed. Further, attention can be paid to the dialogue of the character 3000 (character A), and the interest of the character display effect can be improved.

  In addition, an effect that suggests winning in the general prize opening (appearance of character B) and an effect that suggests the display result of the variable display game whose display result is not derived and displayed (the line of character B) are common objects. By being constituted by (Character B), it is possible to further enhance the interest until the specific effect is executed after the game ball is won in the general winning opening. Then, a common object suggests a winning to a general winning opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game and a display result of the variable display game that is not fixed, so that the player's appearance and dialogue regarding the appearance of the character and dialogue Increase interest.

  In the forty-eighth effect form, the specific effect G in which the character emits a predetermined dialogue is executed when the reach state is established, that is, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is in a predetermined mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the specific effect G may be executed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed regardless of the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, for example, when a predetermined notice effect different from the specific effect G (for example, a step-up notice effect executed immediately after the start of the variable display game) is executed when variable display of decorative symbols is executed. The specific effect G may be executed as follows.

  Moreover, in the 48th effect form, the example in which the character is displayed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening regardless of the decorative display variable display mode has been described. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of the decorative pattern executed when the game ball is won at the general winning opening becomes a predetermined mode. For example, the game ball is won at the general winning opening. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed at the time of reaching the reach state (the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is being executed).

(Character deletion process)
As with the specific effects A to D and the specific effects F, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is provided. When the specific effect G is executed, the effect control CPU 120 deletes the displayed character from the screen, and at the same time, wins history (at least the first general prize opening 50A to the first general winning opening 50A to the first game) corresponding to the specific effect G. 4 (including the winning history of one or more times to the general winning opening 50D) (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 30).

  In addition, when the displayed character is erased with the elapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect G, the winning history (at least in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G is associated with this). The first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D include one or more winning histories) (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 30).

  FIG. 33B is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the decorative display variable display game is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. Of these, the reach effect is executed only on the variable display 4 and the reach state is reached. Is assumed to hold. When the variable display 1 is being executed, any one of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won one of the general winning ports 50A to 50D at the timing of (11). The

  When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is not displayed at the timing of (12) when one minute has elapsed from the appearance without the reach state being established. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not displayed but is continuously displayed. When the reach state is established within one minute from the appearance of character A, character A is not displayed after the end of the line display effect.

  When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is not displayed at the timing of (13) when two minutes have passed since the appearance without establishment of the reach state. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, and the end of the variable display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is continuously displayed instead of being hidden. If the reach state is established within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is not displayed after the end of the dialogue display effect.

  When the displayed character is the character C, the character C is not displayed at the timing when 5 minutes have passed since the appearance without the reach state being established. In this example, the dialogue display effect is executed without the character being hidden because the reach state is established at the timing of (14) before 5 minutes have passed since the appearance of the character C. During this time, the character C is not displayed as the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, and the variable display 3 ends and the variable display 4 starts. It is displayed continuously.

[49th effect form]
In the 47th effect form and the 48th effect form described above, an example is shown in which a specific effect is executed as long as a predetermined condition is satisfied, regardless of which type of character A to C is displayed. However, only when a specific type of character is displayed, a specific type of specific effect may be executed.

  For example, in the 49th effect form shown in FIG. 30, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed based on the fact that an effective start winning is generated within the period in which either the character A or B is displayed. Thus, even if an effective start winning is generated during the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is not executed. In addition, the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed based on the fact that the reach state is established within the period during which the character C is displayed, and the character A or B is temporarily displayed. Even if the reach state is established within a certain period, the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is not executed.

  As described above, according to the type of character to be displayed, that is, the notification mode for notifying that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the predetermined condition for enabling execution of the specific effect, and the predetermined condition The types of specific effects executed based on the establishment may be different.

  In addition, although the predetermined condition for enabling execution of the specific effect is common regardless of the type of the displayed character, the specific that is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the type of the displayed character The type of production may be different. For example, when an effective start winning is generated during the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed (the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is not executed). However, when an effective start winning is generated during the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed (the specific effect F (holding change effect) is not executed). May be.

  Moreover, although the predetermined conditions for enabling execution of a specific effect differ depending on the type of character displayed, it is executed when a predetermined condition corresponding to each is established regardless of the type of character displayed. The types of specific effects may be common. For example, when an effective start prize is generated during the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed (even if the reach state is established within that period, the specific effect F is specified) However, when the reach state is established within the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed (assuming that an effective start prize is generated within that period). However, the specific effect F may not be executed).

  In addition, if an effective start winning occurs before the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (holding change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action is displayed. After the execution, the character is deleted. (2) When the reach state is established prior to the effective start winning, the character is displayed after executing the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) in which the displayed character emits speech. It may be deleted. As described above, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) may be satisfied within the display period of one character, and the predetermined condition previously satisfied among the plurality of predetermined conditions is set. A corresponding type of specific effect may be executed.

  In addition, if an effective start winning occurs before the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (holding change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action is displayed. The character is deleted after being executed, and (2) the character is deleted after executing the specific effect F (holding change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action even when the reach state is established prior to the effective start winning. You may make it do. In this way, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) may be satisfied within the display period of one character, and a specific effect is produced when any of the predetermined conditions is satisfied. You may make it perform.

[Modification of 47th Production Mode to 49th Production Mode]
In the example of FIG. 29, when a predetermined condition is established and a specific effect is executed within a predetermined period after the character is displayed, the character is erased before the end of the specific period. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the character once displayed may be continuously displayed until the specific period ends even after the specific effect is executed. good.

  In the case of such a form, a specific effect may be executed every time a predetermined condition is satisfied within a period during which the character is displayed. For example, when the character C is displayed based on a winning in the general winning opening, the character C continues without disappearing from the screen for 5 minutes when the character C is displayed even if an effective start winning occurs. The specific effect F (holding change effect) may be executed every time an effective start prize is generated for 5 minutes.

  In the example of FIG. 29, the example in which the character display period is a predetermined period (1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes) has been described. However, the display period of the character is not limited to such a form. The period until the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times or the period until the variable display game being executed when the character is displayed may be completed, and the character is displayed. It is good also as a period until the game state (for example, a normal state, a probable change state or a time-short state, a big hit game state) ends.

  Further, there may be a character that is continuously displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied regardless of the display period. That is, once such a character is displayed, it is assumed that the character is not erased until a predetermined condition is established and a specific effect is executed, regardless of the elapsed time from the start of display.

  In addition, the character display period may be determined before the character type to be displayed is determined, and the character may be selected according to the display period. For example, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the character display period is 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes. If the display period is 1 minute, character A is selected at a rate of 70%, character B is selected at a rate of 20%, character C is selected at a rate of 10%, and the determined display period is 2 minutes. If the character B is selected at a rate of 70%, the character A is selected at a rate of 15%, the character C is selected at a rate of 15%, and the determined display period is 3 minutes, C may be selected at a rate of 70%, character B may be selected at a rate of 20%, and character A may be selected at a rate of 10%. For example, different display periods may be determined depending on which general winning opening the game ball has won or depending on the game state.

  In addition, the predetermined condition to be satisfied in order to enable execution of the specific performance is not limited to the above-mentioned effective start winning or reach state, but the occurrence of a big hit gaming state, a predetermined type of big hit gaming state (for example, probability variation big hit, or The number of rounds with the greatest number of rounds, the number of prize balls awarded in the big hit gaming state has reached a predetermined number, the number of consecutive big hit gaming states (the number of consecutive = the winning state after the end of the big hit gaming state) The number of consecutive big hit gaming states controlled by the state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, the end of the big hit gaming state, the predetermined gaming state (for example, the probability variation state) has been controlled, and the display result is a lost combination A variable display game has been repeated a predetermined number of times, a variable display game having a variation pattern of “non-reach” (“losing without reach”) has been continued a predetermined number of times, and a pending storage There may be a satisfied conditions with such that you have reached the predetermined number, the other conditions, i.e., in the game. In addition, the specific effect is not limited to the period in which the special symbol variable display is being executed, but the special symbol variable display (the effect corresponding to the special symbol variable display) such as the period controlled in the big hit gaming state is executed. It may be performed during a period that is not performed.

  In the 47th effect form and the 49th effect form, an example is shown in which the notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is the hold change effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 9 (b) described above, depending on whether or not there is a jackpot hold, an effect of only sound is executed or an effect by the sound and the movable accessory 1000 is executed. It may be a pre-reading notice effect with a different ratio of whether or not, or it may be a chance eye notice effect as shown in a 50th effect form or a 51st effect form to be described later. Further, it may be a countdown notice effect in which the player is notified of the remaining variable display count until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice.

  In the 47th effect form and the 49th effect form, after the character is displayed based on the fact that the game ball has been won in the general winning opening, the displayed character is the mode of the hold information by the occurrence of the effective start winning. Although the example of executing the hold change effect for changing the game is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when a game ball wins a game in a general winning opening, determination at the start winning prize corresponding to each variable display game held Check the result specification command and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command, and if there is a variable display game with a big hit display result or a variable display game with a reach state, it will be at a higher rate than when it does not exist A character may appear. In addition, when there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, the rate at which a specific character appears may be higher than when there is no such game. Further, different types of characters may appear depending on whether there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, and a case in which there is no reach. Then, when an effective start winning occurs after the appearance of the character (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), it is preferable that the displayed character performs a hold change effect that changes the mode of the hold information.

  In the 47th to 49th effect forms, when the big hit game state is controlled, the displayed character is erased, and during the period in which the big hit game state is controlled, a game ball is placed in the general winning opening. Even if a prize is won, a specific effect may not be executed by preventing a new character from appearing. As a result, the player's consciousness is concentrated on various effects (for example, fanfare effect, in-round effect, ending effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the control to the big hit gaming state so as not to disturb these various effects. be able to.

  In the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form, the example in which the specific effect is always executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period has been described. Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the period, the specific effect may be executed at a predetermined rate. For example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character A, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 25%, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character B, the specific effect is performed at the rate of 50%. When the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character C, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 100%, for example, the specific effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the displayed character. The execution ratio may be varied.

  Here, in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening when the character is displayed, the display of a new character based on winning in the general winning opening is as follows. It is assumed that the already displayed character is continuously displayed without performing the above. That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of the character display and the character to be displayed at the rate shown in FIG. 28 on condition that no character is displayed when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. The character is displayed based on the determination.

  In addition, not only in such a form, when a character is displayed when a game ball wins in a general winning opening, instead of the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed (already displayed The character may be deleted) and the character based on the subsequent general winning may be displayed.

  In addition, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is compared with the display period of the character based on the subsequent general prize, and the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is If the display period of the character based on the subsequent general prize is longer, it is displayed instead of the character based on the previous general prize (already The displayed character may be deleted), and the character based on the subsequent general winning may be displayed.

  In such a form, when displaying a character based on the subsequent general winning instead of the character based on the previous general winning (deleting the already displayed character), the character display period based on the subsequent general winning In addition, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed may be added (the period during which both are added is taken as the display period of the newly displayed character).

  In addition, in the 47th to 49th presentation forms, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening during the character display period, no new character is displayed based on the winning in the general winning opening. The remaining display period of characters that have already been displayed may be extended. Here, the period to be extended (the time to be added to the remaining display period) may be a display period (for example, 1 minute if character A is displayed) defined for the already displayed character. Also, even when a winning in the general winning opening occurs during the character display period, one of the characters is determined at the rate shown in FIG. 28, and the determined character (however, newly displayed) A display period (for example, 2 minutes for character B) corresponding to the character that is not displayed may be added to the remaining display period of the already displayed character.

(Display of multiple characters)
In addition, when a character is displayed when a game ball is won in the general winning opening, the character is displayed along with the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed (without deleting the already displayed character). The character based on the general prize may also be displayed. For example, when it is determined that a game ball is won in the general winning opening and the character B is newly displayed when the character A is displayed, a new character is added in addition to the already displayed character A. B may also be displayed on the image display device 5.

  In such a form, a period obtained by adding the character display period based on the subsequent general prize to the remaining character display period based on the previous general prize is set as a common display period for both characters. May be. In this case, when the predetermined condition is satisfied before the common display period elapses, the specific effect is executed, and either one character or both characters are erased. Further, when a common display period elapses without satisfying the predetermined condition, both characters are erased.

  Further, in a state where both the first character (for example, character A) and the second character (for example, character B) are displayed on the image display device 5, the first predetermined condition (for example, effective When the start prize is established and the first specific effect (for example, the specific effect F (holding change effect)) based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition is executed, the first character is deleted and only the second character is present. Next, the second predetermined condition (for example, reach state) corresponding to the second character is established, and the second specific effect (for example, the specific effect G (variation result) based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition is established. When the notice effect) is executed, the second character may be deleted. Here, the first character and the second character may be the same type of character.

  In such a form, the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be set as a common condition (for example, occurrence of an effective start prize). In this case, both the first character and the second character The first specific effect by the first character and the second specification by the second character based on the establishment of the common condition (for example, the occurrence of a single effective start prize) in the state displayed on the image display device 5 Both the effects are executed, and both the first character and the second character are deleted.

  Further, the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be the same type of effect (for example, the specific effect F (holding change effect)), and in this case, both the first character and the second character are image display devices. When the first predetermined condition (for example, effective start winning) corresponding to the first character is satisfied in the state displayed in FIG. 5, a certain type of specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect)) is executed, When one character is erased and only the second character is displayed, and then a second predetermined condition (for example, reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, a specific effect (specific effect F ( The second character may be deleted by executing the hold change effect)).

  In addition, as in the 49th effect form, if the first character (character A or B) is being displayed, the first specific effect (specific effect) according to the establishment of the first condition (occurrence of an effective start prize). F) can be executed, and the second specific effect (specific effect G) can be executed in accordance with the establishment of the second condition (establishment of the reach state) during the period in which the second character (character C) is displayed. In this case, it is assumed that only one of the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 5 (both the first character and the second character are not displayed simultaneously). Here, when the second specific effect is executed, if the ratio of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) is higher than when the first specific effect is executed, the second character is the first character. It is assumed that it is displayed with priority over the character. For example, when it is determined to display the second character based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening when the first character is displayed, the first character is deleted and the second character is deleted. Is newly displayed. On the other hand, when the second character is displayed, the control for displaying the first character is not performed instead.

  On the other hand, if the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 5 at the same time, the first specific effect is executed according to the establishment of the first condition, and the second condition It is possible to execute the second specific effect according to the establishment of. However, when both the first specific effect and the second specific effect are effects for the same variable display game and the execution periods overlap (for example, both are the change result notice effect of the same variable display game and reach) In the case where it is executed immediately after the state is established), the second specific effect is executed with priority over the first specific effect, and at this time, the first specific effect is not executed.

[50th effect form]
In the 50th effect form shown in FIG. 34, each time a game ball wins a general winning opening, a button icon 4000 is newly displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 35, etc.), and the displayed button icon 4000 is displayed. Depending on the number, the types of specific effects that can be executed are different. Here, each of the specific effects in the effect form is an effect that prompts the player to perform some operation, and is an effect that can notify the display result of the variable display game based on the detection of the player's action. As specific effects, three types of cut-in notice effects (specific effects H), pseudo-continuous notice effects (specific effects I), and chance eye notice effects (specific effects J) are provided.

  The display information condition in FIG. 34 is the display number of button icons 4000 necessary for each specific effect to be executed. If at least the number of button icons 4000 indicated in the display information condition is not displayed, each specific information is displayed. Production is not executed. Specifically, the cut-in notice effect is not executed unless one or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed unless two or more button icons 4000 are displayed. If 3 or more button icons 4000 are not displayed, the button icon 4000 is not executed.

  The button icon 4000 displayed on the image display device 5 is incremented by 1 every time a game ball wins a general winning opening, and a predetermined maximum number (for example, 5) can be displayed on the image display device 5. It shall be. Then, when the specific effect is executed, the number of button icons 4000 obtained by subtracting the display number of the button icon 4000 required for the execution of the specific effect from the display number of the button icon 4000 before the execution of the specific effect, It will be displayed on the image display device 5 after execution of the specific effect. For example, when (1) a cut-in notice effect (the number of required button icons to be displayed = 1) is executed in a state where five button icons 4000 are displayed, the button icon after the cut-in notice effect is executed. The display number of 4000 is 4, and (2) When the pseudo-continuous notice effect (the number of required button icon displays = 2) is executed, the display number of 4000 of the button icon after the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is three. (3) When the chance eye notice effect (the number of required button icon displays = 3) is executed, the number of 4000 displayed button icons after the chance eye notice effect is executed is two.

(Cut-in notice effect)
The cut-in notice effect provided as the specific effect H is an effect in which after the reach state is established, the display result of the variable display pattern of the variable display pattern is notified based on the content of the characters displayed on the screen. As shown in FIG. 34, the cut-in notice effect is (1) when one or more button icons 4000 are displayed and (2) when a variable display game is executed with a variation pattern with a reach state. A notification is given to perform a predetermined continuous hitting operation, and (3) the player can execute it by performing the predetermined continuous hitting operation.

  In addition, when the variable display game is executed in a state where no button icon 4000 is displayed and the variation pattern with the reach state is performed, the continuous hit operation related to the cut-in notification effect is not notified and the cut-in notification is performed. Production is not executed. Further, in a variable display game with a variable pattern that does not involve a reach state, notification of a continuous hit operation related to a cut-in notice effect is not performed, and the cut-in notice effect is not executed.

  Further, in the cut-in notice effect, the reach state is established during the period in which the variable display game is executed, and then the player operates the operation button 30 a plurality of times, so the reach effect is executed. The condition is that the variable display game is executed with the variation pattern to be executed. A specific aspect of the cut-in notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 35 (a), the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 5H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. .

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the first button icon 4000 on the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. In FIG. 35B, the screen is updated from a state where the button icon 4000 is not displayed to a state where one button icon 4000 is displayed. In addition, when one or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen in total, a “cut-in” character 4000a indicating that “a cut-in notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied” is displayed. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition here is that (1) one or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and (2) a variable pattern variable display game with a reach state is executed.

  In FIG. 35 (c), it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is finished and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a definite decorative symbol, a combination of non-reach loses, “4” on the left, “2” on the right, and “8” in the middle, is derived and displayed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display game is a reach variation pattern with a reach state based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Confirm based on the variation pattern designation command received from 100. When the variable display game to be started is a reach variation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggesting condition for the cut-in notice effect is satisfied.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 35 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. No longer exists, and the leftmost display region is not displayed.

  In the reach change pattern variable display game, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect of displaying the character 4080 of “reach!” When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG. Then, based on the fact that the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), in the center of the screen, in order from the top, the characters “continuous hit!”, A plurality of downward arrows, and the operation button 30 are imitated. The continuous hit suggestion information 4100 composed of an image and a time bar suggesting the remaining period during which the operation is valid is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation of pressing the operation button 30 should be continuously performed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 erases one button icon 4000 necessary for executing the cut-in notice effect among the displayed button icons 4000 with the display of the continuous hit suggestion information 4100. As a result, the number of button icons 4000 displayed becomes zero, and the “cut-in” character 4000a is erased from the screen when there is no specific effect that can be executed.

  It is assumed that the player who has recognized the continuous hit suggestion information 4100 continuously performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30 for a predetermined number of times. The effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the time bar in accordance with the elapsed time since the continuous hit suggestion information 4100 is displayed. When the time bar is displayed, it is in a state of 5 stages out of 5 stages, and it is assumed that the time bar is decreased by 1 stage every 1 second from the display. As shown in FIG. 35 (g), the effect control CPU 120 operates the operation button 30 a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) until the time bar reaches 0 level out of 5 levels (for example, within 5 seconds from the start of display). When the above operation is performed, the cut-in mode is determined and a cut-in screen corresponding to the determined mode is displayed on the image display device 5.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120, when the consecutive hit suggestion condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 35 (h), when the display result of the variable display game to be executed becomes the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination Decides to display the characters “chance!” At a rate of 20% and “burnt!” At a rate of 80%, and the display result of the variable display game to be executed is a losing combination. In the case of the final stop symbol, it is decided to display the characters “chance!” At a rate of 80% and display the characters “burning!” At a rate of 20%.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in notice effect for causing the image display device 5 to display a screen including the determined character. In the example of FIG. 35 (i), the character 4110 of “Burning !!” is displayed large on the entire screen.

  It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 “chance!” If the operation button 30 has not been operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the start of displaying the continuous hit suggestion information 4100. In addition, it is assumed that neither of the characters “Furious heat !!” is displayed on the screen.

(Pseudo-continuous notice effect)
The pseudo-announcement effect provided as the specific effect I means that, within a variable display game, by performing re-variation to display the temporarily stopped decorative symbol again in the vertical direction, it is as if multiple times. This is an effect that makes it appear as if the variable display of decorative symbols is continuously executed. When re-variation is performed, in accordance with the player's each symbol stop operation, the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C has a pseudo-continuous symbol as a decorative symbol (in this example, it is composed of characters “NEXT”). Shall be temporarily suspended.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the pseudo-continuous notice effect is (1) in a state where two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game is executed with a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more. In such a case, a notification is given to perform each predetermined symbol stop operation, and (3) the player can execute it by performing each predetermined symbol stop operation.

  Further, in the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the player operates the operation button 30 three times (performs each symbol stop operation three times) within a period in which one variable display game is executed. It is required to execute a variable display game with a variation pattern that requires a certain operation time and has a variation time of a certain time (8 seconds in this example) or more. A specific aspect of the pseudo continuous notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

  In FIG. 36 (a), the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 5H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. .

  Also, one button icon 4000 is displayed on the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. A “cut-in” character 4000 a indicating that “in-notification effect can be executed” is displayed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second button icon 4000 on the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. In FIG. 36B, the screen is updated from a state where one button icon 4000 is displayed to a state where two button icons 4000 are displayed. In addition, when two or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen in total, a “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b indicating that “pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied” is displayed. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion conditions here are (1) a state in which two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game is executed with a variation pattern having a variation time of 8 seconds or more. is there.

  In FIG. 36C, it is assumed that after the second button icon 4000 is displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a fixed decorative pattern, a combination of non-reach loses in which “5” on the left, “1” on the right, and “7” on the middle is derived and displayed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 receives from the game control microcomputer 100 whether or not the variation time of the variable display game is 8 seconds or more based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Check based on the change pattern specification command. And when the variation time of the variable display game to be started is 8 seconds or more, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is established.

  When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), when the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a non-reach variation pattern without a reach state. Decides to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (perform re-variation) with a probability of 15%, and not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (perform no re-variation) at a rate of 85%. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a reach variation pattern with a reach state, it is determined to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (perform re-variation) with a probability of 100%.

  When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops the decorative symbol display area 5L on the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in accordance with each symbol stop operation of the player, and Then, the decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R is determined, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is determined to be temporarily stopped in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C.

  As described above, when receiving the change start command, the variable display result notification command, and the change pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the change pattern designation command and also displays the variable display result. A confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the notification command is determined. When it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in accordance with the player's respective symbol stopping operations are determined It may be different from the “left” and “right” decorative symbols constituting the decorative symbol (final stop symbol), or may be the same.

  When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 120 displays the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display in accordance with each symbol stop operation of the player. In the area 5R and the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, the “left”, “right”, and “middle” decorative symbols that constitute the determined final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) are stopped. Decide on. That is, when the re-variation is not performed, it is determined to stop the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to each symbol stop operation of the player.

  Thus, when the presence / absence of re-variation and the temporary stop symbol for re-variation are determined, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, Accordingly, there is no variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the display portion at the left end is in a non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 36 (f), a character “Press!”, A downward arrow, and an operation button 30 are displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5 L in order from the top. The operation suggestion information 4050 including the simulated image is displayed. Thus, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbols in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L.

  In addition, with the display of the operation suggestion information 4050, the effect control CPU 120 erases two button icons 4000 necessary for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect among the displayed button icons 4000. As a result, the number of button icons 4000 displayed becomes zero, and the “cut-in” character 4000a and the “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b are erased from the screen in accordance with the fact that there is no executable specific effect.

  When the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30, as shown in FIG. The decorative symbol (“1” in this example) is stopped from swinging in the symbol display area 5L. The swing stop is a state in which the decorative symbols are not scrolled in the vertical direction but are not completely stopped and are shaking (the state where the final stop is not displayed). Here, the decorative symbol to be rocked and stopped is the “left” decorative symbol that constitutes the combination of the temporary stop symbol that has been determined in advance if the pseudo continuous symbol has been determined to be stopped. When it is determined not to stop the continuous symbols, it is a “left” decorative symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of finalized decorative symbols (final stop symbol).

  When the “left” decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the effect control CPU 120 then displays the operation suggestion information 4050 in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, as shown in FIG. . Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbols in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R.

  When the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30, as shown in FIG. The decorative symbol (“2” in this example) is stopped from swinging in the symbol display area 5R. Here, the decorative symbol to be stopped is the “right” decorative symbol that constitutes the combination of the temporary stop symbols determined in advance when the pseudo continuous symbol is determined to be stopped. When it is determined not to stop the continuous symbols, it is a “right” decorative symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of finalized decorative symbols (final stop symbol).

  When the “right” decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the effect control CPU 120 then displays operation suggestion information 4050 in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C as shown in FIG. 36 (h). . Thus, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbols in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C.

  It is assumed that the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30.

  At this time, if the CPU 120 for effect control has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols based on the table of FIG. 36D, as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display area 5C, the pseudo continuous symbol composed of the characters “NEXT” is stopped. As a result, the combination of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” temporary stop symbols determined in advance is temporarily stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (j), after the temporary stop display for a predetermined time, the variation of the decorative symbols (for example, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”) (for example, Re-variation is resumed to resume the vertical scroll display. After the re-variation, the combination of the finalized symbols (final stop symbols) is finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed. The display result of the game will be confirmed.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 120 for effect control has decided not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols based on the table of FIG. 36D, as shown in FIG. The “medium” decorative symbol constituting the combination of the predetermined decorative symbol (final stop symbol) determined in advance in the decorative symbol display area 5C is stopped. As a result, the predetermined combination of “left”, “right”, and “medium” determined decorative symbols (final stop symbols) is rocked and stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (m), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, finalized decorative symbols (final stop) The combination of symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined.

  It should be noted that the CPU 120 for effect control has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols even when the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the operation suggestion information 4050. In this case, it is assumed that the combination of the temporary stop symbols determined in advance is temporarily stopped and re-variation is executed. That is, once it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols, even if no operation is performed, the temporary stop symbol combination is automatically displayed as temporary stop and re-variation is executed. And

  In this example, when the operation suggestion condition that two or more button icons 4000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed with a variation pattern having a variation time of 8 seconds or more is satisfied, The operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed regardless of whether or not the variation pattern is in a reach state (that is, regardless of the specified variation pattern effect mode). The operation suggesting condition may be that two or more button icons 4000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed in a variation pattern with a reach state. In the case of such an operation suggestion condition, when the display result of the variable display game with the reach state is a big hit, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped at a higher rate than when the display result is lost. It is good to make it.

  In addition, when the presence or absence of execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is preset for each variation pattern determined on the game control microcomputer 100 side, that is, by a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. In a case where the pseudo-continuous symbols are designated to be temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 120 displays two or more button icons 4000 and is designated to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols. The operation suggestion condition may be that the received change pattern designation command is received (the variable display game is executed with the change pattern accompanied by the pseudo-announcement effect), as in the above-described example, regardless of the specified change pattern. , Button icon 4000 is displayed more than two, and variable table with variable time more than predetermined time Game is executed, it may be used as the operation suggested condition.

(Chance eye notice effect)
The chance eye notice effect provided as the specific effect J is different from the display result of the decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination as the display result of the variable display game executed before the variable display game that is the target of the prefetch notice. By displaying the chance that is the display result as a final stop display, the player is notified of the display result of the variable display game that is the target of the pre-reading notice.

  In this example, the same odd number of decorative symbols are finally stopped and displayed in the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and “left” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. In addition, an even-numbered decorative symbol that is one larger than an odd-numbered decorative symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in each of the “middle” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C is finally stopped and displayed, so that “left”, “middle”, “ The “right” decorative symbol combination shall be completed.

  That is, the combination of the decorative symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right” that are chances in this example is any one of “112”, “334”, “556”, and “778”. In accordance with the player's all symbol stop operation, it is possible to display the final stop combination of decorative symbol combinations that will become opportunities.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the chance eye notice effect is (1) a state in which three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game with a reach state is put on hold, and its variable When none of the variable display games executed before the display game is in a reach state, a notification is given to perform a predetermined all symbol stop operation, and (3) the player performs a predetermined all symbol stop operation. It becomes possible to execute by doing.

  In the chance eye notice effect, the combination of “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols swings when the player operates the operation button 30 only once in one variable display game. Stopped. That is, unlike the pseudo-continuous notice effect that requires each symbol stop operation three times to stop swinging each of the “left”, “right”, and “middle” decorative symbols in one variable display game, The operation (all symbols stop operation) required in one variable display game is only once. A specific aspect of the chance eye notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

  In FIG. 38 (a), the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 3. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 5H, each display part (left end, second from the left, and 3 from the left) corresponding to the three variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. )) Are displayed in the normal mode.

  Here, the production control CPU 120 stores the start winning change pattern determination result designation command stored in the first special drawing start winning command storage area and the second special drawing start winning command storage area. The change pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the display part at the left end) that first satisfies the start condition among the three variable display games that are put on hold is confirmed after confirming the start winning change pattern determination result designation command. Is the non-reach variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display part from the left) that satisfies the second start condition is the non-reach variation pattern, and the third start condition is satisfied It is assumed that the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (third display portion from the left) is the reach variation pattern.

  Two button icons 4000 are displayed at the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won a plurality of times (at least twice or more) in the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. "Cut-in" effect 4000 "indicating that the cut-in notice effect can be executed after the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, and" The pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied " A “pseudo-ream” character 4000b is displayed.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the third button icon 4000 on the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. In FIG. 38B, the screen is updated from the state where the two button icons 4000 are displayed to the state where the three button icons 4000 are displayed. In addition, when a total of three or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen, a “chance eye” character 4000c indicating that “the chance eye notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied” is displayed. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion conditions here are (1) a state in which three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game with a reach state is put on hold, and the variable display game None of the variable display games executed before the time is accompanied by the reach state.

  In FIG. 38C, it is assumed that after the third button icon 4000 is displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a confirmed decorative pattern, a combination of non-reach loses with “5” on the left, “9” on the middle, and “6” on the middle is derived and displayed.

  Here, the CPU 120 for effect control is a non-reach variation pattern in which the variation pattern of the variable display game in which the start condition is established is not accompanied by the reach state based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Among the two variable display games that are put on hold, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the display portion at the left end) that first satisfies the start condition is a non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is satisfied second. Based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display part from the left) is the reach fluctuation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggesting condition of the chance eye notice effect is established.

  When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display game that is executed before the variable display game of the reach reach variation pattern (two times including the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied). Each variable display game) is requested to request the player to stop all symbols after the variable display is started. In addition, whether or not the display result of the variable display game of the pending reach variation pattern is a big hit combination or a loss combination, a start winning determination result designation command or a start winning variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game Check based on the judgment result specification command.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (d), when the display result of the variable display game of the reach reach variation pattern that is put on hold is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied are displayed. According to the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance chance at a rate of 75% and stop the non-chance eye (miss combination other than the chance eye) at a rate of 25%. If the display result of the display game is a lost combination, in the variable display game where the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 25% in accordance with the player's all symbols stop operation, Decide to stop non-chance eyes at a rate of 75%.

  When it is decided to stop the chance eye, the effect control CPU 120 configures the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display area 5L that constitutes the chance eye according to the player's all symbol stop operation. And the odd number of decorative symbols to be stopped at 5C, and the even number of decorative symbols to be stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R.

  When it is decided not to stop the chance eye, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C according to the player's all symbol stop operation. In addition, the decorative symbols constituting the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that does not become a chance according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command are swung in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Decide to stop. That is, in accordance with the player's all symbol stop operation, it is decided to stop the swinging of the confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that will be a non-chance.

  Thus, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol for performing the chance eye stop are determined, as shown in FIG. 38 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Accordingly, there are two variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the third display portion from the left is in a non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 38 (f), the characters 4200 of “Stop all symbols!” Are displayed in the center of the screen, and the characters “Press!” The operation suggestion information 4050 including an arrow and an image imitating the operation button 30 is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbols in all the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. To do. In the chance eye notice effect, unlike the above-described pseudo-announce notice effect, all the decorative symbol display areas 5L of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed by operating the operation button 30 only once. Decorative symbols are stopped at 5C and 5R.

  In addition, the display control CPU 120 displays the three buttons required for the execution of the chance eye notice effect among the displayed button icons 4000 in accordance with the display of the characters 4200 “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 4050. The icon 4000 is deleted. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 4000 becomes 0, and there is no specific effect that can be executed. Accordingly, “cut-in” character 4000a, “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b, and “chance” Is deleted from the screen.

  Next, it is assumed that the player who has recognized the characters 4200 “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 4050 performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30.

  At this time, if the CPU 120 for effect control has decided to stop the non-chance eyes based on the table of FIG. 38D, as shown in FIG. In the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a combination of a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that does not become a chance according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is shaken. Stop moving. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (h), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, finalized decorative symbols (final stop) The combination of symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined. In this case, as a non-chance eye definitive decorative symbol, a combination of non-reach loses, “4” on the left, “9” on the middle, and “7” on the right, is derived and displayed.

  If the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period of time (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 4200 “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 4050, the effect control CPU 120 When it is decided to stop the non-chance eye according to all the symbol stop operations, the fixed decorative pattern (final stop symbol) that does not become the chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command This combination shall be rocked and stopped.

  Next, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the next variable display game start condition for the next variable display game is based on the fact that it is determined that the player is requested to stop all symbols. Even if established, whether or not to stop the chance eye is determined as in the previous variable display game. That is, as shown in FIG. 39 (i), when the display result of the variable display game with the reach reach variation pattern is a big hit combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied. According to the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance chance at a rate of 75%, and stop the non-chance eye at a rate of 25%. In the variable display game where the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance chance at a rate of 25% according to the player's all symbol stop operation, and the non-chance rate at a rate of 75%. Decide to stop.

  Further, as in the previous variable display game, the effect control CPU 120 performs the player's all symbol stop operation when it is determined to stop the chance eye or when it is determined to stop the non-chance eye. The combination of decorative symbols to be stopped is determined according to the above.

  Thus, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol for performing the chance eye stop are determined, as shown in FIG. 39 (j), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Accordingly, there is one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the second display portion from the left is in a non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 39 (k), the characters 4200 of “Stop all symbols!” And operation suggestion information 4050 are displayed at the center of the screen. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbols in all the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. To do.

  Next, it is assumed that the player who has recognized the characters 4200 “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 4050 performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30.

  At this time, if it is determined that the chance control CPU 120 stops the chance eye based on the table of FIG. 39 (i), as shown in FIG. 39 (l), “left”, “ The combination of the decorative symbols constituting the determined chance eyes is stopped in the middle and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (m), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, finalized decorative symbols (final stop) The combination of symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined. Here, as the determined decorative pattern of the chance, a combination of non-reach loses, “1” on the left, “1” in the middle, and “2” on the right, is derived and displayed.

  If the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period of time (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 4200 “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 4050, the effect control CPU 120 Even if it is decided to stop the chance eye according to all the symbols stop operation of, the fixed decorative pattern (final stop) that does not become the chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command The combination of symbols) shall be stopped.

  Next, for the next variable display game, that is, the variable display game of the reach variation pattern that is the target of the chance eye notice effect, it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 requests the player to stop all symbols. Therefore, when the next variable display game start condition is satisfied, whether or not to stop the chance eye is not determined. Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (n), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is satisfied. There is no variable display game, and the leftmost display part is not displayed.

  In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect of displaying a character 4080 of “reach!” When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG.

  In the 50th effect form described above, the cut-in notice effect, the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect are all in the state after the game ball has won the general winning opening, that is, the button icon 4000 is displayed. In the displayed state, it can be executed with the player's operation corresponding to each notice effect. In this way, by providing a specific effect that is executed on the condition of the player's operation after winning the game ball to the general winning opening, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

  Further, every time a game ball wins a general winning opening, the button icon 4000 displayed on the screen increases, so that the player can play a game ball in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening. It is possible to recognize that has won.

  When the operation suggestion condition for the cut-in notice effect is established in a state where one or more button icons 4000 are displayed, a notification for prompting a continuous hit operation is given as an operation corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and two or more button icons 4000 are displayed. If the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous announcement effect is established in the state of being displayed, a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation as an operation corresponding to the pseudo-continuous announcement effect is given, and three or more button icons 4000 are displayed. When the operation suggestion condition for the notice effect is established, a notification that prompts all symbol stop operations as an operation corresponding to the chance eye notice effect is given, and the player can execute the specific effect by performing any operation. I can understand.

  Further, according to the display number of the button icon 4000, when the display number is 1 or more, the “cut-in” character 4000a is displayed, and when the display number is 2 or more, the “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b is displayed. When the number is 3 or more, the “chance eye” character 4000c is displayed, so that the player can grasp the types of specific effects that can be executed according to the number of button icons 4000 displayed. Thereby, interest can be given to the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening.

  In addition, you may make it alert | report the operation required in order to perform the specific effect with the kind of specific effect which can be performed. For example, according to the display number of the button icon 4000, when the display number is 1 or more, a “continuous hit” character is displayed next to the “cut-in” character 4000a, and when the display number is 2 or more, a “pseudo continuous” character is displayed. The character “stop each symbol” is displayed next to the character 4000b, and when the number of displays is 3 or more, the character “canceled” is displayed next to the character “4000c”, so that the player can It is possible to grasp an operation required according to the type of specific effect that can be executed.

  Here, in this embodiment, there are cases where the operation suggestion conditions corresponding to each of the plurality of types of specific effects are simultaneously satisfied. For example, in a state where two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, when the variable display game start condition is satisfied, the variation pattern is a variation pattern with a reach state, and the variation time of the variation pattern is 8 In this case, a notification for prompting a continuous hitting operation for executing a cut-in notice effect (display of continuous hitting suggestion information 4100) and a prompting operation for stopping each symbol for executing a pseudo-notice notice effect are performed. Which of notifications (display of operation suggestion information 4050 in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R) should be a problem. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the one having the larger number of button icons 4000 required to execute the specific effect is executed with priority. Accordingly, a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation for execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (two or more button icons 4000 are required) is a notification that prompts a repeated operation for execution of the cut-in notice effect (one or more button icons 4000 are required). Shall be given priority over.

  Further, in a state where three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game of the non-reach variation pattern is satisfied, the variation time of the non-reach variation pattern is 8 seconds or more, and In some cases, the variable display game on hold has a reach variation pattern. In this case, a notification prompting each symbol stop operation for execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R). Either display of operation suggestion information 4050) or notification prompting all symbol stop operation for execution of chance eye notice effect (character 4200 of "Stop all symbols!" And display of operation suggestion information 4050 in each variable display game) The question is whether to do this. In this case, a notification that prompts all symbol stop operations for the chance eye notice effect execution (three or more button icons 4000 are required) is a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation for the pseudo-continuous notice effect execution (button icon 4000). Is given priority over 2).

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of displayed button icons 4000 is the number of button icons 4000 required to execute a specific effect (1 for a cut-in notice effect, 2 for a pseudo-continuous notice effect) If the number is more than 3), the number of button icons 4000 obtained by subtracting the number of button icons 4000 required to execute the specific effect from the number of the button icons 4000 initially displayed is the specific notice effect. It will continue to be displayed after the performance.

  For example, when a chance eye notice effect is executed in a state where four or more button icons 4000 are displayed, one button icon 4000 that is continuously displayed remains after execution of the chance eye notice effect. The “4000” character 4000a remains displayed on the screen. After that, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started, the operation suggesting condition of the cut-in notice effect is established, and the notification for prompting the continuous hitting operation is performed.

  In this embodiment, when the variable display game is started, it is determined whether or not an operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect is established (the number of button icons 4000 is confirmed). In addition, this is not limited to such a form, but when the variable display game is being executed, is the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect established? It may be determined whether or not. For example, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not one or more button icons 4000 are displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and if it is displayed, the repetitive hit suggestion information 4100 for causing repeated hits is displayed. It may be displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not two or more button icons 4000 are displayed at a timing when the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (display result derivation display) reaches a predetermined time (for example, the remaining 10 seconds). If it is determined and displayed, the operation suggestion information 4050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. Also, the production control CPU 120 holds a variable display game (including a variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning) with a reach state at the timing when the effective start winning occurs, and the variable display game When none of the variable display games executed before the reach state is accompanied, it is determined whether or not three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and if they are displayed, all symbol stop operations are performed. For example, the characters 4200 and “operation suggestion information 4050” may be displayed. In other words, within the variable display game being executed at the timing when the number of display of the button icon 4000 reaches a predetermined number set in advance (without waiting for the start condition of the next variable display game to be executed) A notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

  In addition, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display game being executed is the reach variation pattern at the timing when the button icon 4000 becomes 1 or more based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the case of the reach variation pattern, the repetitive hit suggestion information 4100 may be displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 remains until the end of the variable display game being executed (the display of the display result) at the timing when the button icon 4000 becomes 2 or more based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. It is determined whether or not the time is longer than a predetermined time (for example, the remaining 10 seconds). If the time is longer than the predetermined time, the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (display result display) is the predetermined time (for example, You may make it display the operation suggestion information 4050 for performing each symbol stop operation at the timing which became the remaining 10 seconds. Further, the production control CPU 120 is configured to display a variable display game with a reach state (a variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning) at a timing when the button icon 4000 becomes 3 or more based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. Variable display game with a reach state by determining whether or not any of the variable display games executed before the variable display game is accompanied by a reach state. Is held, and all the variable display games executed before the variable display game are not accompanied by the reach state, the entire symbol stop operation is performed in the variable display game being executed. For example, the characters 4200 and “operation suggestion information 4050” may be displayed. In other words, within the variable display game being executed at the timing when the number of display of the button icon 4000 reaches a predetermined number set in advance (without waiting for the start condition of the next variable display game to be executed) A notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

  Also, in the 50th effect form, the operation suggestion conditions for informing to perform a predetermined operation (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stopping operation, all symbol stopping operation) are all conditions relating to the variable display game (display mode and The example in which the specific effect is executed during the execution of the variable display game because the predetermined operation is performed has been described. However, the operation suggesting condition is not limited to such a form, for example, the jackpot It may be a condition relating to a gaming state (for example, whether or not the game is controlled to a big hit gaming state, whether or not the big hit type is a probable big hit, and whether or not the number of rounds is greater than a predetermined number). A specific effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed in the gaming state. For example, when the number of display of the button icon 4000 reaches a predetermined number within the period controlled to the big hit gaming state, the player is notified to perform a predetermined operation, and the predetermined operation is performed. In some cases, an effect may be executed to notify whether or not the big hit gaming state is a probabilistic big hit or whether or not the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is greater than a predetermined number. Further, when the display number of the button icons 4000 reaches a predetermined number within a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the probability changing state (however, the player is in a rendering mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the probability changing state). A notification that prompts the player to perform a predetermined operation may be performed, and when the predetermined operation is performed, an effect may be executed to notify whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state.

  Further, in the 50th effect form, even when the number of display of the button icon 4000 is 1, a notification for prompting a continuous hitting operation is performed based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, and a cut-in notice effect is executed according to the continuous hitting operation. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. If the number of displayed button icons 4000 is not a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more, or 3 or more), notification for prompting a predetermined operation is not performed (for example, There is no notification prompting any one of the repeated operation, each symbol stop operation, and all symbol stop operations), and the specific effect is not executed (for example, any of the cut-in notice effect, the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect) May not be executed).

(Example of single announcement)
In the 50th effect form, in order to stop the temporary stop symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, three operations are performed for each area. However, the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is used. ) May be caused to be performed three times for each area in order to stop the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In other words, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to the variable display result notification command, the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the operation button 30 is displayed. The left symbol composing the final stop symbol is rocked and stopped in response to the operation, and then the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, and the final stop symbol is displayed in response to the operation of the operation button 30. The right symbol constituting the symbol is stopped from swinging, and finally, the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, and the middle symbol constituting the final stop symbol according to the operation of the operation button 30. May be rocked and stopped. In such a configuration, when the jackpot symbol combination is the final stop symbol, the symbol display areas 5L, 5R for “left”, “right”, and “middle” are displayed according to the player's three operations. By sequentially stopping the same decorative design in 5C, the player's expectation for the operation can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the “left”, “right”, and “middle” symbol display areas, a combination of special ornament symbols different from a combination of normal ornament symbols (for example, images of alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”) is used. By stopping, the player is informed of a predetermined operation, and whether or not the display result of the variable display game is a big hit or off (or a probable change big hit) according to the player's predetermined operation. Or a specific effect that informs whether or not it is a non-probable big hit or the like. For example, in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas, special ornament symbols, which are images simulating the operation buttons 30, are stopped (or in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas, normal ornament symbols are displayed. The symbol is stopped), and the image of the characters “continuous hit!” Is stopped in the “medium” symbol display area. Then, when the player who has recognized the image of the character “continuous hit!” Performs the hit operation, the display result of the variable display game (for example, the image of the character “big hit!” Or “losing” is displayed on the image display device 5. May be displayed.

  Further, in such a form, according to the character image stopped in the “medium” symbol display area (according to the notification mode that suggests performing a predetermined operation), the variable display game The rate at which the display result is a big hit (or the rate at which the probability variation big hit) may be different. For example, in the “middle” symbol display area, the operation button 30 is made longer than when the image of the “continuous hit!” Character suggesting that the operation button 30 be pressed many times shortly is stopped as a special symbol. When the image of the character “Long press!” Suggesting that the user presses once is stopped as a special symbol, the ratio of the display result that is a big hit may be increased. In this way, an effect in which the display result of the variable display game is notified in accordance with the player's operation without passing through the reach state may be executed as the specific effect. During the period in which one variable display game is being executed, the special decorative design is stopped by causing the combination of the special decorative symbols to be stopped a plurality of times in the “left”, “right”, and “middle” symbol display areas. Each time the combination is stopped, the player may perform a predetermined operation. In this case, a notice effect that suggests a display result is executed for each predetermined operation (excluding the last predetermined operation), and the display result may be notified according to the last predetermined operation. .

  In the 50th effect form, each symbol stop operation is valid on condition that two or more winnings are made to the general winning opening, and further, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed according to each symbol stopping operation, An example is shown in which all symbol stop operations are valid on condition that three or more winnings are made, and a chance eye notice effect is executed in response to all symbol stop operations, but a notification that a predetermined operation should be performed (predetermined The condition that the operation is valid) may be based on four or more winnings to the general winning opening.

[51st effect form]
In the 51st effect form shown in FIG. 34, the specific effect that can be executed according to the gaming state is different from the 50th effect form. In the 51st effect form, the cut-in notice effect requiring continuous hitting operation can be executed when the game state is the normal state, the probability change state, and the time-short state. On the other hand, the quasi-continuous notice effect that requires each symbol stop operation can be executed only when the gaming state is in the normal state, and the chance eye notice effect that requires all symbol stop operations is in the probable state or in the short time state. It can be executed only when

  In the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect, an operation suggestion condition may be satisfied at the same time in the normal state. In this case, the pseudo-continuous notice effect that requires a larger number of button icons 4000 is executed. Therefore, each symbol stop operation is preferentially prompted. On the other hand, since the executable game state is different between the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the chance eye notice effect, the operation suggesting condition is not satisfied at the same time.

  Even if the number of button icons 4000 displayed in the normal state is three or more, the chance eye notice effect is not executed in the normal state, so that the characters “cut-in” 4000a and “pseudo-continuous” are displayed. The character 4000b is displayed, but the “chance eye” character 4000c is not displayed. Even if the number of button icons 4000 displayed in the probability change state or the time-short state is three or more, the pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed in the probability change state or the time-short state. The characters 4000a and “chance eyes” 4000c are displayed, but the characters “pseudo-continuous” 4000b are not displayed.

  Thus, according to the gaming state when the game ball is won in the general winning opening, the type of the specific effect to be notified, that is, the type of the specific effect that can be executed, is appropriately changed according to the gaming state. It becomes possible to make interest different.

  In this production form, a notice production that requires a larger number of button icons 4000 is preferentially executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Priority may be given to execution. For example, when an operation suggestion condition for a cut-in notice effect and an operation suggestion condition for a pseudo-continuous notice effect are established for the same variable display game, a notice effect with a higher percentage of big hits (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) ) Should be prioritized.

[52nd production form]
In the 52nd effect form shown in FIG. 40, unlike the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, the button icon 4000 is not displayed according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and the game ball to the general winning opening is displayed. Whether or not to display any of the characters 4000a to 4000c for each winning prize, and in the case of displaying, the “cut-in” character 4000a, the “pseudo-ream” character 4000b, and the “chance eye” character 4000c. Which of these is to be displayed is determined. In FIG. 41 (A), whether or not to display any of the characters 4000a to 4000c in accordance with winning in each general winning opening, and to display any of the characters 4000a to 4000c. The display information determination table for determining is shown.

  When the game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A, the performance control CPU 120 determines to display the characters “cut-in” 4000a on the screen at a rate of 25%, and at a rate of 75%, It is decided to display the character 4000b of "pseudo ream" on the screen. In addition, when a game ball is won in the second general winning opening 50B, it is determined that none of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and the character “cut-in” 4000a is set at a rate of 25%. It is determined to be displayed on the screen, and the “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b is determined to be displayed on the screen at a rate of 25%.

  Further, when a game ball is won in the third general winning opening 50C, it is determined that none of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 80%, and the character “cut-in” 4000a is set at a rate of 10%. It is determined to be displayed on the screen, and it is determined to display the character “cance chance” 4000c on the screen at a rate of 10%. In addition, when a game ball is won in the fourth general winning opening 50D, it is determined that none of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 70%, and the character “cut-in” 4000a is set at a rate of 10%. It is determined to be displayed on the screen, and the character 4000c of “chance” is determined to be displayed on the screen at a rate of 20%.

  Similarly to the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form described above, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started in a state where the character “cut-in” 4000a is displayed, the continuous hitting operation is performed. A cut-in notice effect is executed in response to a continuous hitting operation, and a variable display game of a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more is started in a state in which the “pseudo-continuous” character 4000b is displayed. In such a case, it is notified that each symbol stop operation is performed, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed in accordance with each symbol stop operation, and the reach variation pattern is changed in a state where the character 4000c of “chance eyes” is displayed. If the display game is put on hold and all the variable display games executed before that are non-reach variation patterns, a notification is made to perform all symbol stop operations, To run the chance eyes announcement attraction in accordance with the symbol stop operation.

  In the example of FIG. 41A, when a game ball is won in the first general winning opening 50A, one of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 100%, and a gaming ball is displayed in the second general winning opening 50B. When winning, one of characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and when a game ball is won at the third general winning opening 50C, one of characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 20%. When a game ball wins in the fourth general winning opening 50C, any one of characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of 30%.

  In this way, depending on the general winning award that the game ball has won, the ratio of the notification of the type of the specific effect that can be executed and the ratio that the specific effect can be executed differ, so that It is possible to improve interest by focusing on whether a game ball enters.

  Also, the game ball launched into the left game area 10A is easier to win the second general prize opening 50B than the first general prize opening 50A, and the game ball launched into the right game area 10B is the fourth general prize opening. If it is configured to make it easier to win the third general winning opening 50C than 50D, it is more difficult to win the general winning opening (if the normal state, the first general winning opening 50A, if the probability change state or the short time state) When a game ball wins the fourth general winning opening 50D), the ratio of executing the specific effect is high.

  In addition, when a game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B, there is a possibility that either “cut-in” character 4000a or “pseudo-ream” character 4000b is displayed. However, the “4000 chance” character 4000c is not displayed. On the other hand, when a game ball has won a prize in the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D, there is a possibility that either “cut-in” character 4000a or “chance eye” character 4000c is displayed. However, the “pseudo-ream” character 4000b is not displayed.

  In this way, depending on the general winning opening that the game ball has won, the notification mode of the specific effect that can be executed and the type of the specific effect that can be executed are different, so that the game ball enters any of the general winning ports. You can pay attention to what you do and improve your interest.

  Further, when the gaming state is the normal state, a gaming ball is fired to the left gaming area 10A, and when the gaming state is the probability changing state or the short time state, the gaming ball is fired to the right gaming area 10B. In the normal state in which a game ball wins the 50A or the second general winning opening 50B, the characters 4000a to 4000c are more likely than the probability change state or the short time state in which the gaming ball wins the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D. Is displayed at a high rate, and the execution rate of the specific effect is high.

  Since the interest is likely to decrease when the gaming state is the normal state, the interest reduction is prevented by increasing the rate at which the characters 4000a to 4000c appear and the rate at which the specific performance is executed. On the other hand, when the game state is in the probabilistic state or in the short-time state, the player's interest is directed to the special game or the ordinary game. Therefore, the rate at which the characters 4000a to 4000c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is executed are set lower than the normal state. In this way, it is possible to appropriately change the interest of a game ball to win a general winning opening according to the game state.

  Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 41A, when the gaming state is in the probable change state or in the short-time state, the ratio or the specific effect in which the characters 4000a to 4000c appear than in the normal state. The ratio may be increased. In contrast to the example shown in FIG. 41A, when a game ball wins the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening 50D, the first general winning is achieved. The characters 4000a to 4000c may be displayed at a higher rate than when the game ball is won in the mouth 50A or the second general winning opening 50B. In FIG. 41 (A), the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed only at the time of winning the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening 50B, but similarly, the third general winning opening 50C. Or you may make it provide the specific production which can be performed only at the time of winning a prize to the 4th general winning opening 50D.

  In addition to the example shown in FIG. 41 (A), as shown in FIG. 41 (B), a game ball won in each of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. When the game state at the time is the normal state, the rate at which the characters 4000a to 4000c appear or the rate at which the specific performance is executed is greater than the case where the game state when the game ball is won is a probability change state or a short time state. You may make it raise. Contrary to the example shown in FIG. 41 (B), when a game ball is won at each general winning opening in the normal state when a game ball is won at each general winning opening in the probability variation state or the short time state. The characters 4000a to 4000c may be displayed at a higher rate. Further, in FIG. 41B, a specific effect that can be executed only when the gaming state is the normal state may be provided, and the specific effect that can be executed only when the gaming state is the probability change state or the short-time state. May be provided.

  In addition, according to whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state or the time-short state, not limited to the example in which the rate of displaying the characters 4000a to 4000c and the rate of executing the specific performance is different, For example, whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, whether or not the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state has reached a predetermined number, the number of consecutive jackpot gaming states (the number of consecutive = the end of the jackpot gaming state) Whether or not the number of consecutive big hit gaming states that are controlled to a probabilistic state or a short time state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, whether or not a variable display game whose display result is a lost combination has continued a predetermined number of times, The character 4000a depends on other conditions such as whether or not the variable display game of the variation pattern of “reach” (“losing without reach”) has continued a predetermined number of times, whether the number of reserved memories has reached a predetermined number, or the like. Ratio and the specific effect that 4000c is displayed may be made different proportions to be executed.

[Display area of each image on the screen of the image display device 5]
The display area of each image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be set as follows. Hereinafter, the maximum width of an image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is (X + 1) pixels, and the maximum height is (Y + 1) pixels. The coordinates of the pixel at the upper left corner of the display screen are (0, 0), and the coordinates of the pixel at the lower right corner of the display screen are (X, Y). At this time, as shown in FIG. 42A, a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a + 1, 0) And a rectangular area defined with coordinates (X, Y) as vertices is defined as a second area β. There is no overlapping area between the first area α and the second area β. In this example, the second area β is a larger area than the first area α.

  In the first area α, prizes related to the number of prizes received at each prize opening, such as the number of prizes received at the general prize opening, the number of prizes received at the first start prize opening, and the number of prizes received at the second start prize opening, etc. Number information can be displayed. In the second area β, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), an error message display area 5E, fourth symbol display areas 5A, 5B, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and a start winning memory display area 5H. Is provided. 42 and 43, the background image can be visually recognized in the second area β, but the background image cannot be visually recognized in the first area α.

  In this example, the entire background image stored in the ROM 121 as effect data has an overall width of (X + 1) pixels, as shown in FIGS. In this image, the height is (Y + 1) pixels, the character D is climbing near the top of the mountain, and the character E is climbing near the foot of the mountain. In the examples of FIGS. 42B, 43C, and 43E, 43F, the entire background image region [rectangular region defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] Of these, only the area corresponding to the second area β [rectangular area defined with coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices) is visible to the player. Of the entire background image area, the area corresponding to the first area α [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices) is invisible to the player.

  Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 42B, 42C and 43E, 43F, the player is defined with the coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. The character D included in the rectangular area can be visually recognized, but the character E included in the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is not visible.

  42 (b) (c) and 43 (e) (f), in the first area α, (1) “Today's number of general winnings” which is the total number of winnings to the general winning opening on that day. (2) “Today's navel winning number” which is the total number of winnings at the first starting prize opening on that day, and (3) “Today's total number of winnings at the second starting winning prize opening” Three items of “Den-chu winning number” are displayed.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 wins a game ball in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D when a winning in the general winning opening occurs. When a general prize opening designation command is received to specify whether the game ball is won at the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening when a winning at the starting prize opening occurs, the starting prize is designated. A mouth designation command is received. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can individually count the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening. In this example, (1) “Today's general prize number” is 70, (2) “Today's navel prize number” is 521, and (3) “Today's electronic Chu prize number” is 217. In this way, by displaying the number of prizes received at the general prize opening and the number of prizes received at the start prize opening in a comparable manner, it is possible to relatively grasp the winning situation at each prize opening.

  In the example of FIGS. 42B and 43E, the fourth symbol for the first special figure is variably displayed in the fourth symbol display area 5A in the second area β. The decorative symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a round object is displayed at the left end as one hold information corresponding to one special figure game hold. The image of the fourth symbol during variable display, the image of the decorative symbol during variable display, and the image of the hold information are all displayed only in the second area β.

  The fourth symbol display layer, the decorative symbol display layer, and the hold information display layer are all higher than the background image display layer. Here, when the display layer of a certain image is higher than the display layer of another image, when a certain image and another image are displayed in a superimposed manner, the visibility of a certain image is reduced. This means that display control is given priority over the performance. Specifically, in the examples of FIGS. 42B, 42C, and 43E, 43F, the region where the images of the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information are displayed and one of the background images. In this case, with respect to the overlapping area, the 4th pattern, the decorative pattern, and the hold information whose display layer is higher than the background image are easily visible (including visible). On the other hand, display control is performed to make the background image difficult to view (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information appear to be displayed in front of the background image (player side).

  In this embodiment, the error message display layer is higher than the decorative symbol display layer. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 43 (f), the area where the decorative design is displayed and the area where the error message is displayed overlap, but in this case, the overlapping area is displayed. With regard to, the display control is performed so that an error message whose display layer is higher than the decorative symbol is easily visible (including visible), and the decorative symbol is difficult to visually recognize (including invisible). Accordingly, when viewed from the player, the error message appears to be displayed in front of the decorative design (player side).

  As a display control for enabling the player to visually recognize only the area corresponding to the second area β among the entire area of the background image, only the area corresponding to the second area β of the entire background image is displayed in the background. An area corresponding to the first area α is set as the display layer of the image, and an area corresponding to the first area α is not set as the display layer of the background image (that is, [coordinate (a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, (Rectangular area defined with Y) as the apex] may be used).

  In addition, as another display control for allowing only the area corresponding to the second area β to be visible to the player among the entire area of the background image, the entire area of the background image is set as the display layer of the background image (that is, In the display layer higher than the display layer of the background image, the entire background image [using the image data of the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices) is used. By setting another background image (for example, a white, plain image) for winning number information in the area corresponding to the area α, the area corresponding to the first area α of the background image of the lower display layer cannot be visually recognized. Anyway. In such a configuration, it is easy to see a predetermined transmittance (an image of a display layer below the display layer) on another background image (for example, a white and plain image) for winning number information. , The image of the lower display layer may be visible, and the background image of the lower display layer can be set by setting a predetermined transmittance. An area corresponding to the first area α can be visually recognized, and the character E can be visually recognized.

  In addition, the display layer of the winning information displayed in the first area α is higher than the display layer of other information that can be displayed in the first area α. Therefore, the visibility of the winning information is not reduced by displaying other information in the first area α. In addition, the display layer of the winning information may be the same display layer as the error message in which the display area does not exist in the first area α, or may be a higher display layer than the error message. May be a lower display layer. For example, the display layer for the number-of-wins information is the highest among all the display layers, and is displayed in a display area for other information (displayed in the first area α or the second area β). Regardless, the visibility may not be lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (b), since the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are all performed in the second area β, these images are displayed. Depending on what is displayed on the image display device 5, the number of winnings to the general winning opening (“the number of general winnings of the day”) as the winning number information displayed in the first area α, the first start winnings The visibility of the number of winnings to the mouth ("Today's navel winning number") and the number of winnings to the second start winning opening ("Today's electric Chu winnings") are not hindered. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information.

  When the image display device 5 is performing variable display of the fourth symbol, variable display of the decorative symbol, and display of the hold information, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, FIG. As shown in d), based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the general winning award designation command, the number of winnings in the general winning award displayed in the first area α (“the number of general winnings today”). Is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs while the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are performed, the general winning displayed in the first area α is displayed. The number of winnings in the mouth is updated without impeding visibility. That is, the visibility when the winning information is updated is not hindered by the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred and as a result that the number of winning in the general winning opening has been updated.

  When the special symbol variable display ends and the display result is stopped, the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is ended and the display result is stopped, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the variable display of decorative symbols is also terminated and the display result is stopped. In this example, it is assumed that the 4th symbol display area 5A is lit (displayed) in a display color that reminds of a disengagement (the display result is stopped and displayed). The off symbol that becomes “5, 3, 1” is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), the fourth symbol is displayed in a stopped state (in a state where the display result is derived and displayed) and is stopped and displayed (the display result is derived and displayed). Since all the decorative symbols (in the state) are displayed in the second area β, the number of winnings displayed in the first area α depending on the display of these images on the image display device 5. Information on the number of prizes received at the general prize opening ("Today's number of general prizes"), the number of prizes at the first start prize opening ("Number of navel prizes of today"), and the prize at the second start prize opening Visibility of the number ("Dai Chu Chu winnings today") is not hindered. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain the number-of-wins information appropriately irrespective of the stop display of a 4th symbol, and the stop display of a decoration symbol.

  Then, in the image display device 5, when a stop for the fourth symbol and a stop symbol for the decorative symbol are being displayed, if a winning in the general winning opening occurs, as shown in FIG. 42 (d). Based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the general prize opening designation command, the number of winning prizes (“the number of today's general prizes”) displayed in the first area α is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs when the stop display of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol are stopped, the number of winnings in the general winning slot displayed in the first area α is calculated. , Updated without disturbing visibility. That is, the visibility when the winning information is updated is not hindered by the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred and as a result that the number of winning in the general winning opening has been updated.

  42B, 42C, and 42D, an example is shown in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without impeding visibility, but the first starting winning opening is shown. In the same way as in the case of the general winning opening, the winning in the first starting winning opening is performed regardless of the variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol. The number is updated without impeding visibility. In addition, even when a winning to the second start winning a prize occurs, as in the case of the general winning a prize, regardless of the variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol, and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol, The number of winnings in the second start winning opening is updated without impeding visibility.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 (e) and 43 (f), when the production control CPU 120 receives an abnormality detection designation command for designating that an abnormality has occurred, an error message (in this example, “an error has occurred”) is displayed. Is displayed). As described above, the error message display layer is higher than the decorative symbol display layer. For this reason, when the decoration control CPU 120 receives an abnormality detection designation command when the decorative design is variably displayed or when the decorative design is stopped, an area for displaying the decorative design and an error are displayed. With respect to the overlapping range with the area where the message is displayed, display control is performed to make the error message easy to see (including visible) and make the decorative symbol difficult to view (including invisible). Therefore, in the example of FIG. 43B, when viewed from the player, the error message is closer to the player (side of the player) than the decorative symbol that is variably displayed (or the decorative symbol that is stopped). Looks like it is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (f), since the error message is displayed in the second area β, the fact that the error message is displayed on the image display device 5 indicates that the error message is displayed in the first area α. As the information on the number of winnings displayed in the above, the number of winnings in the general winning opening (“the number of general winnings of the day”), the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening (“the number of navel winnings of the day”), The visibility of the number of winnings at the 2 start winning award (“Today's electric Chu winnings”) is not hindered. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the display of the error message.

  In the image display device 5, when an error message is displayed, if a winning in the general winning opening occurs, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Based on the receipt of the mouth designation command, the number of wins to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α (“the number of general winnings of the day”) is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs while the error message is displayed, the visibility of the number of winning in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is not hindered. Updated. That is, depending on the display of the error message, the visibility when winning information is updated is not hindered. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred and as a result that the number of winning in the general winning opening has been updated.

  In the example of FIGS. 43 (f) and 43 (g), an example is shown in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without impeding visibility, but the winning in the first starting winning opening is shown. Even when it occurs, the number of winnings to the first start winning opening is updated without impeding visibility, regardless of the display of the error message, as in the case of the general winning opening. In addition, even when a prize is awarded to the second starting prize opening, the visibility of the number of winnings to the second starting prize opening is hindered regardless of the display of an error message, as in the case of the general winning prize opening. Updated without any changes.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 43 (f), the characters “An error has occurred” for notifying that an abnormality has occurred are displayed based on the reception of the abnormality detection designation command. Not limited to this, different error messages may be displayed depending on the type of abnormality designated by the abnormality detection designation command. For example, when an abnormality detection designation command is received that specifies that a magnetic abnormality has occurred, the message “Magnetic error has occurred” is displayed, and an abnormality detection designation command that specifies that a vibration abnormality has occurred is received. Sometimes the message “Vibration error has occurred” may be displayed, and when an error detection designation command is received that specifies that a radio wave error has occurred, the message “A radio wave error has occurred” may be displayed. .

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 42A, a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a + 1) are defined. , 0) and a rectangular area defined with coordinates (X, Y) as vertices are defined as the second area β, but the first area in which the winning information can be displayed, the decorative design, the fourth design, and the hold The second area where information and error messages can be displayed is not limited to a rectangular area, but may be any area that does not overlap each other on the screen.

(Display / Hide setting for winning information)
As described with reference to FIG. 4, the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is operated by opening the glass door frame 3a forward (operating by a game hall clerk but not by a player). Position), and on the player setting screen (see FIG. 5), when the setting for displaying the number of winnings to the general winning opening is made by the player's operation, The number-of-wins information related to the number of winnings is to be displayed.

  The example shown in FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 is a display mode of the screen in a state where the setting for displaying the winning number information is performed in this way, and when the setting for displaying the winning number information is performed. In the first area α, not only the number of winning in the general winning opening, but also the number of winning in the first starting winning opening (so-called “Hesso”) and winning in the second starting winning opening (so-called “Den Chu”). The number is also displayed. In other words, according to the operation of the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings at the first start winning opening and the number of winnings at the second starting winning opening.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 4, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to non-display (first position), the number-of-winning information (the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed by the operation button 30. The number-of-wins information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 regardless of whether or not the setting for displaying the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is performed. Do not show. Further, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to display setting (second position), when the setting for displaying the winning information is not performed by the operation button 30 (in the case of non-display setting) ) Is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

  The examples shown in FIGS. 44 (b) and 44 (c) are screen display modes in a state in which the setting for not displaying the winning number information is performed as described above, and the setting for not displaying the winning number information is performed. In the first area α, the number of winnings for the general winning opening is not displayed, but the number of winnings for the first starting winning opening (so-called “heso”) and the second starting winning opening (so-called “electric chew”) are displayed. The number of winnings is not displayed.

  In this way, it is possible to set whether or not to display winning information according to the setting operation on the game hall side and according to the setting operation on the player side. In addition, the number-of-wins information can be displayed according to the judgment of the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 (a), (b), and (c), when the setting for not displaying the winning number information is made, the error message display area 5E, compared with the setting for displaying the winning number information, The fourth symbol display areas 5A and 5B, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and the start winning memory display area 5H are common. That is, the display position and display range (image size) of each image of the error message, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information displayed in the second area β are set to display the winning information and the number of winnings. It does not change with the setting not to display information. This simplifies the display control associated with the setting change for setting whether or not to display the winning information.

  On the other hand, when it is set not to display the winning number information, as shown in FIGS. 44A, 44B and 44C, it is set to display the winning number information (display examples in FIGS. 42 and 43). In contrast, the background image is visible in the first area α and the second area β. 44A, 44B, and 44C, the first area of the entire background image [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices). An area corresponding to α [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices) and an area corresponding to the second area β [coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates ( Both of the rectangular areas defined with X, Y) as vertices, that is, the entire area of the background image is visible to the player.

  Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 44 (a), (b), and (c), the player determines that the character included in the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. In addition to being able to visually recognize D, the character E included in the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices can also be visually recognized.

  Thus, regarding the display position and display range (size of the image) of a specific image (error message, 4th symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information), the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number information are displayed. The control load is reduced by not changing (common) with the setting that does not, while the other images (background images) can be viewed with the setting that displays the winning information and the setting that does not display the winning information By making different ranges different, the interest in the case where winning information is not displayed is improved.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), in the image display device 5, when the variable display of the 4th symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are performed, the winning in the general winning opening is performed. Even when the event occurs, as shown in FIG. 44 (d), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed because the setting is made so that the winning number information is not displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), in the image display device 5, when the 4th symbol stop display and the decorative symbol stop display are performed, a case where a winning to the general winning a prize occurs also occurs. As shown in FIG. 44 (d), since the number-of-winning information is not displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed.

  In the example of FIGS. 44B, 44C, and 44D, an example in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed even when the winning in the general winning slot is generated is shown. In the case where the setting is not displayed, the number of winnings at the first starting winning opening is not displayed even when winning at the first starting winning opening occurs, and the winning at the second starting winning opening occurs. However, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is not displayed. In this manner, whether or not to display the number of winnings at each winning opening can be set according to the player's operation.

(Each item in the winning information)
FIG. 45 shows an example of items of winning number information that can be displayed in the first area α. FIG. 45 shows items related to the number of prizes received at the general prize opening. Similarly, items related to the number of prizes received at the first start prize opening and to the second start prize opening. Items related to the number of winnings can be displayed in the first area α.

  It is possible to display “today's number of general winnings (A1)”, which is the total value of the number of winnings in each general winning opening since the power-on of the gaming machine. The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and increments the value of the general winning number counter by 1 every time a general winning opening designation command is received. By doing so, A1 can be tabulated.

  In addition, it is possible to display “today's general winning ratio (A2)”, which is the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs since the power-on of the gaming machine. The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the out number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and sets the value of the out number counter every time a detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. By adding one by one, the total number of outs can be tabulated, and by calculating the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs, A2 can be tabulated.

  In addition, it is possible to display “today's general award ball number (referred to as A3)”, which is the total number of award balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening since the power-on of the gaming machine. In addition, it is possible to display “today's general prize ball ratio (referred to as A4)”, which is the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls since the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

  The ROM 121 stores the number of winning balls determined for each of the first starting winning port, the second starting winning port, the first general winning port 50A to the fourth general winning port 50D, and the big winning port. . The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and the general prize opening designation command is designated every time a general prize opening designation command is received. By adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening to the value of the general winning ball number counter, A3 can be tabulated. In addition, when the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0, the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening The total number of winning balls can be totaled by adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port specified by each command to the value of the winning ball counter every time a command is received for a large winning port that specifies winning. Thus, A4 can be tabulated by calculating the ratio of A3 to the total number of winning balls.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies whether the current gaming state is the low base state or the high base state by designating the gaming state by the gaming state designation command, and wins in the low base state. The number information (B1 to B4) and the winning number information (C1 to C4) in the high base state can be divided and tabulated.

  Specifically, it is possible to display “the number of general winnings in the low base state (referred to as B1)” that is the total value of the number of winnings in each general winning opening in the low base state, and each general winning opening in the high base state It is possible to display “the number of general winnings in the high base state (referred to as C1)”, which is the total value of the number of winnings.

  When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the low base medium general winning number counter stored in the RAM 122 and the value of the high base medium general winning number counter to 0. . Then, during the period when the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designation command is the normal state, B1 is added by incrementing the value of the low base medium general winning number counter by 1 every time the general winning opening designation command is received. During the period when the gaming state specified by the received gaming state designation command is either the probability change state or the short time state, the value of the high base medium general winning number counter is received every time a general winning mouth designation command is received. By adding one by one, C1 can be tabulated.

  In addition, it is possible to display the “low base state general winning ratio (referred to as B2)” that is the ratio of B1 to the number of outs in the low base state, and the ratio of C1 to the number of outs in the high base state It is possible to display “a general winning ratio in a high base state (C2)”.

  It is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 sets both the low base medium out number counter value and the high base medium out number counter value stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on. And, in the normal state, the low base medium out number can be counted by adding the value of the low base medium out number counter by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out sphere detector is received, B2 can be tabulated by calculating the ratio of B1 to the number of low base medium outs. On the other hand, in the probability variation state or the short time state, the high base medium out number can be counted by adding one value to the high base medium out number counter every time a detection signal output from the out sphere detector is received. It is possible to count C2 by calculating the ratio of C1 to the number of high base medium outs.

  In addition, it is possible to display “the number of general prize balls in the low base state (referred to as B3)”, which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening in the low base state. It is possible to display “the number of general winning balls in the high base state (referred to as C3)”, which is the total value of the number of winning balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening in the state.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the low base medium general prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on. And Then, during the period in which the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designation command is the normal state, the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning mouth designated by the received general winning mouth designation command is displayed as a low base medium general winning ball number counter. B3 (“the number of general prize balls in the low base state”) can be counted by adding to the value of the game state, and the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designation command is either the probability variation state or the short-time state. The period is determined by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize opening specified by the received general prize designation command to the value of the high base medium general prize ball counter, so that C3 ("the number of general prize balls in the high base state" ") Can be tabulated.

  In addition, it is possible to display “a ratio of the general prize ball in the low base state (referred to as B4)”, which is a ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in the low base state, and It is possible to display the “high base state general prize ball ratio (referred to as C4)” which is the ratio of C3.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the low base medium prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on. . In the normal state, each time the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the large winning mouth prize command are received, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning mouth designated by each command is reduced to the low base middle prize. By adding to the value of the ball counter, the number of low base medium award balls can be tabulated, and by calculating the ratio of B3 to the number of low base medium award balls, B4 (“low base state General prize ball ratio ") can be tabulated. On the other hand, in the probability change state or the short-time state, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning mouth designated by each command is increased every time the start winning mouth designation command, the general winning mouth designation command, and the large winning prize designation command are received. By adding to the value of the base middle prize ball number counter, the number of high base middle prize balls can be tabulated, and by calculating the ratio of C3 to the number of high base middle prize balls, C4 (“high It is possible to tabulate the general award ball ratio in the base state.

  As described above, information related to the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be tabulated for each gaming state, so that the player can grasp information according to the current gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is the low base state (normal state), focus on the items B1 to B4, and when the gaming state is the high base state (probability change state or short time state), focus on the items C1 to C4. Become.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the items B1 to B4 in the first area α when the gaming state is in the low base state, while not displaying the items C1 to C4, and when the gaming state is in the high base state. The items C1 to C4 may be displayed in the first area α, while the items B1 to B4 may not be displayed. Although the items B1 to B4 and the items C1 to C4 are displayed in the first area α regardless of the gaming state, the items B1 to B4 are more visible than the items C1 to C4 in the low base state. In a high base state, the items C1 to C4 may be displayed in a manner that is easier to visually recognize (for example, larger) than the items B1 to B4.

(Aggregation of winning information during the set period)
In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can count the number-of-wins information in the period set by the player, and the “total number of winnings in the set period ( D1) ”can be displayed in the first area α.

  When the tabulation period corresponding to the player's operation shown in FIG. 46 described later is set, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 and the tabulation. The timer value is set to a set period (total period according to the player's operation), and the total timer is started. Each time a general prize opening designation command is received, the value of the general winning number counter is incremented by 1 during the set period, and the general prize is received during the set period when the total timer times out (when the set total period has elapsed). The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D1.

  In addition, while the number of outs is increasing (for example, within a predetermined period since the detection signal was last received from the out-sphere detector), the counting timer is updated, while the number of outs is not increasing (for example, After a predetermined period has elapsed since the detection signal was last received from the out-sphere detector, the counting timer may not be updated and may be stopped. In this way, a period during which the game ball is not being launched into the game area 10 may be excluded from the counting period.

  When the counting timer times out and D1 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general winning number counter is reset to 0 again during the setting period, and the value of the counting timer is again set to the setting period (player's The counting timer is set again at the counting period according to the operation). The value of the general winning number counter during the set period is added every time a general winning opening designation command is received, and the general winning number counter during the set period when the counting timer times out again (when the set counting period has elapsed again). Is displayed in the first area α as D1. Thus, D1 corresponding to the counting period is displayed for each counting period set by the player.

  In addition, it is possible to display a “general winning ratio (set as D2) for the set period” which is a ratio of D1 to the number of game machine outs in the set period. When the value of the general winning number counter during the set period stored in the RAM 122 is set to 0, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the out number counter during the set period stored in the RAM 122 to 0. The number of outs in the set period can be totaled by adding the value of the out number counter during the set period every time a detection signal output from the out-sphere detector is received. D2 can be tabulated by calculating the ratio of D1 to the number of outs in the period.

  Further, it is possible to display “the number of general prize balls in the set period (denoted as D3)”, which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in each general prize opening in the set period. Further, it is possible to display “general prize ball ratio (D4) in the set period” which is a ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period.

  When the aggregation period corresponding to the player's operation shown in FIG. 46, which will be described later, is set, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0, and The value of the total timer is set to a set period (total period according to the player's operation), and the total timer is started. Each time a general winning award designation command is received, the total number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning prize designated by the general winning award designation command is added to the value of the general prize winning number counter during the set period, and the counting timer The value of the general prize ball number counter during the set period when time-out occurs (when the set counting period elapses) is displayed in the first area α as D3.

  When the counting timer times out and D3 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general prize ball number counter is reset to 0 again during the setting period, and the value of the counting timer is again set to the setting period (player). The counting timer is restarted, and the counting timer starts again. Then, every time a general winning opening designation command is received, the value of the general prize ball counter during the set period is added, and the general prize ball during the set period when the total timer times out again (when the set total period elapses again). The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D3. Thus, D3 corresponding to the total period is displayed for each total period set by the player.

  When the value of the general prize ball number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 122 is set to 0, the effect control CPU 120 also sets the prize ball number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 122. Is set to 0, and each time a winning prize designation command is specified, each time a start prize designation command, a general prize designation command, or a big prize entry command specifying a prize to the big prize opening is received. Is added to the value of the prize ball number counter during the set period, so that the number of prize balls in the set period can be tabulated, and the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period D4 can be tabulated by calculating.

  It should be noted that the general prize opening designation command received by the effect control CPU 120 is to designate which general prize opening the game ball has won, so that the effect control CPU 120 has the first general prize opening 50A to No. 4 Total number of winnings to the general winning opening 50D is individually counted, and the items corresponding to A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, and D1 to D4 are counted for each general winning opening, and the total value is obtained. It is possible to display in the first area α.

  Each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening Which of the items is displayed in the first area α may be automatically determined according to the gaming state or the like. For example, the items B1 to B4 may be displayed in the low base state, and C1 to C4 may be displayed in the high base state. In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening Which of the related items is displayed in the first area α may be selectable by an operation on the game hall side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30). The selection may be made by the above operation (for example, the operation using the operation button 30).

  In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening For each related item, a reference value corresponding to each item is provided, and the ROM 121 stores the reference value in association with each item. Therefore, the CPU 120 for effect control checks whether or not the total value of the item displayed in the first area α has reached the reference value of the item, and if the total value does not reach the reference value As shown in FIG. 46 (4), which will be described later, it is possible to display a message notifying that the total value of the item displayed in the first area α has not reached the reference value of the item. . Thereby, the player grasps whether or not the total value of the item displayed in the first area α is an advantageous value as compared with the reference value of the item, and selects the gaming machine. It can be used as a judgment material (whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine).

  Next, a method for setting the aggregation period will be described with reference to FIG. For example, the totaling period setting screen in FIG. 46 sets the totaling period when selection is made to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the selection screen in FIG. This is a screen that is displayed when the selection screen for selecting whether or not is selected and the selection to set the aggregation period is made on the selection screen (when the intention to set the aggregation period is confirmed) And

  In the setting screen of FIG. 46 (1), a message “Please set the total period” is displayed, and an image simulating the operation button 30 is displayed below the message. On the setting screen, an icon including the characters “10 minutes”, an icon including the characters “30 minutes”, and an icon including the characters “60 minutes” are displayed, and the button is “determine button after selecting with the jog dial”. A message is displayed, and an arrow that prompts the user to press the operation button 30 (jog dial) after rotating it is displayed.

  When setting the total period to 10 minutes, when the operation button 30 is pressed while the icon including the characters “10 minutes” is selected by rotating the operation button 30 (jog dial) to the left, the “setting” The message “The period is 10 minutes” is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 10 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 10 minutes. Also, when the total period is set to 30 minutes, as shown in FIG. 46 (1), when the operation button 30 is pressed while an icon including the characters “30 minutes” is selected, FIG. 46 (2). As shown in FIG. 5, a message “Setting period is 30 minutes” is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 30 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 30 minutes. Further, when setting the total period to 60 minutes, when the operation button 30 is pressed while the icon including the characters “60 minutes” is selected by rotating the operation button 30 (jog dial) to the right, The message “Setting period is 60 minutes” is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 60 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 60 minutes.

  Thus, it is possible to set a desired total period according to the player's operation. In the example of FIG. 46, 30 minutes is set as the total period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (3), in the first area α, the number of winnings in the general winning opening per 30 minutes is displayed as “the number of winnings in the set period (D1)”. In the example of FIG. 46 (3), 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the total value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is Since it is 37, the total value exceeds the reference value. Accordingly, there is no notification that the total value has not reached the reference value.

  On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 46 (4), 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is counted. Since the value is 29, the total value does not reach the reference value. Therefore, a notification that the total value has not reached the reference value (display of a message “below the reference value (30 times / 30 minutes)”) is made.

(Items related to the number of prizes received at the start prize opening)
The production control CPU 120 receives a start winning port designation command for designating which one of the first start winning port and the second starting winning port is won when a winning to the start winning port occurs. By the same method as the totaling process when receiving a general winning opening designation command for designating which of the first to fourth general winning openings, the “number of wins to the first starting winning opening of today (in A1 “Equivalent)”, “award ratio to today's first start winning opening (corresponding to A2)”, “the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning to the first start winning opening today (corresponding to A3)”, And “the ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning of today's first starting winning opening to the total number of winning balls of today (corresponding to A4)” and “the second starting winning opening of today No. of winnings (equivalent to A1) ”,“ Today's 2nd starting prize winning ratio "Equivalent to A2)", "the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning of the second starting winning opening today (corresponding to A3)", and "the second starting of today against the total number of winning balls of today" The ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on winning in the winning opening (corresponding to A4) ”can be totaled and displayed in the first area α.

  Also, “the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B1)”, “the winning ratio in the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B2)”, “the number of winning in the low base state” The number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the 1st prize opening (corresponding to B3) "and" the number of prize balls given in the low base condition to the first starting prize opening in the low base state "Percentage of winning balls awarded based on winning (corresponding to B4)", "Number of winnings in second starting winning opening in low base state (corresponding to B1)", "Second starting in low base state" Winning ratio to the winning opening (equivalent to B2) "," Number of winning balls awarded based on winning at the second starting winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B3) ", and" Low base state " In the low base state for the number of winning balls 2 ratio of starting prize counts granted under the winning to winning opening (corresponding to B4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  Also, “the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C1)”, “the winning ratio in the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C2)”, “the number of winning in the high base state” The number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the 1st start prize opening (corresponding to C3) "and" the number of prize balls given in the high base state to the first start prize opening in the high base state “Percentage of winning balls awarded based on winning (corresponding to C4)”, “Number of winnings in second starting winning opening in high base state (corresponding to C1)”, “Second starting in high base state “Award ratio to the winning opening (corresponding to C2)”, “Number of winning balls awarded based on winning in the second starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C3)”, and “Awarding in the high base state” In a high base state for the number of winning balls 2 ratio of starting prize counts granted under the winning to winning opening (corresponding to C4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  In addition, “the number of winnings in the first start winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D1)”, “the winning ratio in the first starting winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D2)”, “the first starting winning in the setting period” Awarded based on the number of winning balls awarded based on winning in the mouth (corresponding to D3), and “based on winning in the first start winning mouth in the setting period with respect to the number of winning balls given in the setting period” "Percentage of winning balls (corresponding to D4)", "Number of winnings in the second start winning opening during the setting period (corresponding to D1)", "Winning ratio for the second starting winning opening during the setting period ( D2) ”,“ the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the second start winning opening during the setting period (corresponding to D3) ”, and“ setting for the number of prize balls given during the setting period ” Awarded based on winning the 2nd starting prize opening during the period Percentage of winning balls number (corresponding to D4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

(Modification regarding display control of winning information and display items)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which items related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the first starting winning opening, and the second starting winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, an item related to the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 41A and 41B may be displayed in the first area α. When the game ball passes through the gates 41A and 41B, a pass gate designation command for designating which gate the game ball has passed through is sent from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the production control board 12 (production). By transmitting to the control CPU 120), the effect control CPU 120 can count the number of times that the game ball has passed through the gates 41A and 41B and display it in the first area α.

  For example, the number of times the gate has passed today (corresponding to A1), today's gate, by the same method as the totaling process when receiving a general prize opening designation command designating which of the first to fourth general prize openings has been won Gate pass ratio (corresponding to A2), low base state gate pass count (corresponding to B1), low base state gate pass ratio (corresponding to B2), high base state gate pass count (corresponding to C1), high base The gate passage ratio in the state (corresponding to C2), the number of gate passages in the setting period (corresponding to D1), and the gate passage ratio in the setting period (corresponding to D2) can be totaled and displayed in the first area α. . Moreover, these items can be totaled for each gate (with respect to each of the gates 41A and 41B) and displayed in the first area α.

  (2) In addition, the production control CPU 120 receives the grand prize winning command from the game control microcomputer 100, and therefore can count the number of winning prizes in the big prize winning slot and also win the prize winning prize. The number of awarded prize balls based on the total number can be totaled and displayed in the first area α.

  For example, by the same method as the totaling process when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating which of the first to fourth general prize openings has been awarded, Equivalent) ”,“ Today ’s winning prize ratio (corresponding to A2) ”,“ Today's winning ball award (corresponding to A3) ”,“ Today ’s total “Percentage of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's prize winnings with respect to the number of prize balls (corresponding to A4)”, “Number of winning prizes for the winning prizes during the set period (corresponding to D1)” , “Award ratio to the big prize opening in the setting period (corresponding to D2)”, “Number of winning balls awarded based on the winning in the big winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D3)”, and “In the setting period Granted based on winning a prize in the winning period during the set period for the number of awarded balls The percentage of winning balls number (corresponding to D4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  Here, “the ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's prize winnings with respect to today's total prize balls (corresponding to A4)” or “the prize balls awarded during the set period” When the ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on winning a prize winning in the set period with respect to the number (corresponding to D4) is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 60%), the fact is notified. You may make it do. For example, a message such as “the prize winning ball ratio exceeding the reference value (60%)” may be displayed in the first area α.

  In addition, the number of prize balls given based on winning in the second start winning opening controlled by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B with respect to the total number of winning balls and the opening / closing control by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 are performed. When the ratio of the total number of winning balls awarded based on winning in the big winning opening is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 70%), the fact may be notified. For example, in the first area α, a message such as “the prize winning ball ratio exceeds the reference value (70%)” may be displayed.

  (3) In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 calculates the number of game balls entering each entry area based on each command received from the game control microcomputer 100 when the game ball enters each entry area. Although the example which can be totaled was demonstrated, it replaced with the total of the production control CPU120, or with the totalization of the production control CPU120, in the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side, It is also possible to count the number of approaches. In the main process, the CPU 103 performs the first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general switch. A state confirmation process is performed to confirm the state of each switch (presence / absence of a detection signal) of the winning opening switch 24D.

  In the state confirmation process of each switch, it is possible to specify which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When detection signals are output from the first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B, the values of the first gate passage number counter and the second gate passage number counter are added, and the first start port switch 22A, When the detection signal is output from the second start port switch 22B, the values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, When the value of the large winning number counter is added and a detection signal is output from the first general winning port switch 24A, the second general winning port switch 24B, the third general winning port switch 24C, and the fourth general winning port switch 24D. Is added to the values of the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, the third general winning number counter, and the fourth general winning number counter, It is possible to aggregate the entry number of tricks ball. Note that the value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  In this way, the step for counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is executed together in a series of processes for checking the switch status corresponding to each entry area (included in the switch status check process). Thus, the number of game balls entering each entry area can be counted without causing a separate counting program to be executed, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. .

  The total number of game balls entering the respective entry areas (the value of the counter corresponding to each switch) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 and can be displayed on the image display device 5. For example, by outputting a command designating the total number of entries into each entry area from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 can enter each entry area based on the command. The number of approaches can be specified and displayed in the first area α.

  In addition, the display provided on the main board 11 such as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B indicates the number of entries into each entry area counted on the game control microphone colon computer 100 side. You may make it display on an apparatus. Further, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening does not reach a predetermined reference ratio, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B You may make it alert | report by performing the specific display different from the display result of the variable display of a special symbol.

  The value of each counter stored in the RAM 102 (the number of entries into each entry area) can be determined by, for example, the game state flag (probability change state, time reduction state, etc.) stored in the RAM 102 by the game control microcomputer 100. Display on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B when a reset operation for resetting the flag (according to the gaming state for playing) or the like is performed by the game hall side (for example, a store clerk). Alternatively, it may be output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12 and displayed on the image display device 5 for a certain period of time. The reset operation is an operation of a reset button (not shown) connected to the main board 11. The reset button is provided on the back side (game island side) of the game board 2 and rotates the game board 2 forward with respect to the game machine frame 3 using the hinge mechanism of the game machine frame 3. By doing so, the reset button provided on the back side of the game board 2 can be operated.

  (4) In the above embodiment, the example in which the winning number information (D1 to D4) in the counting period set by the player can be displayed in the first area α has been described. A counting period is set in the gaming machine (for example, a specific period (for example, 60 minutes) is stored or set by an operation on the game hall side), and the number of winnings in the set counting period Information (corresponding to D1 to D4) may be displayed in the first area α. For example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening per 60 minutes is totaled, the total value is displayed in the first area α, and the total value is less than a predetermined reference value (for example, 60 times / 60 minutes). In that case, you may make it alert | report that.

  (5) In addition, when a winning at a specific winning opening does not occur for a predetermined period, the fact may be notified to the first area α. For example, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening has not occurred for 10 minutes, a message “No general winning for 10 minutes” may be displayed in the first area α. The predetermined period may be set by an operation on the game hall side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30), or an operation on the player side (for example, an operation using the operation button 30). It may be possible to set by.

  (6) It should be noted that the above embodiment is also applied to a gaming machine including a sorting device in which the winning ratio to the start winning opening and the general winning opening is a specific ratio (for example, 1: 1). The number-of-wins information related to the number of winnings at each winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117434 has a configuration in which game balls received by a sorting device are alternately distributed to a first start winning opening and a second starting winning opening. By providing the distribution device, it is possible to alternately distribute the game balls received by the distribution device to the start winning port and the general winning port. The above embodiment is also applied to the gaming machine having a configuration in which the distribution device distributes the game balls alternately to the start winning opening and the general winning opening. It can be displayed in area α. However, since the number of wins to the general prize opening is automatically determined according to the number of wins to the start prize opening, the ratio of the number of wins to the general prize opening to the number of wins to the start prize opening is displayed as described above. There is no need to let them.

  (7) In FIG. 46, the counting period can be set according to the player's operation, but the winning number information is reset according to the player's operation, and the counting of the winning number information is started from the reset timing. You may do it. For example, when the player performs an operation to start counting, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is reset to 0, and thereafter, the production control CPU 120 issues a general winning opening specifying command. Each time it is received, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α may be increased by one.

  Further, the aggregation period once set may be changed according to the player's operation before the set period elapses. For example, although the aggregation period is initially set to 30 minutes, in order to quickly know the aggregation result, the player may perform a resetting operation before the set period elapses to shorten the aggregation period to 10 minutes. In addition, although the aggregation period was initially set to 10 minutes, in order to know the aggregation results for a longer period, the player performs a resetting operation before the set period elapses and extends the aggregation period to 30 minutes. Also good. Further, the set aggregation period may be extended in accordance with the player's operation after the set period has elapsed. For example, after 10 minutes, which is the set counting period, has elapsed and the counting results for 10 minutes have been displayed once, the player performs an extension operation to grasp the counting results for a longer counting period, The totaling period may be extended by 50 minutes to 60 minutes (as a result, both a 10-minute totaling result and a 60-minute totaling result including 10 minutes may be obtained).

  (8) In the first area α in the demonstration screen displayed on the image display device 5 or in the state where the game is being performed (the state where the game end determination is not made and the demonstration screen is not displayed). The image explaining whether each winning opening provided on the game board surface is the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, or the general winning opening may be displayed. Also, the number of winning balls at each winning opening may be notified.

  (9) In the above embodiment, the game hall setting has priority over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may have priority over the game hall setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. When the operation button 30 is pressed while an icon including the characters “display” is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 5 (2) so that it can be displayed on the image display device 5, winning information is displayed on the image display device 5 (The display control in FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed), and when the operation button 30 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “do not display” is selected on the selection screen in FIG. You may make it not display on the apparatus 5 (display control of FIG. 44 is performed).

  In addition, it is also possible to determine whether or not to display the winning information according to the order of the accepted setting operation, with the game hall setting and the player setting being the same priority. In other words, it may be determined whether or not the winning number information is displayed with priority given to the setting operation (last setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the winning number information is displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. When set, the winning information is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed). Moreover, even if it is set not to display the number-of-wins information on the player setting screens of FIGS. In such a case, the number-of-wins information is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position), the setting for not displaying the winning number information on the player setting screens of FIGS. In such a case, the winning information is not displayed (display control in FIG. 44 is executed). Moreover, even if it is a case where it is set as the setting which displays winning number information on the player setting screen of FIG. 5 (1)-(3), the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to 1st position (non-display position) after that. ) Is not displayed (the display control in FIG. 44 is executed).

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by operating the display changeover switch 32 by the store clerk of the game hall, and the player can select the operation button 30. It is possible to set whether or not to display the number-of-wins information on the image display device 5 by operating, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and by operating the display changeover switch 32, While it is possible to set whether or not to display winning number information on the image display device 5, the player cannot set whether or not to display winning number information on the image display device 5 (for example, FIG. 5 (1) to FIG. 5). (There is no setting screen on the player side as shown in (3)). Thus, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 only on the game hall side.

  On the contrary, it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by operating the operation button 30 by the player (and the store clerk of the game hall). There may be no means (for example, the display changeover switch 32 is not provided) that allows only the side to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible for the player and the game shop clerk to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 30). . Thus, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 by a common setting operation for the player and the game hall.

  (10) It should be noted that the winning number information relating to the number of winnings received at each winning mouth (general winning mouth, first starting winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, etc.) described with reference to FIG. A game in which the operation unit of the mode switch 31 is in the non-display position (first position) so that it is displayed on the image display device 5 only in the maintenance mode in which is the display position (second position). In the mode, it may not be displayed on the image display device 5. That is, it may be handled in the same way as the information in the winning number management table shown in FIG.

  As described above, the number-of-wins information relating to the number of winnings received at each winning mouth (general winning mouth, first starting winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, etc.) described with reference to FIG. It may be information that can be displayed on the image display device 5 only when it is performed and that the player cannot normally see. For example, a state where a player can play a game (for example, a state where a demo screen is displayed), a state where a game end determination is not performed (a state where a special game is being executed, a general game, etc.) In the state where the game is executed and the jackpot gaming state, etc., are information that is not displayed on the image display device 5, and for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute from the start of the power supply of the gaming machine, the demonstration screen is displayed. Display only before a game is performed), or when a manipulation for stopping the power supply of the gaming machine is performed, the display can be performed only for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). good.

  (11) Also, the winning number information related to the number of winnings received at each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described in FIG. 45 and the like is either in the maintenance mode or the game mode. In this mode, display on the image display device 5 may be possible. In such a configuration, in the maintenance mode, the number-of-wins information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β, whereas in the game mode, only in the first area α. The winning number information may be displayed. That is, the display area of the number-of-wins information may be different between a period in which no game is played and a period in which a game may be played.

  Also, in the maintenance mode, the total number of winning information is displayed for all items, whereas in the game mode, some items (items set by the operation of the game hall or the player, or Information on the number of winnings in a predetermined main item) may be displayed. That is, the items of the winning number information to be displayed may be different between the period in which the game is not performed and the period in which the game may be performed.

  (12) In the game mode, during the period in which the demonstration screen is displayed due to the game end determination being performed, the number-of-wins information can be displayed in the entire first area α and second area β. On the other hand, the number-of-wins information may be displayed only in the first area α during the period in which the game end determination is not performed and the game is determined to be in progress. In other words, the display area of the winning information may be different between the period in which it is determined that the game is not being performed and the period in which it is determined that the game is being performed.

  In addition, during the period when the demonstration screen is displayed due to the game end determination being performed, the total number of winning information is displayed for all items, whereas the game end determination is not performed and the game is not performed. During the period determined to be medium, the winning information of some items (items set by the operation of the game hall or the player or predetermined main items) may be displayed. That is, the items of the winning number information to be displayed may be different between the period in which it is determined that no game is being performed and the period in which it is determined that a game is being performed.

  (13) In the above embodiment, with respect to the display position and display range (image size) of a specific image (error message, 4th symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information), the setting for displaying the winning information ( 42 and 43) and the setting (FIG. 44) that does not display the winning number information are not changed (shared), while for other images (background images), the setting that displays the winning number information and the winning number The visible range is different depending on the setting for not displaying information. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and as shown in FIG. 47, the setting for displaying winning number information (FIG. 47 (a)) and The display position and display range (image size) of all the images including the background image other than the winning number information may be made common with the setting not displaying the winning number information (FIG. 47B). . Thereby, the control burden by the display / non-display setting of the winning number information can be reduced.

  (14) In the above embodiment, the display position and display range (size of the image) of the decorative symbols are set to display winning number information (FIGS. 42 and 43) and not to display winning number information (FIG. 44). However, the display position and display range of the decorative symbols may be made different according to the display / non-display setting of the winning number information. For example, as shown in FIG. 48, in the setting for displaying the winning number information (FIG. 48 (a)), the setting for not displaying the winning number information than the interval between the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (FIG. 48 ( The interval between the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in b)) may be widened. That is, when the winning number information is not displayed, variable display of decorative symbols may be executed using the entire screen. In this example, the decorative symbol display area 5L when the winning number information is not displayed is included in the first area α. As described above, when the winning number information is not displayed, variable display or stop display of the decorative symbols in the first area α may be allowed. Thus, you may make it raise interest by performing an effect using the whole screen.

  (15) In the above embodiment, as the gaming machine error, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, and radio wave abnormality are exemplified, but not limited to these, the gaming machine error includes front door opening abnormality and payout mechanism abnormality. (Abnormal prize ball, etc.), illegal prize winning in the big prize opening (abnormality in which winning in the big prize opening is detected even though the big prize opening is not open), or malfunction of various members of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Etc.

[Example of a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a game ball holding device]
The arrangement of the general winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 49, the general winning ports 50E, 50F, 50G may be arranged in the horizontal direction in the left game area 10A. It should be noted that the intervals between the general prize winning openings 50E, 50F, 50G are intervals through which at least one game ball can pass. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, a game ball holding device S capable of holding a game ball may be provided above the general winning ports 50E to 50G. The game ball storage device S is a game medium storage device that can store up to the upper limit number (four in this example) of game balls in the vertical direction and that can release the stored game balls in response to a storage release operation. It is an example. The game ball holding device S is constituted by guide plates 51 and 53 and solenoids 52 and 54 (see FIG. 51), and can hold a maximum of four game balls as shown in FIG. 51 to be described later. Yes.

  Further, in the lower area of the game ball holding device S, game nails for distribution may be provided as distribution means for distributing the game balls to the respective general winning ports 50E, 50F, 50G. The game nail for distribution is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a game nail provided in a triangular area below the game ball holding device S in FIGS. 49, 51, and 52. In addition, as a distribution unit provided at the lower part of the game ball holding device S, a cloon can be cited. In addition, although the game ball can enter the crune, an entry area (so-called “losing hole”) that cannot be distributed to the general winning opening when it enters may be provided.

  On the right side of the operation button 30 on the upper surface of the upper plate 60, a release operation button 30S that can be operated by the player by pressing is installed. The player's operation action performed on the release operation button 30S is detected by a press detection switch (not shown) that detects the press of the release operation button 30S. The game balls held by the game ball holding device S are released in response to the operation of the release operation button 30S, and the released game balls are changed in the flow direction by the game nails, and the general winning ports 50E, 50F, 50G. Either of the above will be won, or it will be led to the out mouth without winning any of them. In addition, on the game board surface shown in FIG. 49, a second image display device 5S is provided below the image display device 5 on which variable display of the fourth symbol and variable display of the decorative symbol are executed. The second image display device 5S is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and the effect information according to the number of game balls held by the game ball holding device S and the effect according to the operation of the release operation button 30S. It is possible to display information and production information corresponding to winning in a general winning opening.

  FIG. 50 is a configuration diagram illustrating various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the game ball holding device S and the second image display device 5S. Hereinafter, differences from the configuration diagram shown in FIG. 2 will be described. When a release operation is performed in which the release operation button 30S is pressed, the game control microcomputer 100 detects the operation of the release operation button 30S and the solenoids 52 and 54 (see FIG. 51) with respect to the solenoid circuit 111. ) Is output. The display control unit 123 shown in FIG. 50 executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the second image display device 5S based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120 and the like. To do.

(Operation of the game ball holding device S)
As shown in FIG. 51, both the guide plate 51 and the guide plate 53 are fixed to the game board surface in parallel with the vertical direction, and the distance between the guide plate 51 and the guide plate 53 is slightly smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The interval is very wide (for example, an interval corresponding to 1.1 times the diameter). A solenoid 52 is installed on the lower right side of the guide plate 51, and a shutter 52a is connected to a movable iron core (not shown) of the solenoid 52 via a connecting member. As the movable core of the solenoid 52 moves, the shutter 52a moves in the horizontal direction. The connecting member is provided with a motion direction conversion mechanism that converts the motion in the vertical direction into the motion in the horizontal direction so that the shutter 52a moves in the horizontal direction as the movable iron core of the solenoid 52 moves in the vertical direction. May be.

  When the solenoid 52 is in the on state (energized state), the shutter 52a is advanced to the advanced position (the state shown in FIG. 51 (1)), and when the solenoid 52 is in the off state (non-energized state) A retreat state (the state shown in FIG. 51 (3)) retreats to the retreat position. In the advanced state, the shutter 52a appears horizontally from directly below the guide plate 51 toward the guide plate 53, and the flow of game balls downward from the lower ends of the guide plate 51 and the guide plate 53 is prevented. In the retracted state, the shutter 52a does not exist below the guide plate 51 and the guide plate 53, and the game ball is allowed to flow downward from the lower ends of the guide plate 51 and the guide plate 53.

  The guide plate 53 is provided with a shutter hole h. A solenoid 54 is installed on the left side of the shutter hole h, and a shutter 54a is connected to a movable iron core (not shown) of the solenoid 54 via a connecting member. As the movable core of the solenoid 54 moves, the shutter 54a moves in the horizontal direction through the shutter hole h. The position of the shutter hole h is one game ball above the lower end of the guide plate 53. The connecting member is provided with a motion direction conversion mechanism for converting the motion in the vertical direction into the motion in the horizontal direction so that the shutter 54a moves in the horizontal direction as the movable iron core of the solenoid 54 moves in the vertical direction. May be.

  When the solenoid 54 is in the on state (energized state), the shutter 54a has advanced to the advanced position (the state shown in FIG. 51 (3)), and when the solenoid 54 is in the off state (non-energized state), the shutter 54a moves backward. The retracted state is set back to the position (the state shown in FIG. 51 (1)). When the shutter 54a advances, the shutter 54a is inserted between the lowest game ball and the game ball above it. In the advanced state, the shutter 54a appears horizontally from the shutter hole h of the guide plate 53 toward the guide plate 51, and the flow of the game ball downward from the shutter hole h is prevented. In the retracted state, the shutter 54a does not exist on the guide plate 51 side with respect to the shutter hole h, and the game ball is allowed to flow downward from the shutter hole h.

  In the state shown in FIG. 51 (1), the solenoid 52 is in the on state (the shutter 52a is in the advanced state), while the solenoid 54 is in the off state (the shutter 54a is in the retracted state). When the solenoid 52 is in the on state, a maximum of four game balls can be held in a region sandwiched between the guide plate 51 and the guide plate 53. In the example of FIG. 51 (1), the game ball A is held at the lowest position, the game ball B is held second from the lowest position, and the game ball C is held third from the lowest position. In the state, the game ball D further flows down between the guide plate 51 and the guide plate 53.

  Here, in a region sandwiched between the guide plate 51 and the guide plate 53 on the game board surface, four ball detection sensors (not shown) corresponding to the positions of the four game balls that can be held are installed. Yes. Each ball detection sensor outputs a detection signal when a game ball is present at a position corresponding to each ball detection sensor. The output signal of each ball detection sensor is input to the game control microcomputer 100. In the game control microcomputer 100, the game balls held between the guide plate 51 and the guide plate 53 based on the output signal of each ball detection sensor (the number of the ball detection sensors outputting the detection signal). The number can be specified.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the number of held game balls by the number-of-hold display devices 53A to 53D. Each of the number-of-holding display devices 53A to 53D is configured by a light-emitting device such as an LED, and the game control microcomputer 100 determines any number of held numbers when the number of game balls held is zero. The display device also does not emit light. When the number of game balls held is 1, the hold number display device 53A is caused to emit light. When the number of game balls held is 2, the hold number display device 53B is displayed. When the number of game balls being held is three, the hold number display device 53C is caused to emit light, and when the number of game balls being held is four, the hold number display device 53D is caused to emit light.

  In the example of FIG. 51 (1), since there are three game balls A to C, the number-of-holds light emitting device 53C is in a state of emitting light. In the example of FIG. 51 (2), as a result of the game ball D flowing down between the guide plate 51 and the guide plate 53 being held at the top, the held game balls are game balls A to D. Therefore, the number-of-holds light emitting device 53D is in a light emitting state. The most frequently held state notification device 53E is constituted by a light emitting device such as an LED, and emits light when the number of held game balls reaches 4, which is an upper limit value that can be held. In the example of FIG. 51 (2), the most frequently held state notifying device 53E for notifying that the number of holds has reached the upper limit value is in a light emitting state.

  Since the player can visually recognize the game ball held between the guide plate 51 and the guide plate 53, the game ball is held by the game ball holding device S regardless of the number-of-holding light emitting devices 53A to 53D. It is possible to grasp the number of game balls that are present. However, it is easier to grasp which one of the holding number light emitting devices 53A to 53D emits light (or none of them emits light), and is held between the guide plate 51 and the guide plate 53. It is possible to clearly recognize the number of holds without having to look at the game ball.

  Further, when the number of held game balls reaches an upper limit value that can be held, in addition to the light emission of the hold number light emitting device 53D, the most frequently held state notification device 53E is caused to emit light, thereby further holding the game ball. It is clearly notified that it cannot be made. As a result, the player grasps that the game ball cannot be further held by the game ball holding device S and, for example, stops the release of the game ball or operates the release operation button 30S. Measures can be taken.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 increases, as the production control command, a hold device hold number designation command for specifying the number of game balls held in the game ball hold device S every time the hold number is changed (increases Output to the effect control board 12 every time it decreases. Receiving the hold device hold number designation command, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect according to the hold number designated by the hold device hold number designation command in the second image display device 5S.

  For example, the number of holds of the game ball holding device S is notified by displaying a message “the number of hold of the hold device is x” on the second image display device 5S. Further, when the number of holdings specified by the holding device holding number specifying command is smaller than a predetermined number (for example, 0), the second image display device 5S says “Please store balls in the holding device”. Displaying the message prompts the game ball holding device S to launch and hold the game ball. Further, when the number of holds designated by the hold device hold number designation command is a predetermined number or more (for example, 1 or more), a message “The release operation is valid” is displayed on the second image display device 5S. By displaying, it is notified that the game ball can be released by the release operation. Further, when the number of holds designated by the hold device hold number designation command is the upper limit value (4), the second image display device 5S says “the hold number of the hold device has reached the upper limit (4)”. A message “Do the release operation !!” is displayed together with the message to prompt the user to operate the release operation button 30S.

  In the above-described example, the hold number display devices 53A to 53D and the most frequently held state notification device 53E are all controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, but are not limited to such a configuration. Instead, the number-of-holds display devices 53A to 53D and the most frequently held state notification device 53E may be controlled by the effect control CPU 120. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission control of the hold number display devices 53A to 53D and the most frequently held state notification device 53E according to the hold number specified by the received hold device hold number designation command. Also good.

  In the example of FIG. 51 (2), based on the fact that the number of holds designated by the hold device hold number designation command is the upper limit value (4), the second image display device 5S is prompted to “perform the release operation !!” Is displayed. It is assumed that a player who recognizes that the release operation button 30S should be operated by this message has operated the release operation button 30S. The game control microcomputer 100 that detects that the release operation button 30 has been operated changes the shutter 54a to the advanced state by setting the solenoid 54 to the on state, and then changes the shutter 52a to the reverse state by setting the solenoid 52 to the off state. Let

  Thereby, the game balls B to D positioned higher than the lowest are prevented from flowing down due to the presence of the shutter 54a. On the other hand, the lowermost game ball A flows down due to the absence of the shutter 52a, and wins a prize in any of the general winning ports 50E to 50G while changing the flow direction by the game nail, or in any case. You will be led to the outlet without winning.

  Note that not only the game balls released from the game ball holding device S but also game balls that have flowed through other flow paths without being held by the game ball holding device S can be awarded to the general winning ports 50E to 50G. The game balls that do not pass through the game ball holding device S are not allowed to win the general winning ports 50E to 50G, and only the game balls that pass through the game ball holding device S may be able to win the general winning ports 50E to 50G.

  As described above, the game ball is temporarily held in the game ball holding device S, and released by releasing a plurality of held game balls toward the general winning opening provided in response to the release operation. It is possible to be interested in whether or not the game ball is won in the general winning opening and in which general winning opening. Moreover, interest can be produced also about operating the discharge | release operation button 30S.

  The player performs the release operation when any one of the on-hold number display devices 53A to 53D emits light or the message “The release operation is valid” is displayed on the second image display device 5S. By this, it can be recognized that the game ball can be released. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R that “the discharge operation is effective.” By operating a predetermined accessory, the fact that the discharge operation is effective is notified. Anyway. It may be informed that the discharge operation is effective in any one or more aspects.

  When the number of holdings reaches the upper limit (4), the number of holdings display device 53D emits light, and the most frequently held state notification device 53E emits light. ! ”Is displayed, the player can grasp that the release operation should be performed.

  It should be noted that not only when the number of holds reaches the upper limit (4) but also when the number of holds is 3, for example, the message “Please do the release operation!” Is displayed on the second image display device 5S. Anyway. That is, a notification condition (the number of holds is 4) and a notification mode (light emission of the hold number display device 53D and light emission of the most frequently held state notification device 53E) for notifying that the hold number has reached the upper limit (4); The notification condition for notifying that the discharge operation should be performed (the number of holdings is 3 or more) and the notification mode (displaying the message “Do the discharge operation !!”) may be different.

  Further, as exemplified in the above-described 50th effect form and 51st effect form, the effect executed in the image display device 5 is an effect that can be executed in accordance with the operation of the operation button 30. For example, a cut-in advance notice effect can be executed by a continuous hitting operation on the operation button 30, a pseudo continuous notice effect can be executed by each symbol stop operation on the operation button 30, and a chance eye advance notice by an all symbol stop operation on the operation button 30. Production can be performed. Then, display of continuous hitting suggestion information 4100 for prompting continuous hitting operation, display of operation suggestion information 4050 for prompting each symbol stop operation, operation suggestion information 4050 for prompting all symbol stop operations, and “stop all symbols!” Is displayed on the image display device 5.

  On the other hand, the message “Do the release operation !!” prompting the user to perform the release operation is displayed on the second image display device 5S different from the image display device 5 (or the hold number display devices 53A to 53A˜). Because it is possible to grasp that there are more than a predetermined number of held balls by the light emission of 53D and the light emission of the most frequently held state notification device 53E), unlike the effects related to the variable display game displayed on the image display device 5, The player understands that the message (or the light emission of the hold number display devices 53A to 53D or the light emission of the most frequently held state notification device 53E) is information not related to the variable display game, and performs a release operation to play the game. It is easy to grasp the timing at which a game ball should be released from the ball holding device S.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, a second image display device 5S, speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 and the like as the production devices, and the game entertainment is enhanced by the output of these production devices. Is. In order to execute a predetermined effect by these effect devices, an operation button 30 and a release operation button 30S that can be operated by the player are provided. An interest in the predetermined effect can be increased by executing the predetermined effect in response to the operation of the operation button 30 or the release operation button 30S.

  The player who has confirmed the message “Do the release operation!” On the second image display device 5S (or the light emission of the hold number display devices 53A to 53D or the light emission of the most frequently held state notification device 53E) presses the release operation button 30S. When the pushing release operation is performed, the shutter 54a is first changed to the advanced state as the solenoid 54 is turned on by the control of the game control microcomputer 100 that has detected the releasing operation, and then the solenoid 52 is turned on. As the shutter is turned off, the shutter 52a changes to the backward state.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 51 (3), only the lowest game ball (A) among the game balls held was started to flow under the guide plates 51 and 53 and was held. The game balls (B to D) other than the lowest one of the game balls are prevented from flowing down by the shutter 54a. In this way, the game ball (A) released from the game ball holding device S wins a prize in any of the general winning ports 50E to 50G while changing the flow direction by the game nails planted therebelow. Or will be led to the outlet without winning any prize.

  Here, the game control microcomputer 100 outputs, to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command, a release operation specification command that specifies that the release operation has been performed based on the operation detection of the release operation button 30S. Upon receiving the release operation designation command, the effect control CPU 120 displays a message “release!” For notifying that the game ball has been released from the game ball holding device S on the second image display device 5S. . It should be noted that the sound “release!” May be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, by performing the effect when the game ball is released from the game ball holding device S, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game ball is released.

  Then, when the general control port designation command based on the fact that the game ball has won any of the general prize ports 50E to 50G is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the effect control CPU 120 designates the general prize port designation command. The number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening (previously stored for each general winning opening in the ROM 121) is specified, and a message corresponding to the specified number of winning balls (“XX GET !!”) is sent. And displayed on the second image display device 5S. In the example of FIG. 51 (3), based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening 50F, the fact that the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening 50F is 15 is “15 shots GET !!” Is displayed on the second image display device 5S.

  Here, the number of prize balls given when the game balls are awarded to the general prize openings 50E to 50G provided next to each other may be the same, and the number of prize balls differs according to the general prize opening. Also good. For example, the number of prize balls given when a game ball is won in the general prize opening 50E or 50G is 10, while the number of prize balls given when a game ball is won in the general prize slot 50F is 15. good. Thus, by making the number of prize balls different according to the general prize opening, it is possible to pay attention to which general prize opening the game ball released from the game ball notification device S wins. In addition to the general winning ports 50E to 50G, or in place of any of the general winning ports 50E to 50G, a game ball can be entered, but an entry area in which no prize ball is given when entering ( A so-called loss hole) may be provided.

  Further, in the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 in which the effects related to the variable display game are executed, various kinds of notice effects related to the variable display game (cut-in notice effects, pseudo-continuous notice effects) The game ball held by the game ball holding device S is released separately from the operation button 30 for receiving the presentation operation (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) for executing the chance eye notice effect). By providing the release operation button 30 </ b> S that receives the release operation for performing the operation, the distinction between the production operation and the release operation becomes clear. If it is allowed to accept both the production operation and the release operation by a common device, the player who intends to perform the production operation mistakenly performs the release operation, or the player who intends to perform the production operation mistakes the production operation. However, such a situation can be avoided by making a device to be operated separately.

  In addition, when a game ball wins a general winning opening, a privilege other than the prize ball may be given. For example, effects such as a notice effect and a reach effect may be additionally executed in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. It should be noted that if the winning at the start winning opening does not occur for a certain period of time, an effect that has been additionally executed may not be executed. Furthermore, when a game ball wins a general winning opening, a special sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the game effect lamp 9 may shine in a special manner.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 51 (4), the solenoid 52 is turned on again after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the shutter 52a changed to the retracted state in FIG. 51 (3). The shutter 52a changes to the advanced state, and then the shutter 54a changes to the retracted state as the solenoid 54 is turned off again. As a result, the pending game balls (B to D) that have been prevented from flowing by the shutter 54a move downward by one game ball, but are prevented from flowing downward by the shutter 52a. It becomes.

  As described above, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the game balls held in the game ball holding device S are released one by one in accordance with the operation of the release operation button 30S. Not limited to this, a plurality of game balls held in the game ball holding device S may be released together according to the operation of the release operation button 30S. For example, when the time for pressing the release operation button 30S is less than 2 seconds, the shutter 52a is changed to the retracted state after the shutter 54a is changed to the advanced state as shown in FIG. The game balls are released one by one in order from the bottom, but if the time for pressing the release operation button 30S is 2 seconds or longer (so-called long press), the shutter 54a remains in the retracted state. By changing the shutter 52a to the retracted state without doing so, not only the lowest game ball (A) but also the higher game balls (B to D) may be discharged. That is, the game ball storage device S, which is a game medium storage device, can release only a part of the stored game balls and release all the stored game balls by the storage release operation. The number of game balls released from the game ball holding device S can be changed according to the operation mode of the release operation button 30 of the player.

  Further, the game ball may be released from the game ball holding device S without the player operating the release operation button 30. Specifically, when the game ball held in the game ball holding device S reaches the upper limit (4), if a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses without performing the release operation, (a) the release operation Regardless, the lowest game ball may be automatically released by changing the shutter 52a to the retracted state after changing the shutter 54a to the advanced state, and (b) depending on the release operation. Instead, it is also possible to automatically release all the game balls held by changing the shutter 52a to the retracted state without changing the shutter 54a in the retracted state.

  As a result, a state in which the game ball cannot be held in the game ball holding device S, that is, a state in which the number of game balls that can be released toward the general winning opening does not increase for a long time continues. Profits can be prevented and the labor of the discharge operation can be saved.

  Note that the release operation button 30S may not be provided. As such a configuration, whenever the game ball held in the game ball holding device S reaches the upper limit (4), the control as in the above (a) or (b) is performed, and automatically regardless of the operation. A game ball may be released. Further, as a configuration in which the release operation button 30S is not provided, the control as in the above (a) or (b) is performed every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and the game ball is automatically released regardless of the operation. You may do it.

  In this embodiment, the shutter 52a is in the advanced state when the solenoid 52 is in the on state (energized state), and the shutter 54a is in the advanced state when the solenoid 54 is in the on state (energized state). Yes. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and the power supply is cut off, the shutter 52a is moved backward as the solenoid 52 is turned off (non-energized state), and the solenoid 54 is turned on. As the shutter 54a is turned off (non-energized), the shutter 54a is also moved back. As a result, all the game balls held in the game ball holding device S are released. Thereby, in a state where power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from being held in the gaming ball holding device S.

  In contrast, the shutter 52a is in the advanced state when the solenoid 52 is in the off state (non-energized state), and the shutter 54a is in the advanced state when the solenoid 54 is in the off state (non-energized state). It may be configured. In such a configuration, it is necessary to turn on the solenoid 52 in order to put the shutter 52a in the backward state, and to turn on the solenoid 54 in order to place the shutter 54a in the backward state. With such a configuration, even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the game ball holding device S keeps the game ball held, and an unintended timing due to the occurrence of power interruption. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being released.

  For example, depending on whether one end or the other end of a movable iron core (not shown) of the solenoids 52, 54 is connected to the shutters 52a, 54a, the shutters 52a, 54a are in the on state. It is possible to set whether to be in the advanced state or the reverse state. Regarding the solenoid 52, when the shutter 52a is in the on state, the shutter 52a is in the retracted state, and when the solenoid 52 is in the off state, the shutter 52a is in the advanced state. When in the on state, the shutter 54a may be in the advanced state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (1), there is provided a holdable condition for the game ball holding device S to be in a holdable state where the game ball can be held (the shutter 52a is in the advanced state and the shutter 54a is in the retracted state). May be. During the period in which the holdable condition is not established, both the shutter 52a and the shutter 54a are in the retracted state, and the game ball flowing down between the guide plate 51 and the guide plate 53 is prevented from flowing down as it is. It is assumed that the game ball holding device S is in a state where it cannot be held and flows downward. For example, the holdable condition is controlled to a predetermined game state (for example, a normal state), a variable display game is executed with a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a pattern that is out of normal reach), and controlled to a non-holdable state. A predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes or a period for which a predetermined number of variable display games are executed) has elapsed since the game was started, and a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes or a predetermined number of variable display games for which a game ball has been released) This is established based on the elapse of the period during which the process is executed. In addition, the holdable state and the non-holdable state may be switched alternately for each predetermined period. For example, when 3 minutes elapses after the holdable state is reached, automatically, regardless of the number of held balls at that time. The shutter 52a and the shutter 54a may be in the reverse state, and all the retaining balls may be released, and the state may be shifted to a tenth minute suspension impossible state.

  Note that the game ball hold control and the game ball release control from the game ball hold device S in the game ball hold device S may be performed by driving a motor instead of a solenoid. For example, the shutter 52a and the shutter 54a Each of them may be connected to a rotating shaft of a motor via a cam and switched between an advanced state and a backward state by driving the motor. Further, instead of the shutter 52a, the lower part of the guide plate 51 and the guide plate 53 may be covered with a lid member, and the opening / closing control of the lid member may be performed by driving a motor.

  In the example of FIG. 42 and the like described above, an example is shown in which the number-of-wins information related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed in the first area α of the screen of the image display device 5. When the image display device 5S is configured to include a plurality of display devices, the image display device 5 displays the winning number information on the second image display device 5S without displaying the winning number information. Thus, the player may be able to grasp the winning history.

  In the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is executed, and various notice effects for notifying the display result are executed. In this way, display of the number-of-winning information prevents the effect on the image display device 5 by displaying the number-of-winning information on the second image display device 5S instead of the display device in which the effects related to the variable display game are mainly executed. It becomes possible not to become. In addition, regarding each of the general winning ports 50E to 50G, the number of winnings to the general winning ports may be individually displayed. For example, the display of the total number of winnings in all the general winning openings (summary display) and the display of the individual winning numbers for each general winning opening (detailed display) are performed according to the player's operation or at predetermined intervals. It may be automatically switched.

  In this embodiment, when the number of the game ball holding devices S is less than the predetermined number, the message “Please store balls in the holding device” is displayed on the second image display device 5S. The game ball holding device S is informed to hold the game ball. In addition, any one of the hold number display devices 53A to 53D is caused to emit light, or none is caused to emit light, or a message “the number of hold devices held is x pieces” is displayed on the second image display device 5S. By this, the current number of holds of the game ball holding device S is notified. Further, the notification of prompting the discharge operation is made by causing the most frequently held state notification device 53E to emit light or displaying the message “Please perform the discharge operation!” On the second image display device 5S. Further, by displaying a message “release !!” on the second image display device 5S, it is notified that the game ball has been released from the game ball holding device S. Further, by displaying the number of wins to each general winning opening on the second image display device 5S, the winning history to the general winning opening is notified. As described above, various notifications related to the holding of the game ball to the game ball holding device S, the release of the game ball from the game ball holding device S, and the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening are variable display games. This is performed not in the image display device 5 in which effects (variable display of decorative symbols and the like) related to the above are executed, but in the hold number display devices 53A to 53D, the most frequently held state notification device 53E, and the second image display device 5S. These various notifications prevent the effects performed by the image display device 5 from being hindered.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, an example in which only one game ball holding device S is provided is shown, but a plurality of game ball holding devices S may be provided. For example, two game ball holding devices S may be provided side by side, and in such a configuration, a mechanism for alternately distributing game balls is provided in each game ball holding device S. Also good. For example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117434 has a configuration in which game balls received by a sorting device are alternately distributed to a first start winning opening and a second starting winning opening. By providing the distribution device, the game balls received by the distribution device can be alternately distributed to one game ball storage device S and the other game ball storage device S. This makes it possible to distribute the game balls to the plurality of game ball holding devices S using a common flow path, and to effectively use the area on the game board surface.

  In addition, when a sorting device that distributes gaming balls to a plurality of gaming ball holding devices S is provided in this way, a gaming ball that has flowed down via the sorting device must be sent to any gaming ball holding device S. You may make it hold | maintain and you may make it the path | route not hold | maintained in any game ball holding | maintenance apparatus S exist. That is, by leaving the possibility that the game ball holding device S does not reach the holding route without reaching the game ball holding device S, it is possible to give interest to the game ball via the sorting device.

  Further, the release of the game balls from the plurality of game ball holding devices S may be executed in a batch according to a common operation. For example, the game ball may be released from each of the plurality of game ball holding devices S by operating the release operation button 30S once. The game balls are released from the plurality of game ball holding devices S in response to the operation of 1, so that a refreshing feeling can be given.

  In addition, the player may be able to select from which of the plurality of game ball holding devices S which game ball is to be released. For example, when the release operation button 30S is provided with the same jog dial function as the operation button 30 and the release operation button 30S is operated with the jog dial rotated to the left, the game ball is released from one game ball holding device S, and the jog dial When the release operation button 30S is operated in a state in which the game ball is rotated to the right, the game ball may be released from the other game ball holding device S. Thereby, the game ball holding device S according to the player's intention can be selected, and the game ball can be released from the selected game ball holding device S.

  A plurality of release operation buttons 30S corresponding to each of the plurality of game ball holding devices S may be provided. For example, when one release operation button 30S is operated, a game ball is released from one game ball holding device S, and when the other release operation button 30S is operated, a game ball is released from the other game ball holding device S. You may do it. For the player, the relationship between the button to be operated and the game ball holding device S becomes clear, and an erroneous operation can be prevented.

(Composition with a general prize opening in Kroon)
In the example shown in FIGS. 49 and 51, the general winning ports 50E to 50G are constituted by ball receiving members protruding forward (player side) from the game board surface. As shown in FIG. 52 (1), the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and a Kroon 55 in which general winning ports 50E to 50G through which game balls can pass can be provided in a disk-shaped member. For example, the number of prize balls given when a game ball is won in the general prize opening 50E or 50G is 10, and the number of prize balls given when a game ball is won in the general prize slot 50F is 15. And

  As shown in FIG. 52 (2), the game balls released from the game ball holding device S fall on the rolling surface of the crone 55 while changing the flow direction by the game nails. The dropped game ball rolls on the rolling surface and then wins one of the general winning ports 50E to 50G provided on the rolling surface. In the example of FIG. 52 (2), the general winning opening 50F is won.

  52, in the configuration shown in FIG. 52, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the release operation designation command determines the player's interest as to which of the general winning slots provided in the croon 55 the released game ball will win. Is displayed on the second image display device 5S. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening 50F, the message “15 GET! It is displayed on the device 5S.

  It should be noted that the game ball released from the game ball holding device S is always configured to fall on the rolling surface of the croon 55 (that is, be sure to win any one of the general winning ports formed on the rolling surface). Alternatively, it may be configured to flow down to the lower side of the cron 55 without going through the cron 55. By leaving the possibility that the game ball released from the game ball holding device S does not enter the croon 55, the player can be interested in the released game ball.

  In addition, a smaller number of crunes 55 than the game ball holding device S may be provided for the plurality of game ball holding devices S. For example, when a plurality of game ball holding devices S are provided, the game balls released from any of the game ball holding devices S may fall on the rolling surface of the common croon 55. Thereby, the discharge path | route of a game ball is diversified and the game interest by using the Kleon 55 in which the some general winning opening was formed can be heightened more. In addition, a larger number of crons 55 than the game ball holding device S may be provided, and a game ball released from one game ball holding device S may be moved to one of the crons 55 due to a change in the flow-down direction due to a game nail or the like. There may be a possibility of being accepted (sorted) and a possibility of being accepted (sorted) by the other crew 55.

  In addition, on the game board surface, the croon 55 may be provided at the lowest position in the flow-down range of the game balls. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to collect game balls on the croon 55. In such a configuration, not only a general winning opening, but also a hole that is not given a prize ball when entering is provided as an entry area for a game ball provided in the croon 55. This lost hole corresponds to the out port shown in the present embodiment, and a part of the game balls received on the rolling surface of the croon 55 enter the general winning port, and the other is a lost hole (out port). Will be led to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 53, gates 42A to 42D through which game balls can pass are provided above the clown 55, and the game balls that have passed through the gates are placed in the distribution area 48 divided by the guide members 43 to 47. It is good also as a structure which is guide | induced and falls to the rolling surface of a croon, changing a flow direction by the game nail of the distribution area | region 48. FIG. In this example, the game ball that has passed through the gate 42A is guided to the distribution region 48 by the guide members 43 and 44, and the game ball that has passed through the gate 42B is guided to the distribution region 48 by the guide members 44 and 45, The game balls that have passed through the gate 42C are guided to the distribution area 48 by the guide members 45 and 46, and the game balls that have passed through the gate 42D are guided to the distribution area 48 by the guide members 46 and 47.

  In the example of FIG. 53, the number of prize balls given when a game ball is won in the general prize opening 50E is 5, and the number of prize balls given when a game ball is won in the general prize opening 50F is 10 shows an example in which the number of prize balls to be awarded when a game ball is won in the general prize opening 50G is 15. Here, according to the gate through which the game ball passes, the winning ratios to the general winning ports 50E to 50G may be different. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give interest to which gate the game ball passes through.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, a plurality of general winning ports 50E, 50F, and 50G having different numbers of awarded balls are provided adjacent to each other. In the example of FIG. 51, the game balls released from the game ball holding device S are distributed to the respective general winning ports while changing the flow direction by the game nails. In the example of FIG. 52, the game balls released from the game ball holding device S are distributed to the respective general winning ports while changing the flow direction by the game nails and rolling the rolling surface of the croon 55. ing. Also, in the example of FIG. 53, the game balls that have passed through the gates 42A to 42D are distributed to the general winning awards while changing the flow direction by the game nails and rolling the rolling surface of the croon 55. . In this way, in the process of the game balls heading to a plurality of general winning holes, it is possible to focus on which general winning holes the game balls win by changing the flow direction and the rolling direction. The Kroon 55 has a function that does not cause the Kroon to vibrate (vibration resistance function, seismic isolation function, etc.) because vibration may occur when the player hits the table, etc. May be provided. Furthermore, the ratio of the game balls won for the general winning openings 50E, 50F, and 50G of the croon 55 may be displayed on the image display device 5 or the like.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, an example is shown in which the game ball changes the flow direction by the game nail or rolls on the rolling surface of the crone 55 to reach the general winning opening. In other words, the game balls are distributed to any one of the plurality of general winning ports by the game nails and the crone 55. By adopting a configuration in which game balls are distributed to any of a plurality of general winning ports by such distribution means, attention can be paid to the flow direction of the game balls.

  The distribution means is not limited to a game nail or a croon. For example, after a game ball rolls on a rolling surface (upper surface) of a stage (see FIG. 56) provided below the image display device 5, it falls from the rolling surface and wins a general winning opening. Or you may make it guide | invade out of a rolling surface, without winning in any general winning opening.

  The example shown in FIGS. 51 to 53 shows an example in which the number of prize balls given according to the general winning a prize is different, but the winning difficulty may be different according to the general winning award. For example, the number of winning balls may be awarded in a general winning opening that is difficult to win than in a general winning opening that is easy to win. In addition, an index indicating the degree of difficulty of winning the general winning opening may be displayed in the vicinity of the general winning opening. For example, marks such as “low”, “medium”, and “high” indicating the difficulty of winning a prize in the general winning award may be written in the vicinity of each general winning award.

  Further, not only a prize ball is awarded based on winning in the general winning opening, but also a specific effect including a notice effect can be executed as shown in each of the effect forms described above. For example, when a game ball wins a general winning opening with a high difficulty level, the specific performance is executed at a higher rate than when a gaming ball wins a general winning opening with a low difficulty level. You may be made to do. Also, different specific effects are executed when a game ball wins a general winning opening with a “high” difficulty level and when a gaming ball wins a general winning slot with a “low” winning difficulty level. You may do it.

  52 and 53, each of the general winning ports 50E to 50G formed in the croon 55 is provided with one or more prize balls by the entry of the game ball. A lost hole for the game ball to fall downward from the surface is provided separately from the general winning opening, and the game ball has fallen into the clown 55, but it enters the lost hole without entering any of the general winning openings, You may make it provide the flow-down path | route guided as an out sphere as it is.

  An accessory (production) that operates when a game ball won in the general prize opening acts on the game board surface of the pachinko gaming machine may be provided. For example, the roulette 70 shown in FIG. 54 is fried. The roulette 70 shown in FIG. 54 is an accessory having a structure in which the roulette needle 73 rotates when a game ball won in the general winning opening 50E acts.

  As shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and (b), on the back side of the general winning opening 50E in the game board 2, guiding members 56a to 56c for guiding the game balls won in the general winning opening 50 to the out opening are provided. It may be provided. The guide member 56a restricts the downward movement of the winning game ball, and the guide members 56b and 56c are installed so as to restrict the upward movement of the winning game ball. The game balls flow down between the guide members 56a and 56b and between the guide members 56a and 56c, and are guided as out balls. Between the guide member 56b and the guide member 56c, one end of a shaft body 72 penetrating the game board 2 in the front-rear direction is located, and the other end of the shaft body 72 is connected to the Daikichi regions 71a to It is located at the center of the circle including the region 71d (the center of the roulette 70). The shaft body 72 is rotatable with respect to the game board 2.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the Daikichi region 71a, Nakakichi region 71b, Kokichi region 71c, and Yoshi region 71d on the game board surface divide a circle centered on the other end of the shaft 72 every 90 degrees. Corresponds to each area. In each of the regions 71a to 71d, “daikichi”, “nakakichi”, “kokichi”, and “kichi” are written at positions corresponding to the region through which the tip of the roulette needle 73 passes. The area indicated by the tip when stopped is the result of the roulette game.

  As shown in FIGS. 54 (b) and 54 (d), ball contact portions 74a to 74c are formed at equal intervals on the outer peripheral surface on one end side of the shaft body 72, and at least one of the ball contact portions 74a to 74c. One is located on the passing path of the game ball and is in contact with the game ball flowing down between the guide member 56a and the guide member 56b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54 (d), a roulette needle 73 is fixed to the outer peripheral surface on the other end side of the shaft body 72. Rotate as

  54C and 54D, the game ball that has flowed down between the guide member 56a and the guide member 56b is in contact with the ball contact portion 74b. As a result, as shown in FIG. 54 (e), the shaft body 72 formed with the ball contact portion 74 b rotates, and accordingly, the roulette needle 73 fixed to the shaft body 72 rotates around the shaft body 72. To start. Then, the rotation speed of the roulette needle 73 gradually decreases, and the area indicated by the tip of the roulette needle 73 in the state where the rotation has finally stopped is the result of the roulette game.

  As shown in FIG. 54, not only the game balls won in the general winning opening 50E but also the game balls won in the general winning openings 50F, 50G come into contact with the ball contact portions 74a to 74c, and the roulette needle 73. May be rotated. For example, even if a game ball is won in any of the general winning ports 50E to 50G formed in the above-described Kroon 55, the winning ball is finally led between the guide members 56a and 56b, and the ball contact portion It is good also as a structure which contacts 74a-74c.

  Moreover, you may make it a different accessory operate | move for every general winning opening. For example, a different winning ball passing path is provided for each general winning opening, and each winning ball passing path is provided with a ball contact portion of a different accessory so that a general winning opening where a game ball has won is received. Depending on the situation, different actors may operate.

  In addition, you may make it a some character act according to one prize-winning to a general winning opening. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of winning ball contact portions are arranged in a winning ball passing path of a general winning opening, and the winning game balls are sequentially in contact with the winning ball contact portions. In addition, a winning ball passing path of a general winning opening is branched in the middle of the route, and a game ball that has won the general winning opening passes through each branched winning ball by a sorting device provided in the branching section. You may make it distribute to a path | route sequentially. Each of the branched winning ball passing paths has a different ball contact portion for each of the different functions, so that each time a game ball wins the general winning opening, a different function from the time of the previous winning is operated. This will improve your interest. Along with the action of the accessory, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner, and a predetermined message or character is displayed on the second image display device 5S. Such control may be executed.

(Modification)
In addition, an image display device provided at the lower part of the general winning opening can be cited as an effect that operates when a game ball won in the general winning opening acts. For example, this image display device displays an award ball that is obtained when winning a general winning opening, and when the winning position is awarded to the general obtaining opening, there is an effect that the display of the displayed winning ball changes. Specifically, when the number of prize balls obtained when winning the general prize opening is 15, images of 15 game balls contained in the container are displayed, and when the prize is awarded to the general availability slot, the bottom of the container is displayed. For example, an image in which the game ball flows down and the image in which the game ball jumps out of the container is displayed. When the image of the game ball in the image display device provided at the lower part of the general prize opening is changed when winning the general prize opening, if the prize ball is paid out to the upper plate, the player is displayed on the image display device. I get the impression that I got a game ball.

(Arrangement example of the general prize opening)
It should be noted that the number of general winning holes provided in the pachinko gaming machine may be larger than the above-described example. In the example of FIG. 55, five general winning ports, general winning ports 50H to 50L, are provided in the left game area 10A, and two general winning ports, general winning ports 50M and 50N, are provided in the right game region 10B. It has been. Further, the number of winning balls in the general winning opening 50H provided in the left game area 10A is 5, the number of winning balls in the general winning openings 50I to 50K is 1, and the number of winning balls in the general winning opening 50L is 10. A large number of prize balls may be set for the general winning opening located at the end. On the other hand, the number of winning balls in the general winning openings 50M and 50N provided in the right game area 10B is 15, and the winning in the general winning opening during the right-handed period is more to the player than the left-handed period. The advantage may be high.

  In this way, by providing a general winning opening with one winning ball, since the value given when winning a prize is low, it becomes possible to arrange a large number of general winning openings and increase the winning frequency accordingly. be able to. It should be noted that not only the end of a plurality of general winning holes arranged, but general winning holes having a large number of prize balls (for example, 10 or more) are distributed and arranged in each area of the game board surface (not concentrated in a specific area) Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation even when the game ball is guided to any region. In addition, the general winning opening may be color-coded according to the number of winning balls, or the number of winning balls may be displayed at or around the general winning opening, so that the advantage for each general winning opening may be notified. .

  In addition, when a game ball wins a general winning opening, a privilege other than the prize ball may be given. For example, effects such as a notice effect and a reach effect may be additionally executed in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. It should be noted that if the winning at the start winning opening does not occur for a certain period of time, an effect that has been additionally executed may not be executed. Furthermore, when a game ball wins a general winning opening, a special sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the game effect lamp 9 may shine in a special manner.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 56A and 56B, the general winning opening may be formed on a stage 57 provided below the image display device 5. Below the image display device 5 is provided a stage 57 protruding forward (player side) from the display surface of the image display device 5, and a general winning opening 50P is provided on the upper surface of the stage 57 to the left of the center. A general winning opening 50Q is formed on the right side of the center.

  Further, above the image display device 5, there is provided a distribution area surrounded by guide plates 58 a and 58 b on the left and right sides and in which game nails are implanted. Drop position defining members 59a to 59f are arranged in the horizontal direction at the bottom of the distribution area. When a game ball that has entered the distribution area and has flowed down the distribution area while changing the flow direction by the game nail enters between the drop position defining members 59a and 59b, the game ball is stored in the image display device 5. Passing forward, it falls to the periphery including the general winning opening 50P without touching the obstacle, and enters the general winning opening 50P at a predetermined rate (including 100%). Here, the game balls that have entered between the drop position defining members 59a and 59b enter the general winning opening 50P at a higher rate than the game balls that have fallen onto the stage 57 without entering any of the drop position defining members. However, there are a case where the user enters the general winning opening 50P after rolling on the stage 57 and a case where the user enters the general winning opening 50P directly without rolling on the stage 57. The former case (entrance after rolling) may not occur, and only the latter case (direct entry) may occur.

  Further, when a game ball that has entered the distribution area and has flowed down the distribution area while changing the flow direction by the game nail enters between the drop position defining members 59e and 59f, the game ball is displayed on the image display device. 5 passes through the general winning opening 50Q including the general winning opening 50Q without touching the obstacle, and enters the general winning opening 50Q at a predetermined rate (including 100%). Here, the game balls that have entered between the drop position defining members 59e and 59f enter the general winning opening 50Q at a higher rate than the game balls that have fallen onto the stage 57 without entering any of the drop position defining members. However, there are a case where the user enters the general winning opening 50Q after rolling on the stage 57 and a case where the user enters the general winning opening 50Q directly without rolling on the stage 57. The former case (entrance after rolling) may not occur, and only the latter case (direct entry) may occur.

  Further, a through hole CH is provided in the center of the stage 57 so as to penetrate from the top surface to the bottom surface, and the position of the through hole CH is directly above the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. . When a game ball that has entered the distribution area and has flowed down the distribution area while changing the flow direction by the game nail enters between the drop position defining members 59c and 59d, the game ball is stored in the image display device 5. It passes through the front, passes through the through hole CH without touching the obstacle, and enters the first start winning opening at a predetermined rate (including 100%). Here, the game balls that have entered between the drop position defining members 59c and 59d enter the first start winning opening at a higher rate than the game balls that have fallen onto the stage 57 without entering any of the drop position defining members. There are a case where the game nail below the stage 57 is contacted and the first start winning opening is entered, and a case where the game nail below the stage 57 is not touched and the first start winning opening is entered directly. The former case (entrance after contact) may not occur, and only the latter case (direct entry) may occur.

  In this way, the game ball can fall directly in front of the image display device 5 and can directly win a winning opening provided below the obstacle without touching an obstacle, so that a refreshing feeling at the time of winning can be obtained. Can be improved.

(General prize-winning production by production ball)
As shown in FIG. 57, when a game ball wins a general winning opening, an effect using the effect ball 85 may be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 57, the left side member 81 and the right side member 82, the left movable bottom member 83 and the right movable bottom member 84, the production ball receiving unit 86, the production ball supply unit 87, and the left shielding member 88 and the right shielding. An effect ball device 80 constituted by the member 89 may be provided.

  The left and right members 81 and 82 are surrounded by the left and right members 82, and an effect sphere storage section capable of storing the effect sphere 85 is formed by a bottom surface constituted by the left movable bottom member 83 and the right movable bottom member 84. In addition, an effect ball supply unit 87 to which the effect ball 85 is supplied is provided above the effect ball storage unit, and the left shielding member 88 and the right shielding member 89 are formed in a roof shape above the effect ball supply unit 87. By installing, the game ball launched into the game area 10 is prevented from entering the effect ball storage unit. An effect ball receiving unit 86 is provided below the effect ball storage unit, and receives and collects the effect ball 85 dropped from the effect ball storage unit.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 57 (1), when the left movable bottom member 83 and the right movable bottom member 84 are in a horizontal storageable state, the effect ball 85 is stored in the effect ball storage unit. In this storable state, it is assumed that a game ball wins a general winning opening 50E installed above the effect ball storage unit. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 that has recognized the winning of the general winning opening 50E by receiving the general winning opening designation command rotates the rotation shaft 83a of the left movable bottom member 83 clockwise by a predetermined angle as viewed from the player. Therefore, the first servo motor (not shown) connected to the rotation shaft 83a is driven, and the rotation shaft 84a of the right movable bottom member 84 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle as viewed from the player. A second servo motor (not shown) connected to 84a is driven.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (2), as the first servo motor is driven, the right end of the left movable bottom member 83 is lowered and the right end of the left movable bottom member 83 is inclined by a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction. 2 With the drive of the servo motor, the left end of the right movable bottom member 84 is lowered, and the left end of the right movable bottom member 84 is in an inclined state inclined by a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction. Thereby, the lower part of the effect sphere storage unit is opened, and all the stored effect spheres 85 are released downward and received by the effect sphere receiving unit 86. Here, since a predetermined number (for example, 15) of winning balls are paid out to the upper plate 60 based on winning in the general winning opening 50E, it is as if the player flows downward from the effect ball storage unit. It feels as if the produced ball 85 was paid out to the player from the upper plate 60. In this way, it is possible to improve interest by winning a prize in the general winning opening.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (3), the first servo motor rotates the rotary shaft 83a by a predetermined angle counterclockwise when viewed from the player, thereby returning the left movable bottom member 83 to the horizontal state, and the second servo. The rotation shaft 84a is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle when viewed from the player by the motor, and the right movable bottom member 84 is returned to the horizontal state. Thereby, it returns to a storage possible state. The game balls received by the effect ball receiving section 86 flow one by one vertically into the effect ball circulation path provided on the back side of the game board 2, and are then transported upward by the transport mechanism, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the effect ball supply unit 87 releases the effect ball storage unit on the surface side of the game board 2. In this way, the effect sphere 85 circulates and is stored again in the effect sphere storage unit.

  It should be noted that the number of effect balls 85 stored in the effect ball storage unit is preferably the same as the number of prize balls given when a game ball wins the general prize opening 50E. In addition, when a game ball wins a general winning opening, the image display device 5 or the second image display device 5S displays an image showing that the number of winning balls according to the general winning opening is paid out. May be. For example, when the general control port designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 has the number corresponding to the general prize opening designated by the received general prize opening designation command in the image display device 5 or the second image display device 5S. An image in which a pachinko ball falls to the bottom of the screen may be displayed.

[Other variations]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Note that the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-described production forms may be arbitrarily combined, and the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-described production forms and the following modifications are shown. You may make it combine arbitrarily the control and structure of a game machine which were made.

  In the above embodiment, the game balls that have not passed through the gate 41B due to the arrangement of the game nails on the game board surface and the flow direction of the game balls are placed in the third general winning port 50C and the fourth general winning port 50D. It shall be possible to win any one. By adopting such a configuration, even when the game ball does not pass through the gate 41B in the probability variation state or the short time state, it is possible to expect a prize to be placed in the general prize opening provided on the downstream side of the gate 41B. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, the game balls that have not passed through the gate 41B may win a prize in either the third general winning port 50C or the fourth general winning port 50D at a higher rate than the game balls that have passed through the gate 41B. . By adopting such a configuration, even when the frequency of game balls passing through the gate 41B is low in the probability variation state or the short-time state, it is possible to expect winning in a general winning opening provided on the downstream side. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest. Furthermore, a specific production | presentation is performed based on the winning to a general winning opening, and a game entertainment interest can be raised more.

  In the above embodiment, executing a specific effect at a different rate depending on the gaming state includes executing the specific effect only in a certain gaming state, and not executing the specific effect in other gaming states. . Further, in the above embodiment, in order to execute the specific effect at a different rate depending on the game period, the specific effect can be executed only in a certain game period, and the specific effect is not executed in other game periods. included.

  In the above embodiment, in the first state, it is possible to execute the effect only in the first state in order to execute the effect at a higher rate than in the second state different from the first state. In the second state, not including an effect is also included. Here, the classification between the first state and the second state includes the classification according to the number of reserved memories, the classification according to the execution period of the special figure game (the special figure game), in addition to the classification according to the gaming state described above. Whether or not variable display is being executed), according to the type of variation pattern (for example, whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with reach effect, or , Whether the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with pseudo-continuous effects), a classification according to a specific performance timing (for example, before the reach state is established in the variation pattern with reach effects) Or whether it is before or after execution, or whether it is before or after execution of pseudo-continuous production in a variation pattern with pseudo-continuous production). .

  In the first effect form to the twelfth effect form, the specific effect may be executable only in any one of (1) the normal state and (2) the probability variation state or the short time state. For example, (1) the specific effect may be executed only in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect may not be executed in the probability variation state or the short time state. In the thirteenth effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form, any one of (1) a period after the reach state is established in reach change and (2) a period outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in reach change. The specific effect may be executable only in one case. For example, (1) The specific effect can be executed only in the period after the reach state is established in the reach change, and (2) In the case of the period outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in the reach change The production may not be executed.

  In the first effect form to the twelfth effect form, depending on whether the gaming state is (1) the normal state, or (2) the probability variation state or the short time state, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the execution state is executed. Although the type of the specific effect is different, when the big hit game state is controlled, whether or not the specific effect is executed and whether the specific effect to be executed is based on the same effect execution conditions as when the game state is the normal state. The type may be determined, and the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the common effect execution condition when the probability variation state or the time saving state is in effect. . In addition, the game state classification is not limited to (1) normal state, (2) probability variation state or time-short state, for example, (1) high base state, (2) It may be classified as being in a high base state, or may be classified as (1) a big hit gaming state or (2) a big hit gaming state.

  In the thirteenth effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form, the game period is (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change, or (2) outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in the reach change. Depending on whether it is a period or not, the presence or absence of execution of a specific effect and the type of specific effect to be executed are determined, but not limited to such a game period classification, for example, (1) Number of reserved memories Or (2) the number of reserved storages is a period of 2 or more, (1) whether or not the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed, (2) It may be a section indicating whether or not the decorative symbol variable display is not executed.

  Also, (1) it is a period in which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) it is a period in which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, It may be a category. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period in which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period in which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, it may be classified as (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. good.

  In the first to fourth effect forms and the thirteenth to sixteenth effect forms, only one of the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed as the specific effect. May be executable. That is, when the winning condition is established, one of the change result notice effect and the prefetch notice effect that matches a predetermined condition is executed (for example, the change result notice effect is executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less). In the case where the number of stored memories is 2 or more, a pre-reading notice effect may be executed), or both of them may be executed simultaneously. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect is an effect that changes the mode of the display information (display part) corresponding to the hold storage, the above-described change result notice effect (sound effect only, or sound effect and accessory effect) The pre-reading notice effect can be executed simultaneously, and the player can grasp that both the change result notice effect and the pre-reading notice effect have been executed. Further, the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display executed when the winning condition is satisfied becomes a big hit symbol, the change result notice effect is preferentially executed, and the display result of the variable display executed when the winning condition is satisfied If there is a hold memory that is determined to be a big hit in the determination at the time of starting winning, although it is a symbol that is off, it is preferable to preferentially execute the pre-reading notice effect.

  In the embodiment described above, it is set whether or not the number of winnings is displayed by the operation button 30 only in the period determined as the non-game state by the effect control CPU 120 (only when the demonstration screen is displayed). Although the example which becomes possible was demonstrated, it is not restricted to such a form, it does not depend on a game state (for example, a normal state, a probability change state, a time-short state, a big hit game state), and the execution state (special symbol) of a special game Whether or not variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memories of special figure games), the execution status of ordinary figure games (whether or not variable display of normal symbols is being executed, and the number of reserved memories of ordinary figure games) Regardless of whether the winning number is displayed by the operation button 30 or not. That is, whether or not to display the winning number by the operation button 30 even during a period in which the game is performed, for example, a period in which the decorative symbol variable display is performed or a period in which the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. It may be settable. In such a configuration, when it is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening, regardless of the gaming state (for example, normal state, probability change state, short-time state, jackpot gaming state) The execution status of the game (whether or not the special symbol variable display is executed, the number of reserved memory of the special symbol game), the execution status of the normal game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, The total number of winnings in the display control table is immediately displayed regardless of the number of reserved games stored in the usual game.

  In the above embodiment, there is no restriction on the period during which the display changeover switch 32 can be operated. Therefore, if the glass door frame 3a can be opened on the game hall side, the display changeover switch 32 is operated. It is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. Not only in such a form, you may make it restrict | limit the period in which setting operation in the game hall side is possible. For example, as a configuration in which the display changeover switch 32 is not provided, when setting whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the game hall side, in the setting screens shown in FIGS. It is assumed that selection and determination are performed by the operation button 30. In such a configuration, depending on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, short-time state, jackpot game state), or the execution status of a special figure game (whether or not a special symbol variable display is executed) 5 (1) to 5 (1) to FIG. 5 (b) depending on the number of stored special figure games) and the execution status of ordinary games (whether or not variable display of normal symbols is being executed or the number of stored memories of ordinary games). The setting screen shown in (3) may not be displayed. For example, the period during which the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the period during which the probability change state or the short-time state is controlled, the period during which the special figure game is being executed, the period during which the number of reserved memories in the special figure game is not 0, etc. The setting screen shown in 5 (1) to (3) may not be displayed, and the setting operation on the game hall side may be prohibited.

  In the above-described embodiment, only when the game hall side displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening by setting the display changeover switch 32 that cannot be operated by the player (the operation unit is set to the second position). The setting screen (FIGS. 5 (1) to (3)) for enabling the player to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed. Not only in the form, but as a configuration in which the display changeover switch 32 that can be operated only on the game hall side is not provided, whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be set on both the player side and the game hall side Common setting screen (similar to FIGS. 5 (1) to 5 (3)), for selecting and deciding whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by operating the operation buttons 30. Screen) may be displayed. In the configuration in which such a common setting screen is displayed, even if the game store clerk is set not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the player subsequently determines the number of winnings in the general winning opening. In the case of the setting to be displayed, the number received in the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 5 by applying the setting received later.

  In addition, the display change switch 32 that can be operated only by the game hall side is set to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening (the operation unit is set to the second position), and the operation button 30 is operated in general. Common information (for example, the number of winnings and the total number of winnings for each general winning slot stored in the display control table) is displayed on the image display device 5 when the number of winning prizes is set to be displayed. You may make it let it. In such a configuration, even when the setting is made so that the common information is not displayed by switching the display changeover switch 32, when the common information is set to be displayed by the operation of the operation button 30 after that, Common information may be displayed on the image display device 5 by applying the settings received later.

  In the above-described embodiment, a limit may be provided for a period (game state) in which the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be displayed. For example, in the period during which the decorative symbol variable display is executed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may not be displayed during the period from when the reach state is established until the finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed. . Further, in a predetermined gaming state such as a probability change state or a short time state, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may not be displayed. In such a form, the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 32) on the game hall side determines whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening in any period (game state). It may be settable or may be settable by setting means (for example, the operation button 30) on the player side.

  In the above embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player inputs the player ID (for example, the ID of the recording medium owned by the player or the personal identification ID registered on the website) by the operation button 30. As a result, game data including the number of winnings in the general winning opening after the player ID is entered can be tabulated, and the operation button 30 is operated when the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is finished. Thus, game data aggregated after the player ID is input may be output to the image display device 5 as a two-dimensional code. The player captures the two-dimensional code (information that can identify the player ID and the game data) with an information terminal having a two-dimensional code reading function, so that the information management server connected to the information terminal and the Internet And the game data specified from the two-dimensional code is added to the game data stored in the information management server in association with the player ID specified from the two-dimensional code. The game data managed in is updated. Since the player can access the information management server through the information terminal and check his / her stored game data (game data associated with the player ID), as a result, the player wins the general prize opening. The number can be grasped. In such a form, whether or not the two-dimensional code can be displayed on the image display device 5 may be set by a setting means on the game hall side (for example, the display changeover switch 32), and may be set by the player side. The setting may be made by (for example, the operation button 30).

  In the case of such a form, a privilege may be given to the player according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening stored for each player ID in the information management server. For example, when the number of winnings in the general winning award exceeds a predetermined number, a background image or application software that can be used on the information terminal is given as a privilege to the player with that player ID. Also good. In addition, points corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening may be given to the player, and the information management server may manage the number of points owned by the player in association with the player ID. The player may be able to exchange part or all of the possession points for benefits.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening has been described, but the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed, and the game ball wins in the general winning opening. You may alert | report that it did. For example, a winning notification message may be displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and a winning notification sound effect or sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Anyway. In the case of such a configuration, as in the above embodiment, whether or not to notify that the game ball has won the general winning opening is set by the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 32) on the game hall side. It may be possible, or may be set by setting means (for example, operation button 30) on the player side.

(1) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the winning situation at the general winning opening may be notified. Specifically, the image display device 5 receives the number of winnings and the winning frequency for each general winning opening (the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of balls fired to the game area, or the general winnings per hour). (The number of winning prizes to the mouth) may be displayed, or the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed according to the number of winning prizes to the general winning mouth and the winning frequency. In addition, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, the winning in the general winning opening may be notified by voice from the speakers 8L and 8R. By using such voice notification, it becomes easy for a game or the like to grasp the winning frequency at the general winning opening. Further, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, the hitting operation handle, the operation button 30 or the like may be vibrated. By using such a bodily sensation notification, it becomes easy for a game or the like to grasp the winning frequency at the general winning opening.

  The number of winnings and the winning frequency at each general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 5 and also output to a management device such as a hall computer that is communicably connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to manage the number of prizes received at each general prize opening for each machine. This information can be used for maintenance of the gaming machine, for example.

(2) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a sound effect may be output when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and a sound effect different from when winning in another winning opening such as a start winning opening Should be output. In such a configuration, the sound effect at the time of winning may be made different for each general winning opening. Further, in such a configuration, the sound effect may not be output when a specific general winning opening is won.

(3) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the execution ratio and the production mode of the notice effect may be changed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general prize opening. In such a configuration, for example, in the first decorative symbol variable display that is executed after the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, the execution ratio and the effect mode of the notice effect change, and a predetermined variable, for example, a predetermined variable Until the number of times of display is executed, it is preferable that the changed execution ratio and effect mode are continued.

(4) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the music (BGM) may be changed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, the music is changed from the start of the first decorative symbol variable display executed after the game ball has won the general winning opening, and a predetermined variable display number, for example, is executed for a predetermined period. Until then, it is better to continue the music after the change. In addition, when the number of winnings in the general winning award reaches a predetermined value, a specific music piece (for example, a big hit music piece) may be output. Also, based on the fact that a game ball has won the general prize opening or that the number of winning game balls to the general prize opening has reached a predetermined number, the player reproduces from a plurality of songs (BGM). The music (BGM) may be selectable.

  Further, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the music being played may be continuously output. For example, when the game is controlled in the big hit game state, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the music in the big hit game may be continuously output even after the big hit game state is finished. Moreover, based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening, a stage change that changes the background image of the decorative design and the music (BGM) may be executed. Note that the stage (background image and music) of the transfer destination may be made different depending on which of the plurality of general winning awards is won.

(5) In the above embodiment, the specific effect executed based on the winning to the general winning opening is described as an example of the change result notice effect and the prefetch notice effect related to the display result of the special figure game. Not limited to such a form, the specific effect may be an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game. For example, an effect may be provided in which a general winning opening where a game ball is not winning among a plurality of general winning openings is displayed, and a character appears when a gaming ball wins the general winning opening.

(6) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball has not been won at the general prize opening for a predetermined period even though the game ball has been launched into the game area, or the frequency of winning the prize at the general prize opening is less than the threshold value In some cases, a specific notification such as displaying on the image display device 5 that a winning in a general winning opening has not occurred may be executed. In addition, when a game ball is not fired only in a specific general winning slot among a plurality of general winning slots for a predetermined period, even though the game ball has been fired in the gaming area, or in a specific general winning slot When the frequency is less than the threshold value, a specific notification such as displaying that no winning for the specific general winning opening has occurred on the image display device 5 may be executed.

(7) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a simultaneous performance is executed at a specific time (for example, every 60 minutes), depending on the number of prizes received in the general winning opening until the simultaneous performance is executed, or simultaneously You may make it perform a specific production | presentation according to the prize-winning to a general winning opening during a production period. In addition, the decorative design may be changed according to the winning in the general winning opening during the variable display of the decorative design, the stop design may be changed, or the sliding effect may be executed.

(8) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, every time a game ball wins a general winning opening, the object displayed on the image display device 5 is increased by one to recognize the winning and the number of winnings in the general winning opening. It may be easy. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, only the number of winning balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening is cumulatively added, and the number of winning balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening. When the number reaches the predetermined number, a specific effect such as displaying “100 breakthrough!” On the image display device 5 may be executed. In addition, when the timing when the number of prize balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number is a period in which a gaming machine error is reported based on fraud detection or failure detection, It is assumed that the notification of the gaming machine error is given priority over the specific effect, and the specific effect that has been put on hold after the notification of the gaming machine error is ended.

(9) In the pachinko machine 1, a winning sound is output every time a game ball wins a general winning opening, and during the notification of a gaming machine error, a notification sound of a gaming machine error is given rather than a winning sound. You may make it output preferentially. In addition, every time a game ball wins a general winning opening, a winning display is performed on the image display device 5, and during the notification of a gaming machine error, the display of the gaming machine error is given priority over the winning display. You may make it let it.

(10) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big prize opening and the winning of the game ball to the general prize opening when being controlled to the big hit gaming state The number of award balls paid out based on the above may be added to be displayed on the image display device 5 as [the number of prize balls paid out in the big hit gaming state]. In the case of such a configuration, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is added to the displayed [number of prize balls paid out in the big hit gaming state]. At the same time, it is preferable that the number of prize balls to be paid out is added based on the winning of a game ball to the general prize opening. That is, the increase in the number of prize balls per display update may be apparently increased. In addition, the [number of winning balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state] is updated according to the winning timing of the game ball at the winning jackpot, and [in the jackpot gaming state according to the winning timing of the game ball at the general winning mouth] The display may be updated according to the individual winning timing, such as updating the number of prize balls paid out.

(11) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of prize balls may be varied according to the general winning opening. For example, when a game ball wins the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B in the left gaming area 10A, ten winning balls are paid out, but the third general winning opening in the right gaming area 10B. When game balls win the 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D, five prize balls may be paid out.

(12) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute an effect of hitting a game ball to win a general winning opening. For example, in a form in which a specific effect is executed by winning a game ball in each of a plurality of general winning openings as in the sixth effect form, the seventh effect form, and the fourteenth effect form, A general winning opening where a game ball has not won among the general winning holes is notified by the image display device 5, and an effect that suggests to the player to aim at the general winning opening where the game ball has not been won is executed. It is better to Moreover, in the form in which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game balls have won in a specific order in the plurality of winning holes as in the eighth effect form and the sixteenth effect form, It is preferable to notify the player of the order of winning by the image display device 5 so that the player can grasp the order. For example, in order to execute the specific effect A of the eighth effect form, first, “Aim at the first general prize opening!” Is displayed, and after the winning to the first general prize opening 50A is confirmed, the next "Aim for the first start prize opening!" Is displayed, and after the winning to the first start prize opening is confirmed, finally "Aim for the second general prize opening!" After winning the general winning opening 50B is confirmed, the specific effect A is executed.

(13) In addition, when the game area 10 is provided with a guide path for a game ball toward the general winning opening, and the entrance sensor can detect that the game ball has entered the guide path. Based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the entry sensor, it is possible to execute an effect of informing in advance that the game ball will win the general winning opening. Thereby, the possibility that the player misses the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening can be reduced. In addition, a certain period is secured from the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening until the payout of the winning ball is executed, and the production based on the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening is executed within that period. You may do it.

(14) When a stage on which the game ball can roll is provided below the image display device 5, a general winning opening and an entrance to a guiding path connected to the general winning opening are provided on the stage. It may be configured so that the player is interested in whether or not the game ball enters the general winning opening or the entrance to the guide route.

(15) You may make it perform the production | presentation in which the display mode of the object displayed on the image display apparatus 5 is updated for every prize-winning to a general winning opening. For example, when the character grows up for each prize winning in the general winning opening and reaches a predetermined number of winnings (when the character grows up to the final stage), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege etc.) is executed. You may do it. In addition, an effect that increases the gauge is executed every time a prize is awarded to the general winning opening, and when a predetermined number of winnings is reached (when the gauge reaches the maximum), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege) Etc.) may be executed. In this form of presentation, different objects are displayed according to the general winning opening, and when the game ball wins the general winning opening, only the display mode of the object corresponding to the general winning opening is updated. You may be made to do.

(16) In the above embodiment, the type of specific effect (variation result notice effect, prefetch notice effect) to be executed differs depending on the gaming state when the winning condition is established, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although the example in which the sound is different has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be varied depending on the gaming state. In the probabilistic state and the short-time state, there are many cases where the effect by the game effect lamp 9 and the music to be played are flashy to improve the interest compared to the normal state. You may make it a flashy aspect which is easy to understand for a player.

(17) When a certain number of game balls are fired in the game area 10 but the number of winnings and the winning frequency at the general winning opening are less than the reference value, the player is usually informed. Information on gaming machines that are difficult to perform, such as a latent probability change state, a limiter, etc., may be notified.

(18) In the above embodiment, the example in which the specific effect is executed immediately after the winning condition is satisfied has been described. However, the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory) If the winning condition is satisfied when the total number of the number and the number of the second reserved storage) is 0, neither the fluctuation result notice effect nor the prefetch notice effect can be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game (for example, the appearance of a specific character or the reproduction of specific music) as the specific effect.

(19) In addition, when the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the winning condition is satisfied when the number of reserved memories (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is also 0 Alternatively, the execution of the specific effect may be suspended, and then the specific effect may be executed at the timing when the variable display of the special figure is executed, or at the timing when the number of stored memories becomes 2 or more. In other words, the specific effect is not immediately executed based on the establishment of the winning condition, and the specific effect that has been suspended based on the start condition of the special game or the start condition of the special game is satisfied. You may make it perform.

(20) In the above embodiment, when the number of winnings in the general winning award in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the game ball is not won in the general winning opening (for example, “the number of winnings in the general winning opening is small. Message ”) may be displayed on the image display device 5. Here, based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, only in the period when the information for the store clerk (winning number information stored in the winning number management table) is set to the maintenance mode in which the image display device 5 is displayed. It may be displayed on the image display device 5 that the game ball does not win at the winning opening. A game shop clerk can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening by firing the game ball in the game area 10 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode. Note that, regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, when the number of winnings in the general winning award for a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the image display device 5 displays that the game ball does not win in the general winning award. Anyway. Similarly to the display control of the number of winnings to the general winning a prize, based on the setting by the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30, when the number of winnings to the general winning award in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, You may make it display on the image display apparatus 5 that a game ball does not win a winning opening.

(21) In the above embodiment, when the number of winnings in the general winning award in the predetermined period is larger than the predetermined number, the game ball is excessively won in the general winning opening (for example, “ The message “There are too many winnings” may be displayed on the image display device 5. Here, based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, only in the period when the information for the store clerk (winning number information stored in the winning number management table) is set to the maintenance mode in which the image display device 5 is displayed. It is good to display on the image display device 5 that the game ball has won too much in the winning opening. A game shop clerk can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening by firing the game ball in the game area 10 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode.

(22) In the above embodiment, the winning information stored in the winning number management table of the effect control board 12 is transmitted from the pachinko machine 1 to the gaming information management device that manages the gaming information, thereby managing the gaming information. In the apparatus, the number-of-wins information of each gaming machine is managed. The game control microcomputer 100 outputs a general winning signal when the gaming control microcomputer 100 detects a winning of a game ball in the general winning opening (for example, outputs one pulse signal for each winning). By doing so, the game information management device may manage the number of winnings in the general winning opening for each gaming machine based on the reception of the general winning signal. In addition, the game information management device, as game information, the number of winnings in a general winning opening per predetermined period (for example, 1 hour) or the number of winnings in a general winning opening per predetermined number of balls (for example, 6000 shots). Alternatively, the winning rate for the general winning opening (the number of winnings for the general winning opening ÷ the number of shots) may be calculated and managed for each gaming machine.

(23) In the above embodiment, the production control CPU 120 has been described with respect to an example in which the number of objects to be displayed on the image display device 5 is increased every time a general winning opening is won. You may make it the aspect of the object currently displayed on the image display apparatus 5 change for every winning prize to a winning opening. For example, the facial expression of the character displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub-side) of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous, etc., one change is made when the change is started. Although an example in which a pattern designation command is transmitted has been shown, a variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the main board (main side) is so-called in the case where the first command is not reached, such as the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous, the presence or absence of a sliding effect, etc. A command (for example, a previous variation pattern designation command) indicating the variation time and variation mode (for example, the previous variation pattern) of the second stop) is transmitted, and in the second command, the type of reach, the presence / absence of a redrawing effect, A command (for example, a post-variation pattern designation command) indicating a variation time or a variation mode (for example, a post-variation pattern) after reaching reach (after the so-called second stop when the reach is not reached) may be transmitted. .

  In this case, the effect control board may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The main board may notify the change time by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing may be selected by the effect control board. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. Thus, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  Only one type of out-of-order symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “-”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. . Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decoration LED Various rendering operations including, etc. can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Alternatively, it may be distributed in a pre-installed manner in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

1 ... Pachinko machine
2… Game board
3 ... Frame for gaming machine 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device
5 ... Image display device
6A ... Ordinary winning ball device
6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device
7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker
9 ... Game effect lamp
11 ... Main board
12 ... Production control board
13 ... Voice control board
14 ... Lamp control board
15… Relay board
20 ... Normal symbol display
21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start-up switch
23 ... Count switch
30 ... Operation buttons 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 1000 ... Movable accessory

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having a start winning area and a general winning area into which game media can enter,
Variable display means for executing variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area;
A granting means for giving a specific value when a game medium enters the general winning area;
With
A plurality of general winning areas with different specific values to be given are provided next to each other,
A gaming machine further comprising distribution means for distributing game media to each general winning area.